Nokia 5700 XpressMusic User Manual
N o k ia 5 700 X pr es sMu s ic User Guide 92553 38 Is sue 1
DECL ARAT ION OF CONFORM ITY Hereby, NOKIA CORPORATION declares that this RM-230 product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. A copy of the Declaration of Conformity can be found at http://www.n ok ia.com/phones/declar a tion_of_conformity/ é 200 7 No kia. A ll ri ghts r es erved . Nokia, Nokia Connecting People, Nok ia Care, Navi, and Visual Radio are trademarks or r egis tered trademarks of Nokia Corporation. Nokia tune and Visual Radio are sound marks of Nokia Corporation. Other product and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks or tradenames of their respe ctive own ers . Reproduction, transfer, distribution, or storage of par t or all of the contents in this document in any form without the prior written permission of Nokia is prohibited. This product includes softwa r e licensed from Symbian Software Ltd é 1998-2007. Symbian and Symbian OS are trademarks of Symbian Ltd. US Patent N o 5 818437 and ot her pending patents. T9 text input software C opyright (C) 1997-2007 . Tegic Communications, Inc. All rights res erved. Java⢠and all Java-based marks are t rademarks or registered trademarks of Su n Microsystems, Inc. This product is licensed under the MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfolio License (i) for personal and noncommercial use in connection with information which has been encoded in compliance with the MPEG-4 Visual St andard by a cons u mer engaged in a person al and non commercial activity and (ii) for use in connection with MPEG-4 video provided by a licensed video provider. No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional information, including that rela ted to promotional, internal, and commercial u ses, may be obtained from MPEG L A , LLC. See <http://www.mpegla.c om> . Nokia operates a policy of ongoing development. Nokia reserves the righ t to make changes and improvements to any of the products described in this document without prior notice. TO THE M A XIMUM EXTEN T PE RMITTED B Y APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO CI R CUMSTANCE S SHALL NOKIA OR ANY OF ITS LICENSORS BE RESPO N SIBLE FOR ANY LOSS OF DATA OR IN C OME OR ANY SPECIAL, IN CI D ENT A L, C O N SEQ U E NT IA L O R I ND I RE CT D AMA G ES H OW S OEV E R CAU S ED . T H E C O NT E N T S O F TH I S DO C U M E N T A R E P R O V I D E D " A S IS " . E X C E P T A S R E Q U IR E D B Y A P P LI C A B L E L A W , NO WARRA N TIES OF ANY KIND, EITHE R EXPRESS OR IMPLIE D , INCLUDIN G , BUT NOT LI MI TED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE MADE IN RELATI O N TO THE A CCURACY, RELIAB ILITY OR CONTENTS OF THIS DOCU M ENT. NOKIA R E SERVES THE RIGHT TO R EVISE THIS D OCUMENT OR WITHDR AW IT AT A N Y TIME WITHO UT PRIOR NOTICE. The availability of particular products and applications for these products may vary by region. Please check with your Nokia dealer for details, and availability of language options. 0434
This device complies with Directive 20 0 2/95/EC on the restriction of the use of certain h azardous substances in elec trical and electron ic equipment. Export controls This dev ice may conta in comm odit ies, tech n ology or softwa re s ubject t o export laws and regulations from the US and other countries. Diversion contrary to law is prohibited. NO WARRAN TY The third-party applicat ion s provided with your device may have been created and may be owned by persons or entities not affiliated with or related to Nokia. Nokia does not own the copyright s or intellectual property rights to the third-party appli cations. As su ch, N okia does not take a ny responsibility for end-user support, functionalit y of the applications, or the information in the applications or these materials. Nokia does not provide any warranty for t h e third-party applications. BY USI NG THE APPL ICATI ONS Y OU A CKNOWLED GE T HAT T HE APPL ICATI ONS A RE PRO VIDED AS IS WITHOUT WA R RANTY OF ANY K I ND, EXPRESS OR IM PLI ED, TO THE MA XIMUM EXTENT PER MITTED BY APPLICAB LE LAW . YOU FURTH ER AC KNOW LEDGE THAT NEI THER N OKIA NOR IT S AFFILIA TES MAK E AN Y REPRESENTATI O NS OR WARRANTIES, EXPR E SS OR IMPLIED, INCL U DING BUT NOT LIMITE D TO WA RRANTIE S OF TI TLE, MERCHANT ABILI TY OR F ITNES S FOR A P ARTICU LAR PU RPOSE , OR THA T THE APPLICATION S W ILL NO T I NFRINGE ANY THI RD -PARTY PATE N TS, COPYRIG HTS, TR ADEMARKS, O R OTHER RIG HTS. 9255 338 I ssu e 1
4 Cont ents For your safety ................................. 6 General i nformatio n ........................ 8 Access codes ........ .......... .......... ......... .......... ....... 8 Nokia suppor t and con tact i nformation .... 9 1. G et star ted .................................. 10 Insert a (U)SIM card and battery .......... .... 10 MicroSD c a rd sl ot ......... .............. .......... ......... 11 Charge t h e ba tt ery ....... .......... ......... .......... .... 12 Switch the phone on and off ....... .......... .... 13 Set time and date ......... .......... ......... .......... .... 13 Normal operating position ....... .......... ......... 13 Configur a tion settings .......... ......... .......... .... 13 2. Y our ph one ................................. 14 Keys a nd parts .......... .......... ......... .......... ......... 14 Modes...... .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... ......... 15 Standby mode ...... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 1 6 Indic a tors ......... .......... .......... ......... .......... ......... 1 7 Menu ....... .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... ......... 19 Welcome a pplication ........ .............. .......... .... 19 Tutoria l......... .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 1 9 Help ......... .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... ......... 2 0 Volume control .... .......... .............. .......... ......... 20 Keypad loc k ( keygu a rd) ......... ......... .......... .... 2 0 Connect a compatib le headset ......... ......... 21 Connect a USB data c able ....... .......... ......... 21 Attach a wrist s trap .......... ......... .......... ......... 2 1 3. Ca ll fu nctions ............................. 21 Make a voice call .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 21 Answer or r eject a call .............. .......... ......... 23 Make a video call .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 24 Answer a v ideo call ...... .......... ......... .......... .... 25 Video s h arin g ....... .......... .......... .............. ......... 26 Log ........... .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... ......... 28 4. W rite te xt ................................... 29 Trad iti onal text input ............ ......... .......... .... 29 Predic t ive text input .... .............. .......... ......... 29 Copy and delete text ........ ......... .......... ......... 30 5. Messagi ng .................................. 30 Write a nd send message s ........ .......... .......... 3 1 InboxâÂÂre c eive mess a ges .......... .......... .......... 3 3 My folders ...... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... 34 Mailbox ....... ......... ............... .......... .......... .......... 3 4 Outbox ......... ......... .......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 35 View m es sages on the SIM c ar d ...... .......... 36 Cell br oad cas t ......... .......... .......... .......... .......... 3 6 Service co mmand e ditor .......... .......... .......... 3 6 Messaging s ettings ..... .......... .......... .......... ..... 36 Message reader ....... ............... .......... .......... ..... 40 6. Contact s ......... ............................ 40 Manage conta cts......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 40 Manage conta ct groups ...... .......... .......... ..... 41 Add a r inging tone ...... .......... .......... .......... ..... 41 Assign speed dialing k eys ........ .......... .......... 4 1 7. Gal lery ............ ............................ 42 Gallery f unctions ......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 42 8. Musi c player ... ............................ 46 Listen to music........ .......... .......... .......... .......... 46 Music m e nu ........ .......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 47 Playlist s ....... ......... .......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 47 Music sh o p ..... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... 48 Transfer music ......... .......... ............... .......... ..... 48 9. Medi a .............. ............................ 50 Visual R adio ........ .......... .......... ............... .......... 5 0 Camera ... ......... .......... ............... .......... .......... ..... 53 Movie director......... .......... .......... .......... .......... 54 Videos .......... ......... .......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 56 Recorde r ...... ......... .......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 56 RealPlayer....... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... 5 6 Flash Player ......... .......... .......... ............... .......... 58 10.Perso nalization ......................... 58 Themes ........ ......... .......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 58 Profiles ........ ......... ............... .......... .......... .......... 5 9 3-D to n es........ .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... 60
5 11.Web.... ........................................ 60 Mobile Sea rch ...... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 60 Web.......... .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... ......... 61 12.Organ izer ................................... 66 Clock ........ .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... ......... 6 6 Calenda r ...... .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 67 Notes ....... ............... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 68 Calc u lator.... .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 6 8 Converter .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... ......... 68 13.Applicatio ns .............................. 70 Down l oad!........ .......... .......... ......... .......... ......... 7 0 My own ........ .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 70 14.Setting s ..................................... 71 Voic e commands ...... .......... ......... ............... .... 71 Call ma ilbox ......... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 71 Speed dial ............. .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 72 Phone set tings .......... .......... ......... .......... ......... 72 Speech..... .......... ............... .......... ......... .......... .... 81 Settings wizard.... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 8 1 Ins t ant messaging ........ .............. .......... ......... 81 15.Connect ivity .............................. 84 PC Suite ....... .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 84 Bluet ooth connection ....... ......... .......... ......... 8 4 Connect ion manager ........ ......... .......... ......... 87 Push to talk .... .......... ............... .......... .......... ..... 87 Remote s y nchron ization .......... .......... .......... 9 1 Infrar ed ....... ......... .......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 93 Modem ........ ......... .......... ............... .......... .......... 9 3 USB data cable........ .......... .......... .......... .......... 94 Data tr an sfer ...... .......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 94 16.Data man ager ........................... 95 Application m anager ....... .......... .......... .......... 9 5 File mana ger ....... .......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 96 Device ma n ager ...... .......... .......... .......... .......... 9 7 Memory card ........... .......... .......... .......... .......... 97 Activation keys........ .......... .......... .......... .......... 9 8 17.B attery infor mation ............... 100 Charging a nd discharging........ .......... ....... 10 0 Nokia ba ttery authe ntication guidelin es ....... .......... .......... .......... .......... ....... 101 18.En hancements ........................ 102 Care an d mainten ance ................. 102 Addit ional safe t y infor mation .................................. 103 Index ................... .......................... 107
6 For y our sa fety Read these sim ple guidelines. Not following them may be dangerous or illega l. Read the co mplete user g uid e for f urth er in forma tio n. SW ITC H O N S AF E LY Do not switch the device on when wir eless phone use is prohibited or whe n it may ca use interfe rence or dan ger. RO AD SA F ETY CO ME S F IR S T Obey all loca l laws. Always kee p your hands fre e to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consider ation while driving should be road safety. INT E RF ER E NCE All wireless device s may be susceptible to in terferenc e, which could a ffect performance. SWITC H OF F IN HOS PITA LS Follow any res tricti ons. Switch the devic e off near medical equip ment. SWI TCH O FF IN A IRCRAFT Follow an y restricti ons . Wireless device s can ca use interfe rence in aircraf t. SW ITC H O F F W HEN REF U EL I NG Do n o t u se the de v ice a t a refuel ing po int. Do n ot us e near fue l or che micals. SWI TCH O FF NEA R BLASTI NG Follow any res tricti ons. Do no t use the de vice wh ere blasting is in progr ess. USE S E NSIB LY Use only in the norma l position as explained in the product doc umentation. Do n ot to uc h the ant en na un nec es sar i ly. QUA L IF IE D SE R VIC E Only qualified personn el may install or repair thi s product. ENH AN C EM EN TS A ND B AT TER IE S Use only approved enhanceme nts and batteries. Do not connect incompatible products. WA TER - RE SI ST AN C E Your device is not wate r-resistant. Keep it dry. BAC K - UP CO PIES Remember to make back-up copies or keep a written record of all important information stored in your device.
7 CONN E CTING TO O TH ER DE V ICES When conne cting to an y othe r device, read its user gu ide for detailed s afety instructions. Do not con nect incompatib le products. EM ER GEN C Y CA L LS Ensur e the phone f unction of the devi ce is swi t ched on and in se rvice. Pr es s th e end key as man y times as need ed to clear the display and return to the stan dby mo d e. E nter the em ergency number, then pres s the ca ll key. Give your locati on. Do not end the call until giv en permission to do so. â About your device The wireless device described in this guide is approved for use on the GSM 850, 900, 1800, and 1900 a nd UMTS 210 0 netwo rks. Co ntact your s er vice pro vider for mor e inf ormati on about networks. When using the features in this device, obe y all laws and respect local customs, pr ivacy an d legitimate rights of others, including copyrigh ts. Copyright protections may prevent some image s, music (including ringing tones), and other content from being copied, modified, transferred, or forwa r ded. Your device supports internet connections and other meth ods of connectivity. Like comput ers, yo ur device may be exp osed to vir u ses, m alicious mess ages a nd applicat ions, an d other ha rmful con ten t. Exercise caut ion and ope n mess ages, ac ce pt connectivit y req uests, download content, and accept ins tallations only from trustw orthy sources. To increase the security of your device , consider installing antivir us software with a regular update se rvice and using a firewall application. Warning: T o u se any fea tures in t his device, oth er than th e alarm cl ock, the device mu st be sw itched on. Do not sw itch the de vice on when wireless de vice use may cause i nterfere nce or danger. â Netwo rk se rvi ces To use the pho ne you must have serv ice from a wireles s servic e provide r. Many of the featu res req uire spec ial netwo r k f eatures. T hese fea tures ar e not av a ila ble on all networks ; other netw orks m ay re quire that you make specific arrangemen ts with you r service provid er before y ou can use the n etwork se rvice s. Your se rvice provid er can give you instructio ns a nd explain what charges will apply. Some networks may have limitations that af fect how you can use networ k serv ices. For in stanc e, some networ ks may n ot sup port all lan guage - dependent characters and services. Your service provider may have requested that certain features be disa bled or not activated in your device . If so, these featu res will not appear on your device men u. Your device ma y also have a specia l configuration such as changes in menu n ames, menu orde r, and icons. Co nt act you r se rvi ce pr o vid e r f or m ore i nfo r ma ti on .
8 This device supports WAP 2.0 protocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/IP protocols. Some features of this devic e, such as web browsing, e-ma il, push to talk, instant m essaging, and multimedia me ssaging, require network s upport for these technologie s. â Enhancements, batteries, and charger s Check the model number of any charger before use with this device. This device is intended for use when supplied with power from the AC-3, AC-4, AC-5, DC-4 chargers or C A -44 ch arg er ad a pte r. Warning: U se only batte ries, charge r s, and enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The use of any other types m ay invalidate any approval or warranty, and may be dangerous. For availability of approved enhance ments, pleas e check with you r dealer. When you disconnect the power cord of any enh ancement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. Ge nera l info rmat ion â Access codes Lock c ode The lock code ( 5 digits) helps t o protect your phone against unauthorized use. The pre set co de is 12 345. Chan ge the c ode, an d keep t he new co de secr et and i n a safe place separate from your phone. To cha n ge the code a nd to set t he phone to request the code, se e âÂÂSecurity ,â p. 74. If you e nter an incorrect lock code five t ime s in su cce ssion, the phon e ignores furth e r ent ries of the code. Wa it for 5 m inutes , and enter the code again. When the de vice is loc ked , calls may be poss ible to the of ficial eme rgency n umber programmed in to your devic e. PIN codes The person a l identifica t ion number (PIN ) code and t h e universa l personal identification nu m ber (UPIN) code (4 to 8 digits) help to protect you r SIM card against unauthorized use. Se e âÂÂSecurity ,â p. 74. The PIN code is usu a lly supplied wit h the SIM car d. The PIN2 code ( 4 to 8 digits) may be supplied with the SIM card and is required for some fu n ctions.
9 The module PIN is required to access the information in the security module. The module PIN is su pplied with the SI M card if t he SIM card has a se curity module in it. The signing PIN is req uired for the digital signat ur e. The signing PIN is supplie d with the SIM card if t h e SIM card has a s ecurity module in it. PUK co de s The personal unblocking key (PUK) code and the universal personal unblocking key (UPUK) code (8 digits) are required to change a blocked PIN code a nd UPIN code, respectively. The PUK2 code is r equ ired to ch ange a blocked PIN2 code . If the codes are not supplied with the SIM card, contact your local service provider for th e codes. Ba rrin g p a ssw ord The barring passw ord (4 digits) is required w hen using Call barring . See âÂÂCall barring,â p. 78. You can obtain t h e password f rom your service pr ovider. If you enter an incorrect barr in g password three times in succession, the pass w ord is blocked. Con t act your service provide r. â Nokia support and contact infor ma tion On the web site, you can get information on the u se of Nokia products and services. If you need to contact customer service , check the list of loca l No ki a contact cent e rs at www.nokia. com /customerser vice . For mainte n ance service s, check y our nearest Nokia service ce nter at www. noki a.com/ rep a ir. Softw are upd ates Nokia may produce software updates that may offer new features, enhanced functions, or improved performance . You may be able to r equest these u pdates through the Nokia Software Updater PC application. To update the device software, you need th e Nokia Software Updater application and a com patible PC with Microsoft Windows 2000 or XP operating system, broadband internet ac cess, and a compatible data cable to connect y our device to th e PC. To get more information and to dow nload the Nokia Software Updater application, visit www.nokia.com/softwareupdate or your local Nokia web site.
10 1. Ge t st a rte d â Insert a (U)SIM card and battery Always sw itc h the dev ice off and discon nect the charg er befor e removi ng the b attery. This phone u ses BP- 5M batteries. For availability a nd information on using SIM card services, con tact your SI M card vend or. This may be the service provider or other vendor. 1. To open t he back cove r of the phone for t he first ti m e, lift it us ing the plastic strip shown on t he back of the phone (1). You ca n then remove the str ip. To open th e back cover la t er, turn t he lower part of the phone 90 de grees le ft or right w hen the number key s of the lower part a re on the sa me side as t he display, and lift t h e back cover ( 2). To re move the ba ttery, lift it a s shown (3). 2. To release the SIM card holder, slide it backwards (4), and lift it ( 5). I n s e r t t h e ( U ) S I M c a r d t o t he S IM c a r d h o l d e r ( 6 ) . M a k e s u r e t h a t t h e ( U ) S I M card is pr ope rly inserted and th at the golde n-colored contact area on the ca rd is facing dow nwards, and the beve le d corner f a ces upwards.
11 Close the SIM card holder (7), a n d slide it forward to lock it (8). 3. Replace the ba t tery (9). Replace t h e back cover (10) a n d (11). â MicroSD card slot Use only compatible microSD cards approved by Nokia for use with this device. Nokia uses approved industry standards for memory cards, but some brands may not be fully compatible with this device. Incompa tible c ards may d ama ge the card and the device and cor rupt data stored on the card. Keep microSD cards out of the re a ch of sm a ll children. You can ex tend t he avai lable me mory w ith a m icroSD memory c ard. Y ou can in sert or remove a m icroSD card w ithout switching the phone off. Import ant: Do n ot r emove the memory card in the middle of an operation when the ca rd is being a cces s ed. Rem oving the car d in the mi ddle of a n operati on may dam age th e memory card as well as th e device, and data s tored on the card m a y be cor ru pt ed.
12 Inse r t a microSD card No te that the m emory car d may b e supplied with the phon e, and m ay alre ady b e ins ert ed. 1. Open the side door (1). 2. Place the m icroSD card in the slot wi th the gol de n con ta ct a re a f aci ng down (2). Push t he card ge n tly to lock it into place. 3. Close tight t he side door (3 ). Remove a microSD card 1. Open the side door. 2. Push the card gent ly t o release it. Remove me mory card and press 'OK' is displayed. Pull the c a rd out, and se le ct OK . 3. Close tight t he side door. â Char ge the batter y 1. Conne ct the cha rger to the wall sock et. 2. Open the side door (1), and connect t h e charger plug to the ch arger connector in t he phone (2). 3. After charging, close tight t he side door. If the battery is com p letely discharged, it may take a fe w minutes be fore the charging indicator appears on th e display or befor e any calls can be made. The charging time de pends on the charge r and the battery used. Cha rging a BP -5 M batt er y w ith th e AC -5 c ha rg er ta kes ap pr o xi ma te ly 80 mi nu te s. 1 3 2 1 2
13 â Switch the phone on and off Press and h old the power key. If the ph one asks for a PIN code, enter t he PIN c ode , and select OK . If the ph one asks for the lock code, ent e r the lock code , and select OK . The factory s e tting for the lock code is 12345. â Set time and date To se t th e corr e ct ti m e zone , tim e, an d d ate , sel e ct th e country you are pre sently in, t hen enter the local time and date. â Normal operating position Use the phone on l y in its normal operatin g position. Not e: As with an y radio transmittin g device, avoid touching an an t enna unneces sari ly when t he anten na is in use. For example , avoid touching the cellular antenna du ring a phone call. Contact with a tr ansmitting or receiving antenn a affects the quality of the radio comm unication, may cause th e device to operate at a higher power level than ot herwise ne eded, a n d may r ed uce the batt ery li f e. Yo ur d ev ic e ha s in t er n al a n te n na s. Cellular a ntenna (1) Blue toot h antenn a (2) â Configuration set t ings Before you can use multimedia messaging , instant messaging, push to talk, e-mail, synchronization , streaming, a n d the browse r, you mu st have the proper configuration settings on y o ur phone. Your ph one may automatically configure browser, mu l timedia messaging, a cce ss point, a nd streamin g set t ings based on the SIM card used. Y ou may also receive the se ttings directly as a con figu ration
14 message, which you save to you r phone. For more information on availability, contact your se rvice provider or near e st authorized N o kia dealer. When you receive a conf igu ration message, and the settings are not automatically saved and a ctivated, 1 new message is displayed. Sele ct Sh o w to open the message. To save the settings, sele ct Op tion s > Save . You may need to ente r a PIN code provided by t he service provider. 2. Y our p hone â Keys and par ts Power key ( 1 ) Loud spea ker (2) Earpie ce ( 3) Volume keys (4 ) Left and r ight selec t ion keys (5) Men u key (6 ), hereaft er described a s "select Menu " Clear key (7) Call key (8) End key ( 9 ) Navi⢠scroll ke y (10), hereaft er referred to as scroll key Number keys ( 11) Microphone (12) No kia AV 2 .5-mm c onnector (13) Louds peaker ( 14) Char ger conn ector (15) microSD card s lot (16) USB connect or (17) Infra re d port (18)
15 Media keys: Rewind, zoom out (19) Play/Pause/Stop, capture ke y (20) Fast forward, zoom in (21) Camera lens (22) Ca m e ra fl a s h (2 3 ) â Modes Your phone h a s five f u nctional modes: phone m ode (1), came ra mode (2), music mode (3), video ca ll mode (4), and vide o view mode (5). To sw it ch between the modes, turn the lower part of t he phone. T here is a shor t pause before a m ode is activated. In the phone mode , do not try to rota t e the lower pa rt of the phone more than 90 degrees to the left or 180 degrees to the righ t. If you force the lower part of the ph one to rotate more, the ph one will be damaged. Phone mode The phone mode is activated when the number ke ys of t he lower part a re on t h e same side as the display. Camera mode To activat e the camera mode w hile in the phone mode , turn th e lower part of t he phone 90 degrees t o the left so th at th e camera lens is point in g away from you when you look at th e display. To take a se lf port ra it, turn the lower part of t he phone 90 degr ee s to the right while in the phon e m ode so that the came ra lens is pointing t oward you w hen you look at the display.
16 Music mod e To activat e the music mode while in the phone mode, turn t h e lower part of t he phone 180 degrees to the righ t so that the keys us e d to control music playback are on the same side as the displa y. Video call mode During video calls, you can let the call recipient to see your f a ce. Turn t h e lower part of the phone so that t h e camera le ns is pointing toward you when you look at the display. You ca n also tu rn the ca m era lens to t h e opposite direction. Vide o view mode When you are viewing a video or still images in the phone mode, you can activate the video view mode. Turn th e lower part of the phone 90 degre e s to t h e left so that the camera lens is pointing away from you. In video v i ew mode the display a utomatically changes to la ndscape, and you can put the phon e on the table, for e xample, while viewing. To view the next or previous still images or t o fast forward or rewind the v ide o, press t he fa st forward or rewind media ke y. To play or pause the video, pre ss t he play/paus e /stop media key. T o stop the video, press and h old t he play/pause/stop me dia key. â Standby mode When you have switch e d on the phone, a nd it is regis t ered to a network, t h e phone is in the standby mode and r eady for use. To open t h e list of la st dialed numbers, press the call key. To use the voice comm ands or voice dialing, pr e ss and hold the r ight selection key. To change t h e profile, press t he power key, and select a profile. To star t a connection t o the web, press a n d hold 0 . Active sta ndby When active st a ndby is e n abled, you ca n use the displa y for f a st access t o frequently used applications. To select whether the active standby is show n , select
17 Menu > Settings > Phone sett. > General > Personalis at ion > Standby mode > Act ive standby > On or Of f . To access active standby a pplications, scroll to the application, and select it . In active st a ndby the defa ult applications are s how n across t he top of t he active standby area, a nd calendar, to-do, and playe r e vents are lis t ed below. To select a n application or event, scroll to it, and se lect it. Offline profile The Off line profile lets you u se the phone without connecting it to a network . When the O ffline profile i s active, the conn ection to the wireless network is turned off, as indicated by in the s i gnal str e ngth indicator area. All w ireless RF signals to or from your phone a re prevented, a nd you can use your device without a (U)SIM card. Use t he off lin e profile in radio sen sit ive environmentsâÂÂon board aircraft or in hospitals. You ca n listen to music using the music p layer when the offline pr ofile is active. To leave the Offlin e profile, pre ss the power key, and select anot h er profile. Import ant: I n th e offline profile you cannot make or receive any ca lls, or use other features tha t require cellula r network cov erage. Calls may still be poss ible to the official emergency num ber programmed into your device. To make calls, you must first activ ate the phone functio n by changing profiles. If the device has been locked, enter t he lock co de. â Indicators The phone is connect e d to a UMTS network. The phone is conn e cted to a GSM network. The phone is in offlin e mode and not con nected to a cellu la r network. See âÂÂOffline profile,â p. 1 7. You recei ved on e or sever al mes sages to th e Inbox folder in Messaging . You received new e-mail in your remote mailbox. Ther e are mess ages wa iti ng to b e sent in Outbox . See âÂÂO u tbox,â p. 35 . You have missed ca lls. See â Re cent calls,â p. 28. Shown if Ringing t ype is se t to Silent an d Message alert to ne and E -mail alert tone ar e s et to Off . See âÂÂPr ofi les , â p. 5 9.
18 The phone keypad is l ocked. Se e âÂÂK e ypad lock (keyguard),â p. 20 . The loudsp eaker is ac tivat ed. An a larm is ac t ive. The second phone line is be ing used. See L ine in use in âÂÂCall ,â p. 7 7. / All calls to t h e phone are diverte d t o your call m a ilbox or to another number. If you h a ve two phone lines, t h e divert indicat or is for th e firs t lin e and for the second. A he ad s e t is co nn e cte d to th e ph on e. A loopset is conn e cted to the phone. The conne ction to a Blue toot h hea dset ha s been lost. / A data call is active. A GPRS packet data connection is active. indicates the connection is on hol d an d t h at a con nect io n is avai la ble. A packet dat a connection is a ctive in a pa rt of t he network t hat supports EGPRS . in dicate s the c onnecti on is on hold and tha t a connecti on is available. The icons indicate that EGPRS is availa ble in t he network, but your device is not ne ce ssarily u sing EGPRS in the data t r ansfer. A UMTS packet data connection is a ctive. indicates the con n ection is on hold and that a connection is ava ila ble. Bluetooth is switched on. Data is being tr a nsmitted using Bluetooth. See âÂÂBluetooth connection,â p. 84. An infrared connection is active. Wh e n infrared is active, but there is no connection, the indicator blinks. A U SB co nn e cti on is ac tiv e . Other indicators may also be shown. For push to talk indicators, se e âÂÂPush to talk,â p. 87.
19 â Menu In the menu you can access the functions in your phone. To a ccess the main menu, press t he menu key; hereafter described as "sele ct Menu ". To open an application or a folder, scroll to it, a nd press t he scroll key. To change t h e menu view, select Menu > Opti o ns > Ch ange Menu view an d a view type. If you ch a nge the orde r of t he functions i n the menu , the order may differ from the default orde r descr ibe d in this user guide . To close an application or a f older, select Back and Ex it as many ti mes as needed to return to the standby mode, or select Op tio ns > Exit . To display and sw it ch between open applications, se le ct and hold Menu . T he application switching window ope ns, showing a list of open applications. Scroll to an application, and select it. To mark or unmark an item in applications, press # . To ma rk or unma rk several cons ecuti ve it ems, pr ess and hol d # , and scroll up or down . Leaving applications running in the background increases the de mand on battery power and reduces the battery life. â W e lcome application We l c o m e appli cation sta rt s when you sw itch on your phon e for t h e first time. With th e We lc o me application, you can a ccess the following applications: Tu t o ri a l âÂÂLearn about the features of your phone an d h ow to u se them. Se tt. wi za rd âÂÂConfigure connection set t ings. Tr a n s f er âÂÂCopy or synch r onize data from othe r compatible phones. T o ope n We lcom e later , select Me nu > Applications > Wel c o m e . â Tu t o r i a l Tu tor ial con ta in s an in tr od u cti on to th e ph on e fea t ure s and a tut or ial to t ea ch ho w to u s e t he p h one . The tuto ri a l st ar ts a uto m at ic all y w he n you tur n on y ou r ph one f or t he f irs t tim e . To s ta rt th e tu tor ial yo u rs elf , se le c t Menu > Tu to r i a l an d a tut o ria l i tem.
20 â He lp You r devic e has c ontext -sensit ive h elp. Yo u can a cce ss the help from an application or from the main menu. To access help when an application is open, se le ct Op tion s > Help . To s w i tch between help and the application that is open in the background, select and h old Menu . S e le ct Opti ons and from the follow ing options: T opic list âÂÂto view a list of ava ila ble topics in the appropriate ca tegory Help c at egory l ist âÂÂto view a list of help categories Search by keyword âÂÂto search for help topics using ke yw ords To o pen he lp fro m th e main menu, se lect Me nu > Applications > He l p . In the list of help categories, select t he desired application to view a list of help topics. To switch between the h elp category li st, indicated with , and a ke ywords list, indicated with , scroll left or right. To display the re la ted help text, select it. â V olume control To adju st the earpiece or loudspe aker volume during a ca ll or when list ening to an audio file, pr e ss the volume keys. To activate t h e loudspeaker durin g a call, select Loudsp eaker . To deactivate t he loudspeaker dur ing a call, select Ha ndset . Warning: Do not hold the device nea r your ea r when the loud s peak er is in use, because t he v olume may b e extremely lo ud. â Keypad lock (keyguard) To prevent a ccide ntal keypr esses, you can lock the ke ypad. To lock the ke ypad in the phon e mode, press t he left se le ction key a n d * with in 1.5 s econds. To set the phone to automatica lly lock the keypad after a cert a in tim e , sele c t Menu > Settings > Phone sett. > Ge neral > Security > Phone and SIM card > Keypad autolock period > User defined and the desired tim e . To lock the ke ypad in music m ode, press th e power key qu ickl y, and select L ock keypad . To unlock the ke ypa d in the ph one mode, select Unl ock , and press * wi thin 1.5 seconds. To unlock the ke ypa d in music mode, se le ct Unlock > OK .
21 When the keypad lock is on, calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into you r devic e. â Connect a compatible headset Do not connect pr oducts that cre ate an output signal as this may cause damage to the device. Do not connect any volta ge source to the Nokia AV con nector. When c onnec ting any externa l devic e or any headset, other than those approv ed by Nokia for use with this dev ice, to the Nokia AV connec tor, pay special attention to volu me levels . â Connect a USB data cable To set the default USB connection mode, select Menu > Settings > Connectivity > USB > USB mode and the de sired mode. T o set whether the d efault mode is activated automatically, se lect Ask o n connection > No . â Atta ch a wrist s tra p Conn ect the w rist strap a ccor din g to the graphic. 3. Call func tions â Make a voice c all 1. In th e standby mode, e nt er the ph one number, including t he area code. Pre ss th e clear key to r emove a numbe r. For international calls, press * twi ce f or th e in te r na tion al p r efi x (t h e character re pla ces the in ternational access code ) , and en t er the countr y code , area code (omit the leading zero if necessary), and phon e nu mber. 2. To call the number, press t he call ke y. To adjust the volum e during the ca ll, press the volu me keys. 1 2
22 3. To end th e cal l, or to c a n cel the call atte mpt, pres s the end k ey. To make a call from Con tacts , s e le ct Me nu > Cont acts . Scroll to the desired name; or ent e r the first lett e rs of t he name, and scrol l to the desired name. T o call the number, pre ss the call key. To call your call mailbox (network service), pre s s and hold 1 in the standby mode . You must define th e mailbox number before you can call your mailbox. See âÂÂCall mailbox,â p. 7 1. To call a re cently dial e d number, press the ca ll key in the standby m ode. The list of the last 20 number s you called or attempted to call is shown. Scroll to the number you want, a n d press t h e call ke y. To make a push to talk ca ll, see âÂÂPush to talk,â p. 8 7. Speed dialin g You can assign a phone number t o on e of t h e speed dialing keys 2 to 9 . Se e â Assign speed dialing keys, â p. 4 1, or âÂÂSpeed dial,â p. 72 . Call a speed dialing number in either of the following ways: ⢠Press the s pe ed dialing key, then t h e call key. â¢I f Speed diallin g is se t to On , press and hold the spee d diali ng key until t he call begins. To set Speed dialling to On , s e l ec t Me nu > Settings > Phone se tt. > Phone > Call > Spee d dialling > On . Voic e d ialing A voice tag is added automatically to all entries in Contacts . Use long names, and a void similar names for different numbers. Mak e a voi ce d ial ing c al l Voi ce tags a r e sen sitive t o back g roun d noise. Us e voice t ags in a q uiet envir onment. Not e : Using voice ta gs may be difficult in a noisy envi ronment or during an emergency, so y ou should not rely solely u pon voice dialin g in all circumstanc es. 1. In th e standby mode, pre ss and hold the ri g ht selection key. A short tone is played, a nd Speak now i s displayed. If y ou are using a compat ible h eadset with t he hea dset key, press and ho ld the heads et key.
23 2. Spe ak the voice command clearly. T h e phone plays the voice com mand of the best match. After 1 .5 s econds, the ph one d i als the num ber; if the resul t is not the correct one, be fore dialing select Next an d an oth er en try . Using voice commands t o carry out a phone function is s imila r to voice dialing. See âÂÂV oice commands,â p. 7 1. Make a confere nce call (ne twork service) 1. M ake a call to th e first participant. 2. To m ake a call to a n other participant, select Opt io ns > Ne w ca ll . T he fi rst call is automatically put on hold. 3. To join the first participant in the conf e rence call when the new call is answered, se lect Opt ions > Conference . To add a new pers on to the call, repeat st ep 2 , a n d select Op tio ns > Conference > A dd to conference . The phone su pport s conference ca l ls between a maximum of six participants, including yourself. 4. To ha ve a p riv a te c onv ersat ion wit h on e of th e par tici pants, sele ct Opt ion s > Conference > Private . Select a participant and Pri va te . The conference call is put on hold on your phone. T he other participants can still continu e the conference call. T o return to the conf erence call, s ele ct Opti o ns > Add to conference . 5. To drop a participant, select Opti ons > C on ference > Drop participant , scroll to the participant, and select Drop . 6. To en d th e conf erenc e call , pres s th e end key . â Ans wer or r eject a call To answer a ca ll, press th e call ke y. To adjust the volu m e during the ca ll, press t h e volume ke ys. To mute the ri ngi ng tone, sele ct Silence . Tip : I f a comp atibl e he a dse t is conne cted to th e phon e, press th e heads et key to a nswer a nd end a cal l. To rejec t th e call , pres s the end key, o r sel ect Opti on s > Re ject . The c al ler he ars a busy ton e . If you have activated the Call divert opt io n If bu sy to divert calls, rejecting the call diverts the call.
24 To send a t ex t message to t he caller infor m ing why you cannot answe r the call, select Op ti ons > Se nd text message . You c an act iva te th e text messa ge rep ly and edit the te xt in the mess age . See Reject call with SM S and Message te x t in âÂÂCall,â p. 77. Call waiting ( n etwork service) During a call, to answer the waiting call, press t he call key. The first ca ll is put on hold . T o end th e acti ve c all, press the end key. To ac t iv ate th e Ca ll waiting function, sele ct Menu > Settings > Phone set t . > Phone > Call > Call w aiting > Ac t i v at e . To s witch betwe en the tw o calls, select Swap . Optio ns duri ng a ca ll Many of t he optio ns tha t you ca n use during a call a re net work s ervic es. For availability, contact your service provide r. Select Optio ns during a ca ll for some of the following options: Tr a n s f er âÂÂto connect a call on hold to an a ctive call and disconnect yourself Replace âÂÂto end an active ca l l and replace it by a nswering the waiting ca ll Send DTMF âÂÂto se nd DTMF tone str ings (for example, a password). Ent e r the D T MF string or search for it in Contacts . To ente r a wa it ch arac ter ( w ) or a pause char acte r ( p ), press * re peatedl y. T o send t he tone , sel ect OK . Tip : Yo u c an ad d D T MF t one s to th e DTMF field in a con tact card . â Make a video call When you make a video ca ll, you can see a re al-time, two-way vide o between you and the recipient of the call. The live video image or vide o image captured by the camera in your device is shown to the video call re cipie nt. To be able to make a video call, you m ay need to have a USIM card and be in the coverage of a UMTS network. For a vaila bility of and subscription to video ca ll services, cont a ct your service provider. A video call can only be made between two parties. T he video call can be ma de to a compatible mobile ph one or an ISDN client. Video calls ca nn ot be made while there is a nother voice, vide o, or data cal l act ive.
25 You are not r e ceiving video (the re cipient is not se nding video or t he network is not transmitting it) . You have de nied video sending from your device. 1. Enter the phone number in t he sta n dby mode; or sele ct Menu > Contacts , and sc ro ll to th e des ir ed co n ta ct. 2. Sele ct Op ti ons > Call > Video call . Starting a video call m ay take a while. W ait ing for video image is s hown. If the call is not su cce ssful ( for example, video calls are not suppor t ed by t h e network, or the re ceivin g device is not com patible), you a re asked if you w a nt to try a norm al call or send a message instead. The video call is act ive whe n you see t w o video images, and h e ar the sound through the loudspeaker. The call recipient may deny video sending, in which case you hear the sound a n d may see a s t ill image or a grey ba ckgr ound graphic. During video ca lls while the phone is in ph one mode, turn the low er part of the ph on e so that the ca mera lens is poin t ing toward you to let th e call recipient to see your face, or tu rn the lower part to opposite direction t o sh ow the view away from you . To increase or decrease the volume during a call, pres s th e volume keys. To change between showing v i deo or only he a ring sound, select Enable or Dis able > Sending video , Se nding audio , or Sendin g aud. & video . To zoom your own image, se lect Zoom in or Zoom out . The zoom in dicator is shown on the t op of the display. To switch the plac e s of th e sent and received v i deo images on t h e display, select C hange image order . Even if you have denied video sending duri n g a video call, the call w i ll still be charged as a vide o call. Check the pricin g with your ne twork operator or service prov i der. To en d th e vide o call , pre ss t he end key . â Answer a video call When a video call a rrives, is displayed. Press t h e call k e y to answer the vide o call. Allow video im age to be sent to caller? is sh own. If you selec t Yes , th e image captured by the ca mera in your device is
26 shown to the ca ller. If you select No , or do nothing, video sending is n ot activated, and a gre y screen is shown in place of the video. Even if you have de n ied video sending during a video ca ll , the call is still ch arged as a video ca ll. Check the pricing wit h your se rvice provider. To end t h e video call, press t he end key. â Video sharing Use Video sharing t o send live video from your mobile device to a nother compatible mobile device during a voice c a ll. Vide o sharing requir ements Because V ideo sharing r equires a 3G universal mobile telecommunications system (UMTS) connection, your abilit y t o use Video sharing depends on 3 G network availability. Contact your service provider for qu estions about netwo rk availability and fees asso ciated with thi s appl i c a ti on. To use V ideo sharing you must do t he following: ⢠Ensure that you r de vice is s et up for person-to-person connections. ⢠Ensure you have an act ive UMTS connection and are within UMTS network coverage. If you start th e sharing session w h ile you are within UMTS network coverage and a handover t o GSM occurs , the sha r ing session is discont inu ed, but your voice call con t inues. ⢠Ensure that bot h the sen de r and recipient are registered to the U MTS network. If you invite som eone to a sharing session and that personâÂÂs phon e is tur n ed off, or the person is not within UMTS network coverage, they do n o t k now that you are sending a n invitation. How e ver, you rece ive an error me ssage that t he recipient cannot a cce pt the invitation. Settings A person - to-person connect ion is a lso known as a ses sion initiation protocol (SIP) connection. T he SIP profile se ttings must be con figured in your de vice before you can use Video sh aring . Ask your service provider for the SIP profile settings, and save t hem in your de vic e . You r ser vice pro vider may sen d you the set tings over the air. If you know a r e cipientâÂÂs SIP a ddre ss, you can enter it on your co n tact card for that person. Select Menu > Con tac ts , a con tac t, an d Op ti o ns > Ed it > Op ti o ns > A dd
27 detail > SIP or Share view . Enter the SIP address in the form a t sip:username@domainname (you can u se an IP a ddress inste a d of a domain name ). Sh are live v ide o To receive a sharing session, the recipient must install Video sharing a nd configur e the requir e d settings on th e ir mobile device. Y ou and the re cipie nt must both be registe re d to t he service before you ca n start sharing. To re ce ive share invitations, you m ust be registered to t he service, ha ve an act ive UMTS connection, and be w it hin the UMTS network covera ge . Liv e vi de o 1. Wh en a voice call is a ctive, select Op tio ns > Share video > L ive video . 2. The phone sends the invitation t o the SIP addre ss you have added to t h e contact card of t he recipient. If the re cipie nt has se ve ral SIP a ddre sses in t he conta ct card, sele ct the SIP ad dress to whi ch yo u want t o sen d th e inv itatio n, a nd Select to send the in vi ta tio n. If the SIP a ddress of t he re cipie nt is not a vailable, enter a SI P address. Select OK t o sen d the i n vita tion . 3. Sharin g begins automatically when th e recipient accepts t h e invitation. The loudspeaker is a ct ive. Y ou can also u se a headset to conti nue you r voice call while you share live video. 4. Sele ct Pa u s e to pa use the sha r ing session. Se lect Co nt in ue to resume shari ng. 5. To end the sh a ring sessi on , select Stop . To end th e vo i ce ca ll , pre s s the en d k ey. Accept an inv itation When someone sen ds you a share inv it ation, an in vitation message is displa ye d showing the sen der âÂÂs name or SI P address. If your device is not set to Silen t , it rin gs w hen y ou receive a n invit a tion. If some one sends you a share invitati on and you a re not w ithin UMTS n et work coverage, you will not know that you receive d a n invitation. When you receive an invitation, select f rom the following: Accept âÂÂto begin t he sharing ses sion and activate the vie w mode.
28 Reject âÂÂt o declin e the invi tati on. Th e sender rece ives a messa ge tha t you r eject ed the invit ation. Y ou can also press t he end ke y to de cline the sh aring se ssion a nd disconnect the voice ca ll. To end t he shari n g session, select St op . â Log In the log, you can m onitor phone calls, text mess a ges, packet data con ne ctions, and fax and da t a calls re gist ered by th e phone. Connections to you r remote m ailbox, multimedia messaging cen t er, or browse r pages are show n as data calls or packet data connections in the gen e ral communications log. Not e: The actual invoice for calls and servi ces from your service provider may va ry, depending on n etwork features, round ing off for billing, taxes, and so forth. Not e: Some tim ers, including the lif e timer, may be reset durin g service or softwa re upgrades. Recent calls The phone regis t ers the p hone numbers of m issed, r e ceived, and dialed ca lls, and the approximate du ration of you r calls. The phone re gist ers mi sse d and rece ive d calls only if the network supports these functions, a n d the phone is s wit ched on and withi n th e net work se rvic e area . To view r ecent calls ( network se rvice), select Me nu > Log > Recent calls and a ca ll typ e. To clear all recent call lists in the Recent calls view, s e lect Op tion s > Clear recent calls . T o clea r on ly one of t he call regi sters , open th e regi ster yo u wa nt to erase, and s elec t Op t i ons > Clear list . General log To view the ge neral log, select Me nu > Log , a nd scroll right. To filter the log, select Opti o ns > Filter and the filt e r type. To er as e all th e log conte nts perman entl y, sel ect Opti on s > Cle ar log > Ye s .
29 4. Writ e text When you write text, appears on the t op righ t of t he display, indicating predictive text input, or appears, indicating traditional text input. To set t h e predictive text in put on or off wh en writing text , press * , a nd select Ac t i va te pre dic tive text or P red ic t iv e te xt > Off . , , or is displayed next t o the text input indicator, in dica ting the cha ra cter ca se . To ch ange the chara ct er case, press # . indicates the n umber mode. To ch ange between letter and n u mber mode, press # r e peatedly until number mode is active; or press * , and selec t Numbe r mode or Al ph a mode . â T r aditional text input Press a n umber ke y, 1 to 9 , r epeat edly unt il the des ired c har act er appe ar s. No t all characters available under a n um ber key a r e printed on t h e key. The a v ailability of characters de pends on the sele ct ed writing language. See Writing language in âÂÂLangu age ,â p. 73 . If t he ne x t le tt er yo u w an t i s o n t he sam e k e y a s th e p res e n t on e, wa i t u nt il th e cursor appears ( or scroll forwar d t o end t he time-out period), a nd enter t he letter. To i nsert a number, press and hold the num ber key. The most commo n punctuation marks and special characters are available under the 1 key. For m ore characters, pre ss and hold * . To er as e a cha racte r, p ress th e cle ar key. To era se mor e cha racte rs, p ress a nd hold the c lear key . To ins ert a space, press 0 . To mo ve t he cur sor to the next l i ne, press 0 th ree tim es. â Predictive text input To enter any letter with a single ke ypress, use predictive text in put. To select the predictive te x t input, pre ss * , a nd selec t Acti va t e pr ed ic tiv e t ext . This act ivates predictive text input for all e ditors in the phone. 1. To write the desired w ord, press t he keys 2 âÂÂ9 . Press each key only once f or on e letter. Th e word change s aft er ev er y keypres s. For t he most common pu nctuat ion marks , pre ss 1. For more punct uation marks and special characters , press and hold * .
30 To er ase a ch arac ter , pre ss th e cle ar key. To eras e mor e char a cte rs, pr ess an d ho ld th e cl e ar k ey . 2. When you have finis hed the word a nd it is correct, to confirm it, scroll for ward or insert a space. If the wo rd is not co rrect, to vi ew the mat ching word s the dic tiona ry has found one by one, pre ss * repeatedly. If the ? char ac t er i s s how n af te r the wo rd , th e wor d you in te nd ed to w ri te is not in the dictionary. To add a word t o the dictionary, select Spe ll . En t er th e word (up to 32 letters) using traditional text input, and select OK . T h e wo rd i s added to the dictionary. W hen the dict i onary becomes full, a n ew word replaces the olde st added word. Wri te co mpound wo rds Write the first half of a compound word, and scroll forward to confirm it. Write the las t part of the compound word, a nd to complete the compound wor d, press 0 t o ad d a spac e. â Copy and delete text 1. To select letters a nd w ords, pre ss and hold # , and at the same time scroll left or right. As the selection moves, text is high ligh ted. To select lines of text, press and hold # , and a t the same time scroll up or down. 2. To copy the text to t he clipboard, press and hold # , and at the sam e t ime se lect Copy . If you want to del ete the se lect ed tex t fr om the docume nt, pr ess t he cl ear key. 3. To in sert the text, scroll to the insertion point, press and hold # , a nd at the sa me time sele ct Pas te . 5. Messagi ng You can create, send, r e ceive, view, edit, and organize text messages, multimedia messages, e-mail messages, pres ent a tions, an d docu ments. Y ou can also receive messages and da ta using B luetooth wireless technology, receive and forward picture messages, receive se rvice messages and cell broadcast messages, a nd send service commands.
31 To open t h e Messaging menu, sel ect Me nu > Messaging . You can s ee the New message functi on and a list of de fault folde rs: Inbox âÂÂcontains received messages except e-mail a n d cell broa dca st messages. E-mail messa g es a re save d in the M ailbox folder. T o read cell broa dcast messages, select Op ti on s > Cell br oadcast . My folder s âÂÂfor orga n izing your messages into folde rs Mailbox âÂÂfor connecting to your re m ote mailbox to retrieve you r new e-mail messages or viewing your previously retrieved e- m ail messages offline. After you define settings for a new mailbox, the name given to that m a ilbox is displayed instead of Mailbox . Dr af ts âÂÂs aves draft messages that have not been se nt. Sent âÂÂsaves the me ssages t hat are sent, ex cludi ng m essages sent using Blue toot h. O utbox â t emporarily saves t he messages wait ing to be sen t . R eports (network service ) âÂÂsaves the de livery repor t s of the tex t messages, special me ssage type s such as business ca rds, a nd multimedia messages you have sent. Receiving a delivery report of a multimedia m essage that has been sen t to an e-mail address may n ot be possible. â Write and send messages Your device supports the sending of text messages beyond the char acter limit for a single messa ge. Longer messages a re sent as a series o f tw o or more mes sages. You r service prov i der may c ha rge ac cordi ng ly. Ch ar acte r s th at u se a cce nt s or ot her ma rks , an d ch arac te rs from some language option s, take up m ore space, lim iting the numbe r of char acters that can be se nt in a s ingle m essa ge. The wir eless network ma y lim it the si ze of MMS m es sa ges. If t he inserted pictur e exceeds this limit, the de vice may m ake it smaller so th at it can be sent by M MS. Only devices that have com patible featu res can receive and dis play multim edia messages. The appearance of a message may vary depending on th e receiving device. Before you ca n send and r e ceive an SMS message , a m ultimedia message, or a n e-mail, or conn e ct to your r e mote mailbox, you must have t he corr e ct connection settings in pla ce. See âÂÂMessaging se t tings,â p. 36. 1. To create a me ssage, sele ct Menu > Messaging > New m essage and th e message type. T o create an Audio message , se e âÂÂAudio messaging,â p. 32.
32 2. Press the scroll ke y to s e lect the re cipients or grou ps from Contacts or enter the phone number or e -m ail address of t he recipient in t he To field. Separate re ci pi en ts w i th a sem ic ol on (; ). 3. Wh en creating an e-mail or multimedia message , scroll dow n to the subject field, and w r ite the message s u bject. 4. Scroll down to the message fi e ld, and write the m essage. When you write text messages, the message length indicator shows how many characters you can enter in the me ssage. For example, 1 0 (2) me a ns that you can still add 10 charac t ers for the text t o be sent as t w o separate text messages. To use a templa te fo r the text mess a ge , sel ect Op tion s > Insert > Temp late . To create a presentation based on a template to be sent as a mu ltimedia message, select Optio ns > Crea t e p re s en tat i on . T o use a text temp late for t he multimedi a message, select Opt io ns > Insert object > Tem p l a t e . To add a media object to a m ultimedia message, select Op tio ns > In s er t object > Image , Sound clip , or V ideo clip . To create a nd add a new me dia object, select Op tion s > Insert new > Image , Sound clip , Video clip or Slide . When sound is added, is show n . To add a media object to a n e-mail, select Opt ion s > In s e rt > Im age , Sound clip , Video clip , No te , Other or Template . 5. To send the m e ssage, sele ct Optio ns > Send . Audi o m essaging Audio messages are multime dia messages that consist of a single sound clip. To create a nd send an a udio m essage: 1. Sele ct Menu > Me ssaging > Ne w message > Audio message . 2. In the To field, pres s the scroll key to choose the recipients fr om Con tacts , or enter the ph on e number or e- m ail address. Scroll down to the message f ie ld. 3. To record a new sou nd cli p, press the scrol l ke y, or se lect Op t i ons > Insert sound clip > New so und cl ip . The recording start s. To use a previously recorded sound clip, select Optio ns > Inse rt sound clip > From Gallery , scroll to the sound clip, and select it. The sound clip has to be in .amr format. To play the sound clip, select Opti o ns > Play soun d clip . 4. To send the m e ssage, sele ct Optio ns > Send .
33 E-mail se ttings Before you use e-mail, you must do t he following: ⢠Configure an internet a cce ss point (I AP) correctly. See âÂÂConnection, â p. 79. ⢠Define your e-mail settings correctly. See âÂÂE-m ail settings,â p. 33. Follow the instructions given by your e-m ail service provider and internet service provider. â InboxâÂÂreceive messages Select Menu > Me ssagin g > Inbox . Wh en th e re ar e un r ea d me s sa ges i n th e i nb o x , the i co n ch a ng es t o . To open a re ceived m essage, select Me nu > Messaging > Inbox and the desir e d message. Import ant: Exercise caution when open ing mes sages. Multim edia me ssage objects may contain maliciou s software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. View multimedia objects To v iew t he lis t of media obje cts tha t ar e in cluded i n th e multi medi a mes sage, open the message, and select Opt ions > Ob je cts . You can save th e file in your phone or send it using Bluetooth technology or a s a m ultimedia message to another compatible de vice. Spec ia l message t ypes Your phone can r ece ive many kinds of messages, such as ope rator logos, business cards, calendar entries, and ringing ton e s. To open a re ceived m essage, select Me nu > Messaging > Inbox and the desir e d mes sage. You can save t he spec ial mes sage c ontent to your phone . For example , to save a re ceived calendar e ntry to the calendar , select Op tio n s > Save to Calendar . Not e: The picture messa ge function can be used only if it is supporte d by your service pr ovider. Only c ompatible device s that offer picture mess age features can re ce ive and di splay p ictu re mes sage s. The appe a ra nce o f a m es sag e m ay var y depending on th e receiving device.
34 Service m essages Service messages (network service) are notifications (for e xample, news headlines) t ha t may contain a t ext message or t he address of a browser service. For availability and s u bscription, contact your service provide r. â My f olders You can orga nize your mess ages into fo lders, c reate new fol ders, a nd rena me and delete folders. Select Menu > Me ssagin g > My fold ers . To crea te a fol der, s elect Op tion s > New folder , a nd ent er a name f or the f old er. â Mailbox Select Menu > Me ssagin g > Mailbox . Whe n you o pen M ailbox , Conne ct to mailbox? is displayed. Select Ye s to connect to your mailb ox (network service) or No to view previously retrieved e-mail messages of fline. To connect to t he mailbox afterwards, s ele ct Opti o ns > Connect . When you create a n ew mailbox, t h e name you give to t h e mailbox replaces Mailbox . You can ha ve up t o six mailb oxes. When you are online, t o end the data con nection to the remote mailbox, se lect Opt io ns > Dis conne ct . Retrieve e-mail messages from the mailbox Import ant: E xercise caution when op ening mes sages. E - mail messa ges may contain malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. 1. Sele ct Menu > Me ssaging > Mailbox > Opti o ns > Conn e ct . 2. Sele ct Op ti ons > Retrieve e-mail and from t he followin g opt ions: Ne w â to retrieve all new e-mail messages to your ph one Selected â to retrieve only the e-m ail messages t h at have be e n marked All âÂÂto re t rieve all messages from the mailbox 3. Af ter you retrieve the e-mail me ssages, you can continue viewing them on line. Select Op ti o ns > Disco nnect t o close the conne ct ion and to view the ret r ieved e-mail messages an d headings offline.
35 4. To ope n an e-mail message, select it. If the e-mail message has not been retrieved and you a re offline an d se lect Open , you are a sked if you want to re tr iev e thi s me s sa ge fro m th e m ail bo x . To vie w e-mail a ttachments, indicated w ith , select Op tio ns > At tachmen ts . You can retrie ve, open, or save attachments in su pported f orm ats. Delete e-mail messages To delete an e-mail message from the phone and retain it in the remote mailbox, select Menu > Messaging > M ailbox > Opt ions > Dele te > Phone only . Th e e-mail heading stays in your phone. To remove the heading as well, delete the e-mail m essage from your re mote mailbox first , then conn e ct your ph one to the remote mailbox t o update the stat us. To delete an e - mail from the phone and the remote mailbox, select Opti ons > Del ete > Phone and server . To cancel deletion of an e-mail from both the phone and server, s croll t o an e-mail that has be en marked to be dele t ed during th e next connection, and sele ct Opt io ns > Restore . â Out bo x The outbox folder is a temporary storage place for messages that are waiting to be sent. To access t he outbox folde r, select Men u > Messaging > Outbox . Message statuse s: Sending âÂÂThe phone is sending th e message. Waiting or Queued â The phone is waiting to send m essages or e- m ail. Resend at ... (time)âÂÂSending fa ile d. The phone trie s t o send t he message agai n after a t ime -out pe riod. To retr y se nding the me ssage immediately, se lect Opt io ns > Sen d . Defe rre d âÂÂTo put documents to be on hold while they ar e in the outbox folder, scroll t o a messa ge that is be ing sen t , a n d select Op ti ons > Defer se nding . Failed âÂÂTh e maxim um numb er of sendi ng at tempt s has be en r eached.
36 â View mes sages on the SIM card Before you ca n view SIM messages, you ne e d to copy the m to a folder in your phone. 1. Sele ct Menu > Me ssaging > Op tio ns > SI M messages . 2. Mark the mes sage s you want to copy. 3. To copy the marked m essages, select Opti ons > C opy , and the folder to w hich you want to copy the messages. â Cell broadcast You may be a ble to rece ive messages, su ch as we a ther or t raffic conditions from your ser vice pro vide r (ne twork servi ce). T o turn on th e servi ce, s ee Cell broadcast in âÂÂCell broadcas t settings,â p. 39. Select Menu > Me ssagin g > Op ti ons > Cell broadcast . A packet data conne ction ma y prevent cell broadcast re ception. â Service command editor To ente r and send service com mands (also know n as USSD commands) such a s activati on commands for network services to your service provider , select Menu > Messaging > Op ti ons > Ser vic e comman d . To se nd the comma nd, sele ct Opt io ns > Sen d . â Messaging settings Text message settings Select Menu > Me ssagin g > Op ti ons > Settings > Te xt message a n d from t h e following options: Message centres âÂÂlists a ll the defined messa ge centers Mes sage ce ntre in us e âÂÂdefines which message center is used for delivering text messages and special message t ype s such as business cards Character encoding > Full support âÂÂto select all characters in t h e message to be sent as vie wed. If you se lect Reduced support , charac ters wit h ac cents an d o the r marks m ay be converted to other characters. Receive report ( netwo rk service)âÂÂWhe n set to Ye s , the status of t he sent messa ge ( Pe nd i n g , Failed , Del iver ed ) is shown in Reports .
37 Message validity âÂÂIf the recipient of a message ca nnot be r e ached within the validity period, t he message is rem oved fr o m the message service center. Note that the n etwork must su pport this feature. Message sent as âÂÂto define how the m e ssage is sen t. Default is Te x t . Preferred connection âÂÂYo u ca n send t ext message s usin g the normal G SM net work or, if su pported by the network , packet data. Reply via same centre (net work service)âÂÂI f you select Ye s , and the re cipien t replies to your me ssage , the return m essage is se nt using the sa me message ser vice center number. Some ne t works do not pr ovide this option. Multimedia me ssaging settings Select Menu > Me ssagin g > Op ti ons > Settings > Multimedia m essage and from the f ol low i n g o p tio n s: Image size âÂÂDefine the size of the image in a multimedia message. If you select Original , the image is no t scaled. MMS cr e ation m ode âÂÂIf you sele ct Gu i ded , the phone informs you if you try to send a me ssage that may not be su pport ed by the recipient. To set the phon e to prevent you from sending messages tha t are not suppor te d, se l ect Restricte d . If you select Free , messa ge creation is not restricted, but th e recipient may n ot be able to view your message. A ccess point in use âÂÂS elect w hich acces s poin t is used a s the prefe rred c onnecti on for multime dia messaging. Multimedia retrie val âÂÂTo receive multimedia messages only when you are in your home network, select Au t o i n h om e ne t w. . To always receive multimedia messages, select Al ways au tomatic . To r etrieve messages manually, select Manual . T o n o t receive any multimedia messages or advertisements, select Off . Allow anon. msgs. âÂÂTo re ject messages comi n g from a n anonymous se n der, se lect No . Rece ive a dver ts âÂÂDefine wheth er you want to a llow reception of multimedia message adver tisements. Receive report âÂÂIf y ou want the s t atus of t he sent message ( Pe n d i n g , F aile d , or Del iver ed ) to be shown in Report s , selec t Ye s . Rece ivin g a deliv e ry report of a multimedia me ssage th a t has be e n sent t o an e-mail address may n ot be possible. Deny re port s ending > Ye s âÂÂto den y sending de livery reports
38 Message validity (network se rvice)âÂÂIf the recipient of a messa ge cannot be reached within the validity period, the message is removed fr om the multimedia message ce n ter. E-mail se ttings Sett ings for mailb oxes Select Menu > Me ssagin g > Op ti ons > Settings > E- mai l > Ma ilboxes an d a mailbox. If no mailbox set t ings have be en defined before, you are a ske d if you want t o def ine the sett ings. Con ne cti on se tt i ng s > Incomin g e-mail an d Outgoing e -mail âÂÂTo de fine the correct settings, contact you r e-mail service provider. User settin gs Select Use r se tt in gs a n d from the following settings: My n ame âÂÂEnter the name to be displayed in outgoing e-mail. Send message ( network serv ice)â To set when your e -mail mess ages a re sent , select Immediately or Dur ing nex t conn. . Send copy to se lf âÂÂSel ect Ye s to send a copy of the e-mail to the a ddress defined in My e-mail address . Include signature âÂÂSe lect Ye s to attach a si gn ature t o your e-mail m essages and to c rea te o r ed it a si gn at ur e te xt . New e- mai l al ert s â To not receive alerts about n e w e-mail, select Off . Retrie val se tting s Select Re trieval se ttings and fr om the following se ttings: E-mail to retr ieve âÂÂTo only retrieve h e aders, select Headers only . To limit how much data is retrieved, select Size limit , and enter the maximum amoun t of data per messa g e in kilobytes. To retr ieve messages and att a chments, sele ct Msgs. & attachs. . Th e Size limit an d Msgs. & attachs. opt ions are only a v ailable with POP3 mailboxes. Retrieval amount âÂÂTo limit the number of messages t o retrieve from th e inbox of the r e mo te m a ilb ox, s ele ct From Inbox > No. of e -mails and en ter th e max imum number of me ssages to retr ieve . You ca n a lso limit the number of messages to retrieve from other subscribed f o lders in From folders (only IMAP 4 mailb oxes).
39 IMAP4 folder path (only IMAP4 mail box es)â D efine t he folder pa th for IM AP4 mailboxes. Folder subs cript ions (only IMAP4 mailboxe s)âÂÂSelect the mailbox folders you want to subscribe to. To subs cribe to or unsubscribe from a folder, scr oll to it , and select Opt io ns > Subscr ibe or Cancel subscription . Autom atic retrie val Select Automa tic r etri eval a n d from the following settin gs: E- mail no tifi catio ns âÂÂTo automatically retrieve the headers t o your de vice when you receive a notification of new e-mail in your re m ote mailbox, select Auto-update or O nly in hom e netw . . E-mail retrieval âÂÂTo have e-mail headers automatically retrieved at set int ervals, select Enabled , or if you onl y wa nt head ers to be re triev ed in your ho me ne twork , select Only in home ne tw . . Headers ca n be aut omat ically re t rieved for tw o mailboxes at m ost. You ca n set on which da ys, at what times, an d h ow fre qu ently the head ers ar e retr ieved in Retrieval days , Retrieval hours , a nd Retrieval interval . E- mail no tifi catio ns and E-mail r e trieval c a n no t b e a c t i v e a t t h e s a m e t i m e . Service message settin g s Select Menu > Me ssagin g > Op ti ons > Settings > Service mess age and from the following settings: Service messages âÂÂAllow or den y t he recept ion of service m essages. Download messages âÂÂDownload messages autom a tically or manually. Cell broadcast se t tings Check with your se r vice provider whether cell broadcast ( n etwork service) is available and what the available topics and re la ted topic numbers are. Select Me nu > Messaging > Op ti on s > Se ttings > Cell broadcast and fr om the following settings: Reception âÂÂSel ect On or Off . Lang uage âÂÂSelect in which languages cell br oa dcast messages are received. T opic detection âÂÂTo automatically save pre viou sly unknown topic numbers in received cell br oa dcast messages, select On .
40 Othe r sett ings Select Menu > Me ssagin g > Op ti ons > Settings > Other and from the following setti n gs: Save sent messages â Selec t to save a c opy o f eve ry se nt t ext m essage, mu ltime dia message, or e-mail t o the Sen t folder. Number of saved msgs. âÂÂDefin e how many sen t messa ge s are saved to the sent items folder at a time. When the limit is reached, the oldest message is deleted. Memo ry in us e â S ele ct w h et he r to s av e me ssa g es to t he ph o ne me mo r y or memo ry c ard. â Mes sage re ader With Msg. reader , you ca n listen to received text, multimedia, and e-mail messages. To listen to a message in Inbox or Mailbox , scroll to the m essage or mark the messages, a nd sele ct Opt ions > Listen . To skip to the next message, scroll down. Tip : When 1 new message or New e- ma il is displayed in the standby mode, to listen to the r eceived messages, press and hold the left selection key until Msg. reader starts . 6. Cont acts You can sav e and ma nage con tact informat ion, s uch as n ames, p hone num bers, and addre sse s. â Manage contacts Select Menu > Cont act s . To add a n ew c on tact, se lect Op ti on s > Ne w c ont a ct . Fill in the fields you want, and s elec t Done . To edit a contact, scroll to it, and s e lect Opt ions > Edi t . To assign default numbers and addresse s t o a con tact, select it , and se le ct Opt io ns > De fau lts . Scroll to the de sire d default opt ion, and select Assign .
41 To copy n a mes and numbers fr om a SIM card to your ph on e, select Optio ns > SIM contacts > SIM directory . Scroll to the name you want to copy or mark t he desired names, a n d selec t Op ti o ns > Copy to Contact s . To copy a ph one , fax, or pager number fr om contacts to you r SIM card , scroll to the contact you w a nt to copy, and select Opti ons > C opy > To SIM directory . To view the l ist of fixed dia lin g numbers, select Op tions > SIM contacts > Fixed dial contacts . This s e tting is only s h own if supported by your SIM card. When fixed dialing is activat ed, calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed in to your devic e. â Manage contact groups Create a con t act group so th at you c a n send te x t or e - mail messages to s e veral re cipi ents at the s ame ti me. 1. Sele ct Menu > Cont acts . 2. Scroll to the right, and se le ct Op tion s > New group . 3. Enter a name for th e group, and select the group. 4. Sele ct Op ti ons > Add members . 5. Mark the cont acts you w ant to add to the grou p, a nd select OK . â Add a ringing t one You can se t a ringing tone ( also a vide o rin ging tone) for each contact and group. 1. Sele ct Menu > Cont acts . 2. To a dd a ri nging tone t o a co ntact , selec t the c onta ct, Op tion s > Ringi ng tone , and the desire d rin ging tone. To add a ringing t one to a group, scroll right to the groups lis t, and scroll t o a contact group. Se le ct Opt ions > R ing in g t o ne and the ringing ton e for the group. To remove t he personal or grou p ringing tone, select Def ault to ne as a rin gin g ton e . â Assign speed dialing keys Speed dialing is a quick way to ca ll frequently used numbers. Y ou can assign a phone number to the spe ed dialing keys, 2 to 9 . Th e 1 key is reserved for the ca ll mailbox. Speed dialing has t o be activa t ed before using speed dia lin g. To a ct ivate
42 the s peed diali ng, se lect Menu > Se ttin g s > Phone set t . > Ph one > Call > Speed dialling > On . 1. Sele ct Menu > Cont acts and a co ntac t. 2. Scroll to a number, and select Op ti o ns > Assign speed dial . Scroll to the desired speed dialing key, and se le ct Assi gn . When you return to th e cont a ct information view, next to the number indicates the assigned speed dial. To call t h e contact by speed dialing, in the standby mode, pre ss the spe e d dialing key and t h e call key, or press and hold the spe e d dialing key. 7. Galle ry Use G allery to save and organize your images, videos, mu sic t racks, sou nd clips, playlists, streaming links, .ram files, and presentations. Select Menu > Gallery . To op e n a fo ld e r (s uc h a s Images ), sele ct it. To open a file, select it. The file ope n s in its corresponding application. The videos you dow nload or tr a nsfer to your phone are saved in Videos . To a ccess Videos in the st andby m ode, select Vi deos , o r sele ct Menu > G allery > Videos , or select Menu > Me dia > V ideos . You can tra n sfer videos to y our ph one from a compat ible PC, and download video clips from com pa tible internet vide o se rvices to your ph one using packet da ta. â Gallery functions To set an ima ge as a w all pape r, se lect Images , and scroll to the image. Select Opt io ns > Use image > Set as wallpaper . To assi gn th e imag e to a c on tact, select Assign to con tact . To set a vide o as a video ringing tone, select V ideos , and scroll to the video. Select Opt io ns > Use vide o > Se t as rin gin g tone . To assign the vide o for a contac t, se lect Assign to con tact . To copy files to phone mem ory or to the memory card, scroll to the file or mark the files, and select Opti o ns > Organ ise > Copy to phone mem. or C opy to me mory card . To create image or video folders and m ove files to them, select I mages or Videos , and scroll t o a f ile. Se lect Op t io ns > Organise > New fol der and the memory, and
43 ente r a name for t he folder . M ark th e fil es you wan t to mov e to the f ol der, and select Op ti ons > O rganise > Mov e t o fo ld er and t he fo lder. View vide os and images When you are viewing videos or st ill images in the phone mode, you can act ivate the video vie w mode. Turn the l ower part of th e phon e 90 degrees to t h e left so that the camera le ns is pointing away from you. I n video view mode the display automatically changes to la ndscape, and you can put the phone on the t able, for example, w hile viewing. To view the next or previous still images, press the f a st forward or rewind med ia k ey. To fast f o rward or rewind t h e video, press the fa st forward or rew ind m edia key. To play or paus e the video, pre ss the pla y/pa use/stop media key. To s top the video, press and h old t he play/pause/stop me dia key. Edi t images To edit image s in Gall ery , sc roll to the image, and select Op tion s > Ed i t . To crop an image, select Opti o ns > Apply e ffect > Crop . To crop the image size manually, select Manual or a prede fin ed aspect ra t io from the list . If you select Man ual , a cr oss appears in the upper le ft corner of t he image. Scroll to sele ct the area to crop, and select Se t . Another cross a ppe ars in the lower right corner. Again select th e area to be croppe d. To a dju st the firs t selected are a , select Ba ck . Th e selected areas f orm a rectangle, w h ich forms the croppe d image. If you select ed a pred efined aspec t rati o, se lect the upper l eft co rner o f the a rea to be cropped. To resize the highlighted area, use the scroll key. To freeze the se lected area , press th e scr oll key. T o move the a rea w ithin the pi cture , u se the scroll ke y. To sele ct the a re a to be cr oppe d, press t he scroll key. To reduce rednes s of th e eyes in an ima ge, selec t Op ti o ns > Apply effect > Re d eye reduct ion . M ove the cross onto the eye, and press the scroll key. A loop appears on the display. T o re size t h e loop to fi t the size of t he eye, s croll u p, down, left, or right. To reduce the redness, press t he scroll key. Shortcuts in the image editor: ⢠To view a n i mage in the f ull scr een, press * . To r etu rn to th e nor mal v iew, pr ess * aga in . ⢠To rotate an ima ge clockwise or coun terclockwise, pres s 3 or 1 .
44 ⢠To zoom in or out , press 5 or 0 . ⢠To move on a zoomed image, scroll up, down, left, or r ight . Edi t videos To edit videos in Gallery and cre at e custom vide o clips, scroll t o a video clip, a nd select Op ti ons > V ideo editor > Opt ions > Edit video clip . In the video editor you can see two timelines: video clip t imeline and sound clip timeline. The images, t e xt, and transitions a dded to a vide o are shown on the video clip timeline. To switch between the timelines, scroll up or down. Modify video To modify the vide o, select from t he following Edit video clip options: Cut âÂÂTrims the video clip in the cu t video clip view. Add colour e ffe ct âÂÂInserts a color effect on the vide o clip. Use slow motion âÂÂSlows the speed of the vide o clip. Mu te s ound or Unmute sound â Mutes or unmutes the original vide o clip sound. Mo ve âÂÂMo ves th e vid eo cl ip t o the s elec ted lo catio n. Adjust volume âÂÂAdju sts t he volume level. Remove âÂÂRemoves the video clip from the video. Duplicate âÂÂMakes a copy of t h e selected video c li p. Ed it text (shown only if you added te x t)âÂÂTo move, rem ove , or duplicate t e xt; change the color and style of the text; de fine how long it st a ys on the scre en; a nd ad d eff ects t o th e tex t. Edit image (shown only if you added a n image)âÂÂTo move, remove, or du plica te an image; define h ow long it stays on th e scre e n; and se t a backgrou n d or a color effect to the image . Edit sound clip (shown only if you have a dde d a sound clip)âÂÂTo cut or m ove the sound clip, to adjust its length , or to remove or duplicate the clip. Edi t tra ns iti on âÂÂThere are t h ree types of t ransitions : at the start of a video, a t the end of a vide o, and transitions between video clips. You can select start t ransition when the firs t transition of the video is active. Insert âÂÂSel ect V ideo clip , I mage , Text , Soun d clip , o r New sound clip . Mo vie âÂÂP revie w the movie in the full screen or a s a t humbnail , sa ve or send th e movie, or cut the movie to a proper size f or sending it in a multimedia me ssage.
45 To take a sn apshot of a video clip, in the cut video vie w , select Opti on s > Ta k e snapshot . In the thumbnail preview view, press the scroll key, and select Take snapshot . To save your video, select Opti ons > Mo vie > Save . To d efine the Memory in use , select Op ti ons > Se ttings . To send t h e video, select Se nd > Via multimedia , Via e-m a il , Via Bluetooth , or Via infrared . Contact your service provider for de tails of the maximum multimedia message size that you can send. If your vide o is too large to send in a multimedia message, appears. Transf e r vide os from PC To transfe r videos from a compatible PC, us e a compatible USB ca ble or Bluetooth connectivity. The requ ire ments of the PC for video transfe r: ⢠Microsoft Windows XP operat ing system (or later) ⢠Nokia PC Suite 6.82 or la ter ⢠Nokia Video Manager application (a add-on application to PC Su ite) To transfer videos use N okia Video M anager, connect the com patible USB ca ble or activate Bluetooth con n ection, and select PC Su i te a s the connection m ode. To change t h e default USB con nection mode, select Menu > Settings > Connectivity > USB > USB mode . Nokia Video Man ager is optimized for transcoding and t ransferring video files. For information about tra n sferring video with Nokia V i deo Manager, se e the Nokia Video Manager help. Download files Select Menu > Gallery , the f older for t he file type you want to down load, and the download function (for example, Images > Downl. graphics ). T he browser open s. Choose a bookmark f or the site to dow n load from .
46 8. Musi c p lay er Warning: L i sten to m usic at a moderate lev el. Continuous ex posure to high vo lume m a y d a m a g e y o u r h e a r i n g . D o n o t ho l d t h e d e v i c e n e a r y o u r e ar w h e n t he loudspea ker is in use, beca use the volum e may be extreme ly loud. To activ ate music m ode a nd star t Music playe r , turn the lower par t of the phone to the right so that the playback control keys a re on t he same side as t h e display. You can li sten to mus ic al so when the Offline pr o file is activated. See âÂÂOffline profile,â p. 17. To add songs t o you r device, see âÂÂTransfer music,â p. 48. For more information about copyright protecti on , see â Activation keys,â p. 98. â Listen to music 1. A cti va te th e m u sic m o de . 2. In Music me nu , select th e category, such a s All son gs or Alb ums . 3. Se lect the music you w a nt to play. Use the media ke ys to control p layback. ⢠Press the play/pause/stop key to play or pause a song. Press and hold th e key to stop the playba ck. ⢠Press t he rewind key to rewind the song or to skip backwards. ⢠Press t he fast for ward key to fast for ward the song or to skip forward. You can also us e the scroll ke y t o control th e player. To adjust the volu m e, use the volume ke y. To switch random play ( ) on or off, select Opt io ns > Shu ffle . To re pe at the cu rrent song ( ), all songs ( ), or to switch re pe at off, select Opt io ns > Repeat . To modify the tone of the music playback, select Opti o ns > Equ aliser . To modify the bala n ce loudness or st e reo widening, sele ct Opt io ns > Audio settings . To view a visualization during playba ck, select Opti ons > Start visualisation . To retu rn to t h e standby mode and le a ve the player in t h e background, pre ss the end ke y. I f Active st andby is On , the cu r rently playing song is displayed in the
47 standby mode. To access the music player from the st a ndby mode, se le ct the currently playing s on g. To switch t o a nother open application, pres s and hold Menu . â Music menu To selec t more mus i c to pl ay in N ow playing view, select Opti ons > Go t o Mu si c menu . To return to the Now p la yi ng view, select Op tion s > Go t o Now playing . The music menu sh ow s the music available in t he phone and compatible memory card (i f inserted). All s ong s lists a ll music. To vie w sorted songs, se lect Alb ums , Artist s , Genres , or Com posers . To view playlists, select Playlists . To re fresh t he l ib rar y afte r you have upda ted the song se lect ion in your pho ne, select Op ti ons > Re fresh Music libr ary . â Playlists To view and manage playlists, in the music menu, select Playlists . The following playlists appear a u tomatically: Most played tracks , R ecently played songs , and Recent additions . To view details of t he playlist, select Opti o ns > Playlist de tails . Creat e a p lay list 1. Sele ct Op ti ons > Create playlis t . 2. Enter a na me for the pl aylist, an d select OK . 3. Sele ct art ists to fi nd the songs y ou want to include in t he pla ylis t. Press th e scroll key to add items. T o show t he song l ist unde r an artist title , scroll right. To hide the song list, scroll left. 4. Whe n you have made your selections, se lect Done . I f a compatible memo ry card is inserted, the playlist is saved t o the memory card. To add more songs later, when viewing the playlist, select Op tion s > Add s ongs . To add songs , album s, artis t s, genres, a nd composers t o a playlist from the dif feren t vi ews of the m usic m enu, se lect an it em and Optio ns > Add t o a playlist > Saved playlist or N e w playlist . To remove a song from a playlist, select Opti on s > Remo ve fr om play list . T hi s deletion does not delete the song from the phone ; it on l y removes it fr om the playlist.
48 To re orde r songs in a playlist, scroll to the song you want t o move, a nd select Opt io ns > Reorde r list > Grab , scroll to a new position, and select Drop . â Mu sic sh op In th e music sh op (network service ) you can search, browse, and pu rch ase m usic for downloading to your phone . The v a riety and appearance of mu sic sh op service s may vary. For m ore information and availability of m u sic shop, contact you r service provider. You must have music shop se ttings and valid internet connections in order t o u se this service. For more details, see â Music shop settin gs, â p. 48, and â Acce ss points,â p. 79. To go to mu sic sh op, in t he Music playe r , select Op ti o ns > Go to M usic shop . Music shop se t tings The availability and appearance of the music shop settings may vary. The settings ma y a ls o b e pr ed efin ed , an d y o u can n o t e di t th em. In the music sh op, you may be able to edit th e settings by se lecting Optio ns > Se ttin gs . If the se t tings are not pre def ined, you may be a sked to enter th e following setti n gs: Addre ss â You must de fin e the w e b address of t he music shop service . Default acc. pt. âÂÂSel e ct t he ac ce ss po in t to us e w h en co nn ec tin g to th e mu si c shop. User nam e âÂÂEnte r your user name for the musi c shop. Pa s s w o r d âÂÂEnter your pass w ord for t he music s h op. If Us er nam e an d P assword fie ld s are left em pty, y ou may have to en ter them at login. â Tr a n s f e r m us i c You can buy music protected with WMDRM from online music shops, and transfer the mu s ic to y our p ho ne . To transfe r m usic from a compatible PC or ot he r compatible devices, u se a compa tib le USB ca ble or Bluet ooth c onnectiv ity. You can also use IR conn ection.
49 For det a ils, see âÂÂB lu etooth connection,âÂÂ, p. 84, or âÂÂInfrare d,â p. 93. You ca nnot transfe r WMDRM protected music files usin g Blue tooth or I R connection. To re fresh t he l ib rar y afte r you have upda ted the song se lect ion in your pho ne, in the Musi c menu , s e lec t Optio ns > Refresh Music lib rary The requ ire ments of t h e PC for music purchase and tr a nsfer: ⢠Microsoft Windows XP operat ing system (or later) ⢠Compatible version of Windows Me dia Player application ⢠Nokia PC Suite 6.82 or la ter Transfer music f rom PC You can us e thre e diff eren t met hods to tran sfer mus ic: ⢠To view your ph one on a PC as an e xternal hard drive w here you can tra n sfer any data files, m a ke the connection with a compatible USB cable or Blu e tooth connectivity. If you are usin g the USB cable, sele ct Da t a tr an sf er as the connection mode. A comp atible memo ry car d needs to be ins erted in th e phon e. You c anno t transfer WMDRM protected m usic files u sing D ata tr an sfe r . ⢠To synchronize music with Win dows Media Player, connect the compatible USB cable and select Media player as t h e connection mode. A compatible memo ry ca rd need s to be ins ert ed in the pho ne. ⢠To u se Nokia Music Manager in Nokia PC Suite, conn e ct the compatible USB cable or a ctivate Blue tooth connection , and select PC Suit e a s the connecti on mode. Y ou cannot transfer WMDRM prot e cted music files usin g PC Su ite . To change t h e default USB con nection mode, select Menu > Settings > Connectivity > USB > USB mode . Both Windows Media Player and Nokia Music Manager in Nokia PC Suite have been opti m ized f or transferri ng music files. For informa t ion a bout tra n sferring music with Nokia Music Ma nager, see t he Nokia PC Suite user guide . Music tr ansfer with Windows Me dia Player The fun ct ionality of the mu sic synchr on ization may vary be tween different versions of t he Windows Media Pla yer application. For mor e information, see t h e corresponding Windows Media Player gu ide s and helps.
50 9. Media â Visual Radio You can us e the Visual Radio appl icatio n as a n F M radio with automa tic tu ning and preset st a tions or with pa rallel visual information r e lated to the ra dio program if you tune in to st a tions that offer Visual Radio se rvice. T he Visual Ra dio se rvice us es packe t data (n etwork serv ice). To use t h e Visual Radio se rvice , th e following require m ents must be m et: ⢠The radio st ation and your se rvice provider m ust support this service. ⢠Your intern e t access poin t must be de fin ed for acce ss to the network operatorâÂÂs V isual Radio se rver. ⢠The radio station m ust have the cor rect Visual Radio service ID de fined and have Visual Radio se rvice enabled. Visual Radio ca nnot be started wh e n the phone is in t he offline m ode. The FM radio depends on an antenna other than the wir eless device antenna. A compa tible headset or enhanc ement needs to be attache d to the device for th e FM radio to function properly. Warning: L i sten to m usic at a moderate lev el. Continuous ex posure to high vo lume m a y d a m a g e y o u r h e a r i n g . D o n o t ho l d t h e d e v i c e n e a r y o u r e ar w h e n t he loudspea ker is in use, beca use the volum e may be extreme ly loud. You can make a call or answer an incoming call while listening to the radio. The radio is muted when there is an active call. To open Vi su al Radio, select Men u > Me dia > R adio . To turn t he radio off , select Exit . Tune a nd save a r a dio st ation To start t h e station search w hen the radio is on, s e lect or . Searching stops when a station is found. T o save the station, select Op tio n s > Save station . S e lec t a locat io n for th e st ation . En ter t he nam e of the st ation , an d sel ect OK . Radi o functi ons To adjust th e volume, pres s t he volume ke ys. Select or to s croll to the next or pr e vious saved station. The buttons are inactive if th ere are no sa ved s tations.
51 Whe n usin g a co mpatib le he adset, pres s th e hea dset key to sc roll t o th e next saved radio station. To save th e cur re nt stati on, select Opti ons > Save station , a preset position, and ent er th e st at io n n am e . To s et the stat ion fr equency manuall y, sel ect Optio ns > Ma nual tuni ng . To listen t o the radio in t h e background and go t o the st a ndby mode, select Opt io ns > Play in backgrou n d . Station l ist When the radio is on, select Op ti ons > Station s . The station list is used for managing the saved r a dio stations. Stat ion s etup Scroll to a s t ation in the station list, pr e ss the scroll key, and select Edi t to ch an ge the s t at i on p ar a me te rs . View visu al co nten t To check availability a n d costs, and to s u bscribe to the service, cont a ct your service provider. To view visu a l content of t he curre nt stat io n, select . If the visual se rvice ID was not saved in the station list, you are asked f or t he visual service ID. Enter t he visua l service ID, a nd sele ct OK . If you do n ot have the visual servic e ID, select Retri eve to a ccess the station directory (n e twork service) . To e nd th e v isua l con te nt f ee d b ut n o t the FM rad io , sele c t Close . To set ligh t settings a nd the power save r ti me-out, se le ct Op tion s > Di spla y settings . Visual Radio setti n gs When the radio is on, select Op ti ons > Settings and t he following: Start-up tone âÂÂto e nable or disable the st art-up tone Auto- start service â t o enable or disable t he automatic display of visual content Acces s poin t âÂÂto sele ct the a ccess point
52 Stat ion direct or y With the station dire ctory (ne t work service) you can select Visual Radio enabled or traditional radio stations from a list, grou pe d in folders. To check availability a n d costs, and to s u bscribe to the service, cont a ct your service provider. Ac cess fro m the visua l c ontent vi ew To re t rieve t he visual se rvice ID a nd to st art visual conten t for t he currently tuned radio sta t ion, select and Retrieve . A fte r t he c on ne cti on to t he st at io n directory is established, sele ct the ne arest location to your current position from a list of f olders, and pre ss the scroll key. The device compares the frequen cie s of the listed radio stations with the curren t ly tune d in f requenc y. If a matchi ng frequ ency is found , the visual s ervice I D of the tuned radio st a tion is displayed. Se le ct OK to start viewing the visual content. If there is m ore than on e radio station with matching fr equ encies, t h e radio stations and their visual service ID are displa yed in a list. Select the des ire d radio s t ation. The tuned radio s t ation and the vis u al service ID are displayed. Select OK to start view i ng the visual content. Acce s s fr om option s To access the station di rectory (network service) from the station list, se lect Opt io ns > Station dire ct ory . Aft e r t he c o nne c tio n to th e st at io n di re c tor y , se lec t th e n ea res t loc a tio n to y ou r current position from a list of loca tions. Radio stations that provide visual content a re indicated with . Select the des ire d radio station a nd from the follow in g options: Listen âÂÂto tune to the high lig hted ra dio st ation. To co nfirm th e f requency sett ing, select Yes . Start visual service â to open the visual content of the sele cted radio stat ion (if avai lab le) Save âÂÂt o save the de tails of the selected radio station to the st a tion list Deta il s âÂÂt o view chann el infor mation
53 â Camera To activat e the camera mode w hile in the phone mode , turn th e lower part of t he phone 90 degrees t o the left so th at th e camera lens is point in g away from you when you look at t he display. T o take a s elf portrait, turn t he lower part of the phone 90 degrees to th e right so th at the camera le ns is pointing toward you when you look at t he display. on the upper lef t of the display indicat es the still image mode. To capture an imag e, press t he capture key. You can also capt ur e an image by pressing t he scroll ke y. Th e image i s saved to Images in Galle ry , and the image is displayed. To return to the viewfinder, s elect Back . T o del ete the im age , pres s the clear key. To zoom in or out, press th e fast forw a rd or re w ind media key. To capture images se quentially, s elect Op tio ns > Se qu ence mode > On . When you press t he scroll ke y, t he camera c aptures six images in sh ort in tervals and displays the ima ges in a grid. To t urn the fla sh on, s elect Opti o ns > Flash > On . If you s ele ct Au tomati c , flash is us ed aut omatic ally when n eces sary. Keep a s a fe dist a nc e when usi ng the flas h. D o not use th e flash on people o r a nima ls at close ra nge . Do no t c ov er t h e fl a sh wh il e tak i ng a p i ct ur e . In dim lighting, t o u se night mode, select Op tio ns > Night mode > On . To us e t he self- timer , sele ct Op tio ns > Self-timer and t he tim e you want the camera to wait bef ore capturing t he image. Press t he scroll key, and the timer starts. To adjust the white balance or color tone, select Op tio ns > Ad jus t > White balance or Colour tone . To record a vide o, se lect Opt ions > Vide o mode , or scroll right. on the upper left of th e display indicates t he video mode. T o start the r e cording, press t he capture ke y or the scroll key. To pause the re cording, pr e ss the ca pt ure key. To stop t h e recording, pre ss and hold the capture ke y. To use the pa norama mode, select Opti o ns > P anorama mode , or scroll right. on the u ppe r left of the display indicates the panorama mode . Press t h e capture key to start capturing a panorama image. The panorama preview is shown on the display. Tur n slowly to the right or le ft. You cannot ch a nge the direct ion . You turn t oo fast if the arrow on the displa y is re d. To stop t h e panorama, pres s the capt ure key again .
54 Came ra settings Your device supports an ima ge capture resolution of 1600 x 1200 pixels . You can change camera settings f or still images. In the camera mode, select Opt io ns > Settings > Image a nd from the following settings: Image quality and I mage resolution âÂÂThe better the image quality and t he higher the resol utio n, th e mo re memory th e image consum es. Show captured image âÂÂTo not displa y t he im age after capturing, select No . Default image name âÂÂC ha nge ho w th e ca p tu r ed i m ag es ar e n am ed . Memo ry in us e âÂÂSel ect whe ther y ou wa nt to save yo ur i mages in the phone memo ry or on the memo ry car d. You can change came ra settings for videos. In the ca mera mode, se le ct Op tion s > Se ttin gs > Vi de o and from the following se ttings: Lengt h âÂÂIf s et to Max i m um , the length of t he recorded video is only restricte d by the avai lable memory . If set to Short , the recording time is optimized for MMS sending. Video resolution âÂÂSelect the vide o resolution. Default video name âÂÂSe lect how th e vide o cl ips ar e named . Memo ry in us e âÂÂSelect whether you want t o save your video clips in t he phone memo ry or on the memo ry car d. â Movie director A muvee is a s hort, ed ited vide o clip that can contain vide o, images, music, and text. Qu ick muvee is cre a ted automatically by Movie director aft e r you se le ct the st yle f or the m uvee . Movie director us es th e defa ult mus ic a nd text assoc iate d with the chose n style. In a cu stom muvee you can s ele ct your own vide o and music clips, im ages and style, and add a n opening and closing message. You ca n se nd muvees wit h MMS . A muvee can be saved in Gallery in .3gp file fo rmat. To create mu vees, select Menu > Medi a > Movi e . Mark images and videos, a n d select Op ti ons > Cre ate muvee .
55 Create a quic k muve e 1. To create a quick muvee, se lect Menu > Media > Movi e . Select the videos for the muvee, and scroll right to select t he images, and select Op tion s > Cr eate muve e . 2. Sele ct a st yle for t he muve e fr om the style list. Create a cus tom m uvee 1. To create a a cus t om muvee, select Menu > Media > Mov ie . Select the videos for the muvee, and scroll right to s elect the images, and select Op ti ons > Create muvee . The style se l ection view opens. 2. Scroll to the desired style , and se lect Opt io ns > Customise . 3. In Videos & images , reorder and edit the selected items, or add or remove items from your muvee. You can define the order in w hich the files are played in t he muvee. Select the file you want to move . Scroll to the file below which you want to place t he marked file, and pr ess the scroll ke y. To a dd or re m ove images a nd videos from the mu vee, select Op ti ons > A dd/Re move . In Music , se lect t he music for th e mu ve e. To add albums and thei r con tent to t h e muvee, in the image or vide o clip list view, select Op tion s > Alb ums . In Me ssage you ca n add an open in g and closing text to a muvee. In Len gt h , you can define t he length of t h e muvee. Select from t he following: Multime dia message âÂÂto op timize the l ength of t he muve e for MMS s ending Auto -selec t âÂÂto include all the selected images and video clips in the muvee Same as music âÂÂto set the muvee du ration to be the s a me as the c hose n music clip User define d âÂÂto define t he length of the m uvee 4. Sele ct Op ti ons > Create m uve e . The pre vie w view opens. 5. To preview the custom muvee befor e saving it, select Opti o ns > Play . 6. To save the muvee, se lect Opti o ns > Save . To cre a te a new custom m uvee by u sing th e same st yle settings, sele ct Opti ons > Recreate .
56 Sele ct content To edit the selected video clips, in t he Videos & images folder, select Opti on s > Select contents . You ca n select which parts of the video clip you want to in clude or exclu de in the mu vee. In th e slide , gr een ind icate s inc luded , red i ndic ates excluded, and gre y in dicates n e utral parts. To include a part of the video clip in the muvee, scr oll to the part, and se le ct Opt io ns > In clude . T o exc lude a pa rt, se lect Opti ons > Ex cl ude . T o excl ude a shot, select Op ti ons > Exc lude sh ot . To let Movie dir ector randomly include or e x clude a certain pa rt of t he video clip, scroll t o the pa rt , and se lect Opt ions > Mark as ne utra l . To randomly include or exclude parts of t h e clip, select Opt io ns > Mark all as neu tral . Sett ings In the s tyle selection vie w, select Optio ns > Customise > Settings t o edit the following options: Memo ry in us e âÂÂSelect where to s a ve your muvees. Resolution â Select the resolution of your muvees. Select Automa t ic to u se the optimal resolution ba sed on the nu m ber and length of the vide o clips you have select e d. Defaul t muve e name âÂÂSe t a de fault name f or the m uvees. â Videos To access t he videos folder in Gallery , s elect Menu > Me di a > V i deos . â Recorde r The voice r e corder allows you to record phone conversations and voice me mos. If you record a phone conversation, all pa rties he ar a beeping sound du ring recording. Recorded files are stored in Gallery . S ee âÂÂGal lery ,â p. 4 2. Select Menu > Me dia > Re co rd er . To record a sound clip, select Opti o ns > Recor d sound clip , or select . To listen to th e recording, select . â RealPlayer With RealPlayer, you can play m e dia files such a s video clips sa ve d in the phone memory or memory ca rd, or stre a m media files over the air by open ing a st reaming
57 link. RealPlayer does not su pport all file formats or all t he variations of file formats. To open RealPlayer, select Menu > Media > RealPlayer . To pla y a media file , select Opt io ns > Open > Most recent clips or Saved clip . To s tr e am con t en t ov e r t he a ir : ⢠Select a streaming link saved in the gallery. ⢠Open a streaming link while browsing th e web. To st ream l iv e conten t, yo u must first co nfigure your de fault access point. See â Access points, â p. 79. Co ntact yo ur ser vice prov ider for more informa tion. In RealPlayer, you can only open a n rtsp:// URL address. You cannot open an http:// URL address; how ever, RealPlayer recognizes a n http link to a .ram file since a .ram file is a text file con taining an rtsp link. Warning: Do not hold the device nea r your ea r when the loud s peak er is in use, because t he v olume may b e extremely lo ud. With RealPlayer, you can play m e dia files such a s video clips sa ve d in the phone memory or memory ca rd, or stre a m media files over the air by open ing a st reaming link. To open RealPlayer, se lect Menu > Medi a > Re alPlayer . RealPlayer does n ot support all file for mat s or a ll t he variations of f i le form a ts. Play media file s To play a media file in RealPlayer, select Opt io ns > Open and from the following: Most recent clips â to play media files t h at you have recently pla yed Saved clip âÂÂto play m edia files saved in the phone or me mory card To s tr e am con t en t ov e r t he a ir : ⢠Select a streaming link saved in the gallery. A connection to the streaming ser ver is esta blis hed. ⢠Open a streaming link while browsing th e web. To st ream l iv e conten t, yo u must first co nfigure your de fault access point. See â Acce ss points,â p. 79. Many service provid ers re quire y ou to use an int ernet a ccess point ( IAP ) fo r your default acce ss poin t. Other se rvice providers a llow you to use a WAP access point. Contact your service provider f or m ore information.
58 In RealPlayer, you can only open a n rtsp:// URL address. You cannot open an http:// URL address; how ever, RealPlayer recognizes a n http link to a .ram file since a .ram file is a text file con taining an rtsp link. Warning: Do not hold the device nea r your ea r when the loud s peak er is in use, because t he v olume may b e extremely lo ud. Shortc uts during play Scroll up t o se ek forw a rd or down t o se ek back in t h e media file. Press t h e volume keys to increase or decrease the sound volume. â Flash Play er With Flash Pla yer , you can view, play, and interact with flash files made for mobile devices. Select Menu > Me dia > Flash Player . To open a folder or play a flash file , select it. 10 . P e r s o n a l i z a t i o n â Themes To change t h e look of your phone displa y, activate a theme. A theme can in clu de the standby mode wallpaper and powe r saver. You can edit a theme to personalize your phone furth e r. Select Menu > P ersonalis. > Themes . To see a lis t o f t he available t hemes, select General . The act ive theme is indicated by a che ck m ark. To previe w a theme , scro ll to t he theme , and sel ect Opt io ns > Preview . To ac tiv a te the previ ewed t heme, sele ct Set . In Them es , you can also set the menu view type, se t a custom w allpaper, and personalize the l ook of the pow er saver. Audi o theme To apply or e dit an audio theme, se le ct Menu > P ersonalis. > Th eme s > Audio them es . To apply an audio t h eme, select Act ive au dio theme and the desir ed the me.
59 You can per sonal ize t he sound s ass o c iated w ith an event or fu nction . To s av e th e p ers o na li z ed t hem e, i n t he A udio themes main view, select Opt io ns > Sa ve th em e and enter a nam e for the th eme. â Profiles In Profiles , you can adjust and personalize the phone tones for different events, environments, or caller groups. You can see t he currently se le cted profile at t he top of t h e display in the st andby mode. If the Ge neral prof ile is in u se, only the cur ren t date is s hown. Select Menu > P ersonalis. > Profiles . To activate t h e profile, sele ct the profile and Ac ti v a t e . Tip: To quickly change to Silent profile from any other profile , in the standby mode , press a nd hold # . To personalize a profile , select the profile, P ersonalise and from t he follow ing options: Ring ing tone âÂÂTo set the ringing tone for voice calls, choose a ringing tone from the list. Pre ss a n y key to stop t h e sound. You can also change ringing tones in contacts. See â Add a ringing tone,â p. 41. Video call tone âÂÂSelect th e ringi n g tone for video calls. Say caller's name âÂÂSe lect On to h av e th e p h on e s ay th e ca ll er âÂÂs na me wh e n t he phone is ringing. Ringing type âÂÂW he n As c e n d ing is selected, the ringing volume starts from level one and increases level by leve l t o the set volume level. Ringing volume âÂÂSet the volume level for the r in ging and message alert tones. Message alert tone âÂÂS et th e alert tone for t ext a nd mul timedi a me ssages. E-mail alert to ne âÂÂSet the ale rt tone for e-ma il mes sages. Vibrating alert âÂÂS et the p hone to vi brat e to a lert for i ncomin g call s an d mes sages. Ke ypad t ones âÂÂSet the volume level for keypad tones. War n in g t o n e s â Activate or deactivate warning tones. Ale rt for â Set the phone to r ing on ly upon calls f rom phone numbers t h at belong to a sele ct ed contact grou p. Phone calls comi n g from people outside the se lected group have a sile nt a lert.
60 Profile name âÂÂName the profile. This setting is not s h own for the Ge neral an d Offline profiles. When using t he O ffline profile , the phone is not con nected to the GSM network. If no SIM card is insta lled, to us e some functions of t he phone, start th e phone in Offline . Import ant: In the offline profile you can not make or receive any calls, or use other features tha t require cellula r network cov erage. Calls may still be poss ible to the official emergency num ber programmed into your device. To make calls, you must first activ ate the phone functio n by changing profiles. If the device has been locked, enter t he lock co de. â 3-D tones With 3-D to nes you c an appl y thr ee-di mensiona l sou nd effec ts to ringin g tones . Not all ringing tones support 3-D effects. To edit 3-D tone settings, sele ct Menu > P ersonalis. > 3-D t ones . To en able the 3 -D e ffects, sele ct 3- D t o ne s > On . T o ch ange the rin gi ng tone, select R inging t one and the des ired ringing tone. To change the 3-D effect that is a pplied to the ringing tone, select Sound tra je cto ry and the desir e d effect. To m odify the effect, sele ct Tr aj ect o r y s p ee d , Doppler effect , o r Reverberation . D oppler effect m a y not be available for all effect s. To l is te n to th e r in gi n g to ne w ith th e 3 -D ef fec t , sel ec t Opt ions > Pl ay t on e . If you ena ble the 3-D tones b ut do n ot se lect a ny 3-D effect , ster eo wi dening is applied to the ringing tone. 11 . W e b â Mobi le Sear c h Use Mobile Search to get access to search engines, and fin d and connect to loca l services, websites, images, and mobile content. You can use t h e application to find and ca ll local restaurants and sh ops, and use t he advanced mapping technology to assi s t you in finding their loca t ion. Select Menu > Web > Se arch .
61 When you open Mobile Searc h , a list of ca tegories is dis pla yed. Select a ca tegory (f or exa mple, images ), a nd ente r your text into the search field . Sel ect Search . The search re sults are dis pla yed on the screen. For additional h elp and instruct ion s on t h e application, select Opti ons > Help . For more informa tion on the application, vis it a lso ww w.mobilesearch.nokia.com/. â We b To browse web pages wr itten in XHTML, WM L, or HTML, select Men u > We b > Browse r , or pre ss and hold 0 in the standby mode . Check the availability of se rvices, pricing, and tariffs with you r se rvice provider. Service pr ovide rs also gi ve you instruct ions on how to u se thei r services. Set up the phon e for the bro w ser ser vice Your device may con figu re the WAP or in ternet acc e ss point automatically ba se d on your SI M card. You can us e Settings wizard to configure W AP or internet access point settings. See âÂÂSettin gs wizard,â p. 8 1 . You may receive servic e settings in a configuration message from the ser vice provider. To define a n access poin t manually, see A ccess points in â Connec tion,â p. 79. Make a connection To access w eb pages, do t he following: ⢠Select the home pa ge ( ) of your service provider. ⢠Select a bookm a rk from t he bookmarks view . ⢠In the bookmarks view , en t er the addre ss of the web page, a nd select Go t o . Bookmarks Your device may have prein stalled bookmarks and links for third- party internet sites. You may al so acc ess othe r third-p arty sites th ro ugh you r device. Th ird-pa rty si tes are not affiliated with Nokia, and Nok ia does not endorse or assume liability for them . If you choose to acces s such sites, yo u sh ould t ake preca utio ns for security or conten t. Bookmarks are indicat ed by the following icons: Th e starting pa ge defined f or t he defa ult access poin t.
62 The automatic bookma rks folder contains bookmarks ( ) that are colle ct ed automatically when y o u browse pages. Any bookmark showing t h e titl e or int e rnet address of the bookmark. and m ay be replaced w it h the websit e âÂÂs icon. Add boo k marks manu ally 1. In the bookmarks view, select Opti ons > B ookmark manager > Add bookmark . 2. Fill in the fields. 3. Sele ct Op ti ons > Save . Send bookmark s Scroll to a bookmark or mark several bookmarks, s ele ct Op tion s > Tools > Send and an option. Co nnection se curity If the security indicator is displayed during a connection, the data transmission between the device a nd the internet gateway or server is encrypted. The security icon does not indicate that the data transmiss ion between the gateway and the cont ent serv er (or pla ce where t he reques ted resou rce is s t ored) is secu re. The s ervice provider secures the data tra nsmission between the gateway and the conten t server. To view details a bou t the connecti on , encryption s t atus, and informat io n about ser ve r a ut h enti ca tion , se l ect Op ti o ns > Tools > P age info . Securit y features ma y be requir ed for some ser vices, such a s bank ing services. For such connect ions you need security cer tificat es. For more information, conta ct your service provider. See also â Certificate management,â p. 75. Browse web p a ges Keys a nd co mm ands f or browsing To open a link, make selections, or check box e s, press th e scroll key. To go to t h e previous page while browsing, se lect Back . I f Back is not available, select Op ti ons > N avigation options > Hist or y t o view a ch ronological list of the pages visite d du ring a browsin g se ssion. To ch oose the desired page, scroll le ft or right, an d se lect it. T he history list is cleare d each time a session is close d. To save a bookmark while brow sing, selec t Opt io ns > Save as bookmark .
63 To r et r iev e the l a te st co nt en t fro m the s e rve r , se l ect Op ti on s > Navigation options > Reload . To open t h e browser toolbar, scroll to an empty part of t he page, a nd press t he scroll key. Keypa d shor tcuts w hile br owsin g 1 âÂÂOpen your bookmarks. 2 âÂÂSearch for keyw ords in the cur re nt page. 3 âÂÂRe turn t o the p revi ous pag e. 5 âÂÂList all open windows. 8 âÂÂShow the page overview of the current page. Pre ss 8 again t o zoo m i n an d vi ew the desire d se ction of t he page. 9 âÂÂEnt er a new web addres s. 0 â Go to th e st ar t pa ge . * or # âÂÂZoom the pa ge in or out. Mi ni ma p Min i ma p helps you navigate web pages t hat contain large amount of information. Set Min i ma p on in browser settings. Se e âÂÂBrowser se t tings,â p. 6 5. Scroll through a large we b page, and Min i m ap opens and displays an ove rview of the web page you are browsing. To move in Mi ni map , scroll. When you stop scrolling, Mini map disappears and t he area outlined in Min i map is dis played. Page overview With P age o ver view , you can move m ore qu ickly to the des ired part of a web page. Page overview may not be a vailable on all pages. To show the page overview of t h e current page, press 8 . To find the desi re d spot on the page, scroll up or down . Press 8 aga in to z oom in and view the desir e d section of the page. Web feeds and blo g s Web feeds a re .xml files on w eb pages tha t are widely use d t o share t he latest entr y headlines or full text , for exa mple, recent news in th e form of news fe eds. Blogs or we b logs are web diaries. Most of the web feeds use RSS a nd ATOM technologies.
64 The browser a utomatically detects if a web page cont a ins web fee ds. To subscribe to a w eb fe ed , sel e ct Opti ons > Su bscribe and a fe ed, or click on the link. To view the web fe eds you have subs cribed to, in the bookmark s vie w, select Web feeds . To update a web fe ed, select it, and Opti ons > Re fresh . To define how the web fee ds are updated, select Optio ns > Settings > We b f ee d s . Sav e d page s You can save pa ges and vie w them later offline. To save a page while browsing, s e lect Opt io ns > Tools > Save page . To o pen t he Save d pages view, in t he bookmarks view, select Saved pages . T o open a page, sele ct it. To star t a connection t o the browser se rvice and ret rie ve the page a gain, sele ct Opt io ns > Navigation options > Reload . T he phone stays on line after you reload the page. Download You can downl oa d items su ch as ringing t on es, images, operat or logos, software, and video clips u sin g the mobile browser. Once downloaded, items are handle d by the respe ct ive applications on your phone, for e xample , a downloaded ph oto is saved in Galle ry . Import ant: O n ly install and use applica tions and other softwa re from trusted sources, such as applicat ions that are Symbian Signed or have passed the Java Ve rif ie d TM testing. End a connection To end the connect ion and vie w the browser pa ge offline, se le ct Opt ions > Tools > Di sconnec t . To quit browsing and to ret u rn to t he standby mode , select Op tion s > Exit . Empty the cache A cache is a memory location that is used to store dat a temporarily. I f you have tried to access or have accessed confide ntial informa tion requiring passwords, empty the cach e after each us e. The i nf orma tion or services you hav e a cces sed are s tored i n the cache. To empt y the c a ch e, select Men u > We b > Brows er > Options > Clear privacy data > Clear cache .
65 To clear a ll privacy data, including the ca che, cookies, form data passwords, and browsing history, sele ct Menu > We b > Browser > Op ti on s > Clear privacy dat a > All . Browser settings Select Optio ns > Settings > Genera l , P age , Privacy or We b f ee d s , a nd from t he following: Gene r al Acces s poin t âÂÂSel ect t he def ault access poi nt. Homepage âÂÂDefine the address of the desired homepage. Min i ma p âÂÂSet on or off. History list âÂÂSelect whether a list of the pages you have visited during the curr en t browsing session a re displayed when you select Back . Securit y warnin gs â Hide or show se cu rity notifica t ions. Java/Ecma Script âÂÂEnable or dis a ble the use of scripts. Page Load content â Select what type of con tent is loaded automatically while browsing. If you s e lect Text only , to load im ages during browsing, sele ct Optio ns > T ools > Load images . Screen size âÂÂChoose how to use the display area for viewing pages. Defaul t enco ding âÂÂWhe n you selec t Automa tic , th e b ro ws er au t o ma tic a ll y tr ie s t o choose the correct character encoding. Block pop-ups âÂÂAllow or block a u tomatic opening of diffe rent pop- u ps while browsing. Automatic reload âÂÂEnable or disable automatic ref re sh of brow se r pages. Font size âÂÂS ele c t th e fo nt siz e . Priv acy Auto. bookmarks âÂÂSe lect On if you want the bookmarks to be automatically sa ved in th e A uto. bookmarks folde r w hen you visit a page. When you select Hid e folde r , the bookmarks are st ill automatically added to t h e folder. Form data saving âÂÂIf you do not want t he data you e nt er t o different f orms on a web page to be sa ved and u se d next ti m e the page is en tered, se le ct Off .
66 Cookies â Enable or disable th e receiving and sen din g of cookies ( a mean s for co n te nt pro vi de r s to i den t i fy u s ers an d th eir pr ef e ren c e s fo r fre q ue nt ly u sed content). Web fe eds Automatic updates âÂÂDefine whethe r you want t he web feeds t o be upda t ed automatically or n ot , and how oft e n you want to update t hem. Setting the application to retrieve w eb feeds automatically may involve the t r ansmission of large amounts of da ta through your service pr ovider' s ne t work. Contact your service provide r for inf ormation about dat a transm ission charges. Acc. poin t for auto-update âÂÂSel e ct the desired a ccess point for updating (only avai lab le w h en Automatic updates is on). 12. Organi zer â Clock Select Menu > Organise r > Clock . Clock settin gs To change the time or dat e , select Op tion s > Se ttings . F o r m o re in fo r m a t io n a bo u t the setti ngs, s ee âÂÂD ate and time ,â p. 73. Set an alarm 1. To se t a new alarm , scroll r ight to Alar m , and sel ect Opti o ns > New alarm . 2. Ent er th e al arm time, sele ct whe the r and w h en the alar m is repe at ed, an d select Do ne . When an alar m i s activ e, is sho wn. To ca nce l an al arm , scr ol l to the a lar m, an d s elec t Opti ons > Remove alarm . To deac tiva te a repe ated ala rm, sel ec t Opt io ns > D e activate alarm . Turn off the alarm Select Stop to turn off the a la rm. Select Sn ooze to stop th e alar m for 5 minut es, af ter wh ich it res umes. If the alarm time is r eached while the de vice is switc hed off, the device switc hes itse lf on and starts sou nding the alarm tone . If you select Stop , the devic e asks whether you want to
67 activate th e devi ce for calls. S elect No to switch off the devic e or Ye s to make an d receive calls. Do not select Ye s when wi reless pho ne use m ay caus e interfe rence o r dang er. World clock To open t h e world clock vi e w, scroll right t o Wo r l d . To add cities to t he list, select Opt io ns > A dd city . To set you r cu rrent city, scroll to a city, and se lect Opti ons > Set as curre nt city . The city is displayed in the clock main vie w, and the tim e in your device is changed according t o the city se lected. Check that t he time is corr ect and matches your tim e z o ne . â Calendar Select Menu > Organise r > Calendar . In the calen da r, you ca n keep tr a ck of your app ointments, meetings, birthdays, ann ivers arie s , and oth er e vent s. Y ou can al so s et a c alenda r a larm t o rem ind y ou of upc oming even ts. Create c alendar e ntries 1. Sele ct Op ti ons > New en t ry an d an ent ry typ e. Anni versary ent rie s are r epeat ed ev ery yea r. 2. Fill in the fields. Repeat âÂÂPress the scroll key to change the e n try to be re peat ed. A re peating entry is indicated by in the day view. Repe a t unt il âÂÂSe t an ending date for t he repea ted e ntr y, fo r exam ple, the la st date of a weekly course you are t aking. This option is shown only if you have se l ect ed t o re pea t the ev e nt. Synchronisation > Private âÂÂAfte r syn chroniz ation the ca lenda r ent ry can be s e e n o n l y b y y o u , a n d i t i s no t s h o w n t o o t h e r s e ve n i f t h e y h a v e o n l i n e a c c e s s to vi ew the calend ar. Public âÂÂThe calend ar ent ry is shown to othe rs who have access to vie w your calendar online. No ne âÂÂThe calendar ent r y is not copied when you synchronize your calen da r. 3. To save the entry, select Done .
68 Ca len dar vi ew s Press # i n t he m o nt h , w eek , or d ay v iew s to au tom a ti ca lly h ig h li ght th e cu r re nt date. To create a meeting ent ry, press a ny number ke y ( 0 â 9 ) in any calendar view. To go to a ce rtain date, s e lect Opti o ns > Go to date . Write the d ate, and s elect OK . To-do Select Optio ns > To- do vie w . In th e To- do view , yo u can keep a l ist o f ta sks that yo u need to do. Creat e a to- do note 1. To sta rt to w r ite a to -d o n ote , pr e ss an y num b er key ( 0 â 9 ). 2. W ri t e th e task in th e Subject field. Set a due date and a prior ity for the task. 3. To save t he to- do n ote, s elec t Do ne . â Not es Select Menu > Organise r > No tes . To w rit e a n e w n ote , sta rt w rit i n g. To sa ve th e n ote , sel ec t Done . You can sa ve pl ain te xt fil es (. txt forma t) you rece ive to Notes . â Calculator Select Menu > Organise r > Calculator . 1. Ente r the fi rst num ber of yo ur calcu lation. 2. Scro ll to an arithmetic function, and select it. 3. Ente r the second number. 4. To ex ecute t he c alcula tion, selec t . To add a decim a l, press # . Not e: This calcu lator has limited acc uracy and is de signed for simple ca lculations. â Converter Select Menu > Organise r > Converter .
69 In th e converter, you can convert m e asurement para meters such as Le ng th from one un it to anot her, for ex ample , Ya r d s to Metr es . The conve rt er has lim it ed accuracy a n d rounding errors may occur. Set a base curr ency and exch a nge rate s Before you can convert curr en cy, you need t o choose a base currency (us u ally your domestic curre ncy) and add exchange rates . The rate of t he base cur rency is alwa ys 1. The base cur renc y det ermin es the conversion rates of t he othe r currenci e s. 1. Sele ct Curren cy as th e measu rem ent type , and s elec t Opti ons > C urrency rates . 2. To change the base cu rrency, scroll to the currency ( usu ally your dome st ic currency), and select Op ti o ns > Set as base currency . 3. Add exchange rates, s croll to the cur rency, and e n ter a n ew rate, th a t is, how many units of t he curre n cy equal one u nit of the base currency you se lected. 4. After you insert a ll t he require d exchange rates, you c a n convert curren cy. Not e: When y ou chan ge base c urrenc y, you m ust ent er new exc hange r ates becau s e all previo usly set e xchange r ates are cl eared. Conv ert un its To convert cu rre ncy, you must first set the exchange rat e . See âÂÂSet a base currency and exchange rates,â p. 69 . 1. Sele ct Ty p e and t he type of m easurement to convert, and select OK . 2. Select the first Unit fiel d, t he uni t from which y ou wa nt t o co nvert, and OK . 3. Sele ct the next Uni t field a n d the unit to w hich y ou want to co nvert. 4. In th e fir st Amo unt fie ld, e nter t he v a lu e to b e conv erted. The other Am ount field changes a utomatically to show the converted va lue. Press # to add a decimal and press * for the , - (for tem pera t u re), and E (exponent) symbols. The conversion or de r changes if you write a va lu e in the second A mount fiel d. Th e result is shown in the first Amoun t fie ld .
70 13. App lic ation s â Download! Download! ( network service) is a mobile content shop available on your device . You may be able to down load some conten t free of ch a rge. With Download! you can discov er, previe w , buy, download, and upgra de con tent, services, and applications. The items are categorized under catalogs and folders provided by diff erent service providers. The available cont e nt depends on your service provider. Select Menu > Applicat ion s > Download! . Download! uses yo ur ne twork servi ces to acc ess the most up-to -date conte nt. Fo r information on additional items available through Download! , contact you r service provide r, or t h e supplier or m a nufacturer of t he item . â My own To access t he applications you have dow nloaded in your phone, se le ct Menu > Applications > My own . GPS data This featu re is not design ed to support positioning requests for related calls. Contact your se rvice provider f or m ore inf orm ation about how your phon e complies with government regulations on location - based emergency calling services. GPS data is a GPS application t h at enables you to vie w your curren t location, fin d your way to a de sired location , and track dist a nce. The application re quires a Blue toot h GPS e nhancement to o perate. You mus t als o have Bl uetoot h GPS positioning method enabled in Menu > Settin gs > Phon e s ett. > General > Po s i t i o n i n g > Positioning methods . Select Menu > Applicat ion s > My own > GPS data . In GPS dat a and Lan dmar ks , coordinates a re expresse d in degrees a nd decima l degrees format u sing WGS-84 coordinat e system.
71 Landm arks Landmarks are coordinates to geographic loca tions that you can sa ve to your devi ce for lat er use in differen t location-based service s. You can create landmarks using a Bluetooth GPS enha n cement or network (ne t work service). Select Menu > Applicat ion s > My own > La nd mark s . 14 . Sett ings â V oice commands To select t he funct ion s to use by voice comm and, sele ct Me nu > Settings > Voi c e comm. . The voice commands for changing profiles are in t h e Profiles folder. To act ivate a new vo ice com ma nd for an ap plic ati on, sele ct Opti ons > New application and the application. To manage the voice commands, scroll to a fu n ction, select Op tion s and from the following options: Change command or Remove application âÂÂto change or deactiv a te the voice command of the se lected func t ion Playback âÂÂto play the a ctivated voice command To use voice com mands, see âÂÂV oice dialing,â p. 22. To change voice com mand settings, sele ct Opt ions > Settings and from the following options: Synt hesis er âÂÂt o ac tiv a te or de ac tiv a te th e t ex t- to- sp e ech s ynt h ezi se r tha t sa ys out loud the recognized voice command Remove voice adapts. âÂÂto r es e t the v oi ce ad a p ta tio ns . Th e pho n e a dap ts to t he us erâÂÂs v oice to bett er recogniz e th e voic e comma nds. â Call mailbox Call m ailbox is a n etwork se rvice. Contact your service provider fo r the ca ll mailbox num ber. To define the call mailbox number if no number is set, select Menu > Settings > Call mailbox , a n d w hen V oice mailbox numbe r: is displayed, ent e r the voice mailbox num ber.
72 To change t h e call mailbox number, select Me n u > Se ttings > C all mail box > Opt io ns > Change number , a nd enter the nu mber. â Speed dial To assign phon e numbers to t he speed dialin g ke ys, se l ect Me nu > Settings > Speed dial , scroll to a key icon, and select Op tio ns > A ssign . Se l e ct th e conta ct and the num ber f or th e speed dial . To view the nu mber assigned to a speed-dialing key, sc roll to the key icon, and select Option s > V ie w number . To change or remove the number, select Change or Remove . â Phone settings Gene ral Select Me nu > Se ttings > Phone se t t. > Gener al > Personalisation , D ate and time , Enhan ceme nt , Security , Factory settings , o r Po s i t io ni n g . Pers on alisa tion Select Displ ay , St andby mode , Tones , Language , Them es , or Vo i c e c o mm s . . Display Light sensor âÂÂt o a djust the light se nsor that observes the lightin g conditions and adjust s the brightness of the display Font size âÂÂto select the font s ize used in lists and editors P ower save r time-out âÂÂto s e t the time-out per iod a fter wh ich the power saver is act ivate d Welcome note / logo âÂÂto set the welcome note or logo w hich is displayed brie fly each time you switch on t he phone. Light ti me- out âÂÂto set the time-out for the display light Sta n db y mode Act ive standby âÂÂto enable or disable active s t andby. See â A ctive st andby ,â p. 16. Shortcuts âÂÂto assign shortcuts for t he right and left selection keys , scrolling in different dir e ctions or press i ng the s croll key in the standby m ode. The scroll key shortcuts are not available if Active st andby is On . Act ive standby apps. âÂÂto select the application short cu ts to appear in the a ct ive standby. This setting is available only if A ct ive s t andby is se t to On .
73 Operator logo âÂÂthis setting is visible on ly if you have received and sa ved an operator logo. You can sele ct whether t he operator logo is shown. Ton es Change the tones of the clock, ca l endar and currently active pr ofile . See âÂÂProfiles,â p. 59. Lang ua ge Phone language âÂÂto change the language for t he display t exts in your phon e . This change ma y also affect the format used fo r date and time and t h e separa t ors used, for example, in calculations. If you select Au tom ati c , the phone sele ct s th e language according t o the information on your SIM ca rd. After you h a ve changed the display t ext la nguage, the ph one restarts. Writing language âÂÂt o change t he writing language of your phone. Ch anging the la ngu age aff ect s t he c har act ers an d sp eci al c har act ers av ail ab le w hen writ in g tex t a nd th e pr e di cti ve te xt dic t io n ar y us e d. Pre dic tive text âÂÂto s e t predictive tex t input On or Of f for all editors in the ph one. Select a language for e ntering predictive text from the list. Them es Apply themes. See â The mes,â p. 58. Voic e comma n ds Edit voice command and voice dia ling settings. See âÂÂV oice commands,â p. 7 1. Date and tim e Time an d Dat e âÂÂto set the t ime and date Time zone â to s e t th e ti m e zon e of y ou r loc a tio n . If you set Network operator tim e > A uto-update , the local t im e is shown. Dat e form at â to select the form at to displa y dates Date s eparator âÂÂto select the date se parator Time format âÂÂt o sele ct between 24-hou r and 12-hour t ime form a t Time separator âÂÂto sele ct the time sepa ra tor Clock type âÂÂto select w hether the analog o r digital clock is sh own in th e standby mode. See âÂÂClock,â p. 66. Clock alarm tone âÂÂto sele ct the a larm clock tone W orkdays â to specify da ys for alarms re pe ated only on workdays
74 Network operator t ime (ne two rk se rvice) â to allo w the netw ork t o upda te ti me, date, and time zone information t o you r phone. If you select Auto-update , all active conn e ctions are discon nected. Check a n y alarms as th ese may be affecte d. En hanceme nt T o c h a n g e s e t t i n g s o f a n e n h a n c e m e n t , i n t h e Enha nceme nt sett. view , scroll to an enha ncement , suc h as Headset , sel ect Op ti o ns > Open and from th e following options: Default profile âÂÂto se lect the profile you want to activate each t ime you connect the enha ncemen t to you r phon e Automa tic answ er âÂÂto set the phone to answer an inc om ing call automatically aft er 5 seco nds when t his e nhancem ent is co nnecte d to your pho ne. If t he Ring ing typ e is set to Beep on ce or Silent , automatic answer cannot be used, and you must answer the phone manually. Lights âÂÂTo se t the phone light s cont inuous ly on while using the e nhancem ent, select On . Secur ity Select Ph one and SIM card , Certificate management , or Security module . Phon e and SI M card You can change the following code s: lock code, (U)PIN code, and PIN2 code. These code s can o nly i nclude the n umbers from 0 t o 9. Avoid using acce ss code s similar t o e mergency n u mbers to prevent a ccidental dialing of the emerge n cy number. Code in use âÂÂto select the acti ve code, PIN or UPI N , for the active USIM. This is shown only if t h e active U SIM supports UPIN, a nd the UPIN is n ot rejected. PIN code request or UPIN code request âÂÂto set the phone t o request the code each time the phone is s wit ched on. Some SIM ca rds may n o t allow the PIN code req ue s t to b e turn e d Off . If you selec t Code in us e > UPIN , UPIN code request is shown in st ead. PIN code or UPIN code , PIN2 code , an d Lock code âÂÂto change the code s Keypad autolock period > Use r defined â to automatically lock t he keypad after a defined period of inactivity Phone autolock period âÂÂto set a time-out after w hich the phone is automatically loc ked. T o use the p hone a gain, yo u need t o enter the c orrec t lock co de. To t urn off the autolock period, s ele ct No ne .
75 Lock if SIM card changed âÂÂto s e t the phone to prompt for the lock code when an unknown, new SIM card is inserted into your ph one. The phone keeps a list of SIM cards t h at ar e recognized as t he owner cards. Closed user group (network service)âÂÂto specify a grou p of people whom you can call and who can ca ll you . For more inform a tion, contact your service provider. To activate t h e default grou p agreed on w ith the service provider, select Defau lt . If you want to use ano ther group (you need to know the group index nu mber), select On . When calls are limited to closed user groups, calls ma y be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Confirm SIM service s (network se rvice)âÂÂto set the phone t o displa y confirm a tion messages w h en you u se a SIM card se rvice Cert ificate m anagemen t A list of a u thority certificates that have been stored in your phon e is displayed in Certificate management . To see a list of pe rsonal certificates if available, scroll right. Digital certificates should be u sed if you want to con nect to an online bank or another site or r e mote server for actions t hat involve transferrin g confidential information. They should a lso be u se d if you w a nt to re duce the risk of viruses or other malicious sof tw are a n d be sure of the authenticity of software when downloading and insta lli ng software. Import ant: E ve n if the use of certificates makes th e risks involved in rem ote conne ctions and software installation considerably sma ller, they mu st be used correc tly in order to benefit from increased security. The existence of a certificat e does not offer any protection by itself; the certificat e manager must c ontain corr ect, authentic, or trusted certificates f or increased secu rity to be availa ble. Cer tificates have a r estricted lifetime. If "Expir ed certificate" or "Certificate n ot valid yet" is shown even if the certificate shou ld be valid, chec k that the curren t date and time in yo ur device ar e corre ct. Bef ore ch anging a ny certif icate settin gs, you mus t make sure that yo u really trust the ow ner of the certificate and th at the certif icate really belong s to the listed owner. Vi ew certi ficat e deta ils and c heck a uthen ticity You can only be sure of the correct identity of a serve r when the signature and the period of validity of a server cert ificate have been checked.
76 Th e ph o ne n o tif ie s y ou if t h e id en tit y of t h e se rv er i s not a ut h en tic or i f y ou d o n o t have the corr ect security certifica t e in your phon e . To check ce rtificate details, sc roll to a cer tificate, and se lect Opt io ns > Ce rtificate details . While opening the certificate details, t h e phone checks the validity of t he certificat e and one of t he following notes may appear: Expired certificate â The validity pe riod has ended for t h e selected cert ificate. Certificate not valid yet âÂÂThe validi ty per iod ha s not y et be gun fo r the selected certificate. Certificate corrupted âÂÂThe certificate cannot be used. Contact t h e certificate issuer. Certificate not trust ed âÂÂYou have not s et any application to use the ce rtificate. Chang e the trust setting s Before chan gin g any cert i ficate set t ings, you m ust make sure t hat you re ally trust the owner of the certificate a n d that the certificate re a lly belongs to the listed owner. Scroll to an authority ce rt ificate, and select Op tio ns > Tru st s e tt ings . Depending on the certificate, a list of the applications that can us e the selected certificate is shown. Sec u rit y m odul e View or edit security modules. Fact or y setti ngs Reset some of t he settings t o their original va lues. You need the lock code . See âÂÂLock code,â p. 8. Posit ioning With the positioning service you can rec e ive information from service providers about local is sues such a s weathe r and traffic con dition s, ba sed on the location of your device ( ne twork se rvice). To enable a positioning method, select Posit ionin g methods , scroll to the positioning method, and se lect Opt io ns > Enable . To st op u sing it, select Opt io ns > Dis able . To define t he positioning se rve r a cce ss point, sele ct P ositioning server > Acce ss point and the de sired access point . Then se lect Se rver address , and e nter the domain name or UR L address of the server.
77 Pho ne Select Menu > Settings > Phone sett. > Phone an d Call , Call dive rt , Call barring , o r Net wo rk . Call Send my caller ID (network service)âÂÂto set your phon e number t o be displayed ( Yes ) or hidden ( No ) from the person whom you are calling. The value may be set by your se rvice provider wh en you su bscribe t o t he service ( Set by netw ork ). Call wait ing (n etwork se rvice) âÂÂto set th e netwo rk to notif y you of a new inc oming call while you have a ca ll in progres s. To request the network to a ctivate call waiting, select Act iv a t e . To reques t the n etwork to deactivate call waiting, select Cancel . To check w h ether the f u nction is acti ve , select Ch e ck status . Reject call with SM S âÂÂto enable rejecting phon e calls with a t ext message. See â A nswer or reject a call,â p. 23. Message text âÂÂt o ente r a t ext t o be s ent wh en y ou rej ect a call with a text message Image in video call âÂÂto select a still image to be shown instead of t he video when you deny video se n ding in a video call Automatic redial âÂÂto s et the phon e to make a maxi m um of 10 att e mpts to co nne c t t he c al l af te r an un s ucc e ss ful cal l at te m p t. P res s th e end k e y to s top auto m a tic red ia l ing. Show call duration âÂÂto set t he phone to display t he call dura t ion during a call Summary after call âÂÂto set th e phone t o brie fly displa y t he approximate du ration of th e last ca ll Speed dialling > On âÂÂto set the ph one to dial t he numbers a ssigned to the speed dialing keys, 2 to 9 , by pressing and holding the corresponding number key Anykey answer > On âÂÂto answer an incoming ca ll by briefly pressing any ke y, except the left a nd right se lection keys, volume ke ys, the power key and the end ke y Line in use ( network se rvice )âÂÂshown on ly if the SIM ca rd supports t wo subscriber numbers, that is, two phone lines. Select which phone line ( Line 1 or Line 2 ) you want to use for making cal ls and sending short m essages. Calls on both lines ca n be answered irrespective of the selected line. Y ou cannot make calls if you select Lin e 2 an d have n ot s ubscri bed to this netwo rk s ervic e. To
78 prevent line selection, select Line change > Disable i f supported by you r SIM card. To change t h is setting, you need the PIN2 code. Ca ll di vert Call divert is a network s e rvice. 1. Sele ct which calls you want to di vert: Voice calls , D ata and video calls , or Fa x calls . 2. Se lect the de sired option. F o r example, to divert voice calls when your nu mber is busy or when you reject an in com ing call, select If bu s y . 3. To set the divert option on or off, select Op ti o ns > Act iv at e or Can c el . To check whether t he option is a ctivated, select C heck s t atus . Several divert options can be ac tive at the sam e time . Call barring and call diverting cannot be active at th e same time. Call barrin g Call ba rring (network se rvice) all ow s you to restrict the ca lls that you make and receive wit h your phone. To ch a nge the se ttings, you n eed the barrin g password from your se rvice provide r. Scroll to t h e desired ba rrin g option, a n d to request th e network to se t call restriction on, select Op ti o ns > Act iv a te . To set the selected call r estriction off, select Cancel . To check whether the calls a re barr e d, select Che ck st atus . To change the barring pa ssword, se lect Edit barring password . To cancel all active call barrings , select Cancel all barrin gs . Call barring and call diverting cannot be active at th e same time. When calls are barred, calls may be possible to certain official emergency numbers. Netwo rk Network mode âÂÂTo select which network to use ( sh own only if su pported by the service provider). I f you select Dual mode , the de vice uses the GSM or UMTS network aut om atically, according to t h e network pa ra meters and t he roaming agreements bet ween t he network ope rators. Operator selection âÂÂTo set the phone to search for and select automatically one of the av ailable n etworks, sele ct Autom atic . T o select the desired network manu ally from a list of networks, sele ct Manua l . If the connection to t he manually selected network is los t, th e phone sounds an error tone and asks you to select a net w ork again. The se lected ne t work must have a roamin g agreement w ith your home network, that is, the operator wh ose SIM card is in your phone.
79 Cell info display ( network service)âÂÂTo set the phone to indicate when it is use d in a cellular network ba sed on microcellular networ k ( MCN) technology and to activate cell info r e ception, select On . Co nnection Select Menu > Settin gs > Phone sett. > Co nnection > Blu etooth , USB , A cce ss points , Packet data , Data cal l , SIP settings , C on fi g ur a t io ns , or APN control . Blu etoot h Switch B luetooth on or off, a nd edit Bluetooth settings. See âÂÂBluetooth conn ecti on,â p. 84. USB Edit USB settings. See â USB data cable,â p. 94. Acce ss points To establish a da ta connection, an access point is re quire d. You can de fine different k inds of access points: ⢠MMS access point to send and receive multimedia messages ⢠WAP access point to view web pages ⢠Int ernet access point (IAP ) (fo r examp le, t o send and re ceive e-mail ) Check which kind of access point you need w ith your service provider for the service you wis h to access. For availability a n d subscription to data connection services, contact you r s ervice provider. You may re ce ive access poin t settings in a message fr om you r ser vice provider, or you may have pr e set access point se ttings in your phone. To create a new access poin t or edit an existing a cce ss point, sele ct Opt io n s > New access point or Edit . To cre a te a new access point u sing t h e settings of a n exist ing access point , scroll to an access point, an d select Op ti o ns > D u plicate access point . Depending on the connection t ype selected in Data beare r , only certain se t tings are a vailable. Fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or w ith an aste ri sk. Contact your service p rovider for the followin g settings: Data bearer , A ccess point nam e (for packet data only), D ial-up number (for data call only), Us er nam e , Pa s s w o r d , Au then t i ca tio n , Homepage , Data call type (for data ca ll only) , and Maximum data speed (for data call only) . Conn ection name âÂÂEnte r a des criptive name for the connec t ion .
80 Prompt password âÂÂIf you must enter a new pa ssw ord every tim e you log onto a server, or if you do not w ant to save your pa ssword t o the phone, select Yes . If ne ce ssary, to defin e t h e internet pr ot ocol (IP) ver sion , phone IP addre ss, domain name syst e m (DNS) ser ver s, prox y server, and a dva nced data cal l settings, such a s callback, PPP compression , login script , and modem initialization string, sele ct Opt io ns > Adva n c ed se t tin g s . C ontact your serv ice pr o v ider f or th e corr ect setti n gs. Packe t data The packet da ta settings a ffe ct all access point s usin g a packet da ta connection. P acket data conn ection âÂÂIf you select When available a nd y ou are i n a net wor k that s u pports packet data , the phone registers to th e packet data network and sh ort mess ages are se nt usin g a p a cke t dat a conne ction. If y ou sel ect When need ed , the ph one use s a packet da ta connection on ly if you start an application or function t h at needs it . The packet data connection can be closed whe n it is n ot need ed by an y ap plic at ion . If there ar e no packet data s e rvices available and you have chose n When available , the phone periodically tries to establish a packet data conne ction. Acces s poin t âÂÂThe a cce ss point name is need ed whe n you want to use your ph one as a m odem wi th your compu t er. Data cal l The data call settings affect all access poin ts that use a GSM data call. Online tim e âÂÂto se t th e da ta cal l to dis co nn ec t au tom at i cal ly af ter a ti me -o u t if the re is no a ct i vi ty. To en ter a ti m e -ou t, se le ct Us er defined , an d en te r th e ti me i n m inu t es . If yo u s e lec t U nlimited , th e data c a l l is n ot d is c on ne cte d au tom at i ca lly . SI P s ett ings View and edit ses sion initiation protocol (SIP) prof iles. Conf igur ati ons Certain functions, such a s we b browsing a nd mu ltimedia messaging, m ay require configuration settings. You may receive t he settings from your se rv ice provider. See âÂÂConfiguration s et tings,â p. 13. To delete a configuration, scroll to the con figuration, and select Op ti on s > De le te .
81 Acce ss point n ame cont rol With the access poin t name control service , you can rest rict the use of packet data access point s. This settin g is only available if your USIM card supports the ser vice . To change t h e settings, you n eed the PIN2 code. Appl ic ations To view and edit settings of applications installed to you r phone, select Menu > Se ttin gs > Ph one sett. > Applications . â Speech In Speech , you c an sel ect the d efault lang uage and vo ice use d for reading messages and adjust the voice prope rt ies, such a s rat e and volume. Select Menu > Se ttin gs > Spe ech . To automatically det e ct the language of a message and read t h e message using that language, select Language detection > On . Whe n re adi n g a me ss age , if the re is no voice available for the language or if Language detection is se t to Off , the de fa ult l an g ua g e is u se d . To view details of a voice, sc roll r ight, scroll to the voice , and select Opti o ns > V oice details . To test a voice, sc roll to the voice, and select Opti o ns > Play voice . â Settings w izard Se tt. wi za rd configure s your device for operator ( MMS, GPRS, a nd interne t) and e-mail settings ba sed on your service provider. Configuring other settings may also be possible . To us e t hese se rvices , you may ha ve to conta ct you r ser vice provi der to a cti vate a data con n ection or other se rvices. Select Menu > Settin gs > Sett. w izard . â Instant messaging Instant m essagi n g (IM) a llows you to converse w ith oth e rs and join discussion forums (IM grou ps) w i th specific t opics (network se rvice). Check the availability of IM services, pricing, and ta riffs with your service provide r. Service pr ovide rs also provide instruction s on how to use the ir se rvices.
82 Co nnect to an I M serve r Select Menu > Settin gs > IM . 1. To log in , select Optio ns > Log in . 2. Enter your user ID and password. To log out, se lect Opti o ns > L og ou t . IM settings Select Menu > Settin gs > IM > Op ti ons > Se t tings . To edit the I M application settings, select IM s e tt i ng s . T o set who is allowed t o se e when you are online, select Sh ow my availability . To set who is allowed to send you messages or in vit ations, s ele ct Allow messages from or Allow invitations from . To ed it IM serv er conn ection s etti ngs, s elect Servers , scrol l to the server , and select Opt io ns > Edit . Con tact your se rvice provider for t he settings. T o define new server settin gs, select Op t i ons > Ne w ser ver . To c hoos e the default ser ver, sel ect Defaul t serv e r and the ser ve r. To be au t omatically connected t o the IM se rver duri n g the days a nd times you define, select IM login type > Automat ic . To only be a utomatically connected while in your home network, select Aut o in home netw . . To be automatically connected when you start t he IM application, select On app. start-up . T o con nect manually, select Manual . To set da ys and time s wh en to e stabl ish a c onnecti on au tomat icall y, sel ect Automatic login days and A utomati c logi n hrs. . Join and leav e an IM group Select Menu > Settin gs > IM > IM groups . IM groups a re only available if supported by the service pr ovide r. To join an IM group, select it, a n d enter you r screen name. To join an IM group not on the list , but whose grou p ID you know , select Op tion s > Join n ew group , and enter t he group I D . To leave the I M grou p, select Optio ns > Leave IM group . Search for IM groups and u sers To sear ch for groups, select Me nu > Settin gs > IM > IM groups > Opti ons > Search . You can search IM groups by Group name , Topic , or Members (us er I D) . To
83 join or save a gr ou p that is found in the s earch, scroll to it, and select Opti ons > Join or Save . To sear ch for new contacts, se lect IM co n ta c t s > Opti o ns > New IM co n t act > Search from server . T o sta rt a c onversat ion wi th a new user , scrol l to th e us er, and select Op ti ons > O pen co n ver s ati on . To save the n e w contact, select Add to IM contacts . Chat in an IM group Select Menu > Settin gs > IM > IM groups . After you join an I M group, you can view t he messages that a re exchanged in t h e group, and se nd your own messages. To se n d a messa ge , writ e the m essage, and pr ess the scroll key or t he call ke y. To send a priva te message to a m e mber (if a llow ed in the group) , select Opti ons > Send private message , s e lect the recipie n t, write the messa ge , and press t he scroll key. To re ply to a pr ivat e mess age sen t t o yo u, scro ll to t he mes sage , a nd s el ect Opt io ns > Reply . To invite IM conta cts who are on line to join the IM group (if allowed in t he group), select Op ti ons > Se nd invitation , select the contacts you w a nt to invite, write t he invitation message, a n d select Se nd . Star t and view indiv idual conversa tions Select Menu > Settin gs > IM > Conversations . This shows a list of t he IM users w ith whom you have an ongoing conve r sation. next t o a user indicates that you h ave rece ive d a new m essage from t hat user. To vie w an ongoing conve rsat ion, se lect the user. T o se nd a mess a ge, write you r message, a nd pres s the scroll key. To re t urn to t he conv e rsations li st without closing the conv e rsation, select Ba ck . To st a rt a n e w convers a tion, se lect Opti on s > Ne w co nve r sa tio n > Select fr om contacts a n d from a list of your saved IM conta ct s that are cu rrently online; or select En te r us er ID to ente r th e u ser I D. To close th e conversation, s ele ct Op tion s > End conve rsation . To s ave a u ser to your I M cont a c ts, scro ll to the us er, and selec t Op t i ons > A dd to IM contac ts .
84 To block m essages from a use r, scroll to the use r, and selec t Opt io ns > Blocking options > Add to blocked list . IM contacts Select Menu > Settin gs > IM > IM c on t ac t s . Y ou can see a list of your sa ved IM cont a cts. indicates contacts tha t are currently online, indicates contacts that are bu sy , and indicates contacts that are of flin e. To create a new contact, s ele ct Op tion s > New IM c onta ct > Enter ma nually . Fill in th e Nick name an d Us er ID fields, an d select Done . To s tart o r co ntinue a conv ersatio n wit h a cont act, s crol l to the cont act, a nd sel ect Opt io ns > O pen con versat ion . Creat e a new IM gr oup Select Menu > Settin gs > IM > IM groups > Opt io ns > Cre at e n e w gr oup . Enter the set t ings for the group. R e s t r i c t a c c e s s t o a n I M g r o u p To create a closed IM group, create a group members list. Only the users on the li st are allowed to join the grou p. Select the IM grou ps vie w, scroll to th e grou p, and select Op ti ons > Gro up > Se ttings > Group members > Sele cted only . 15. Con n ectiv it y â PC Suite You can us e your phone with a varie ty of PC connectivity and dat a communication appli cations. With PC Suit e you can syn chronize contacts, calendar and to-do notes a nd notes between your ph one and a compatible PC. You may find more in formation about PC Suite a nd the download link in t he support are a on the Nokia we bsit e, www.nokia.com/pcsuite. â Bluetooth connection Bluetooth technology enables wire le ss conne ct ions between electronic devices wit hin a maximum range of 10 meter s (33 feet) . A Bluet ooth connec t ion can b e
85 us ed to sen d ima ges, vi deos, text, b usines s card s, cale ndar no tes, or to c onnect wirelessly to compatible devices using Bluetooth technology, such as com puters. This device is compliant wit h Bluetooth Specification 2.0 supporting the following pro files: Dial Up Networking, Serial Port, File T r ansfer, Handsfree, Headset, Basic Imaging, SIM Access, Generic Access, an d Advanced Au dio Distribution. To ensure in teroperability between othe r devices supporting Bluetooth techn ology, use Nokia approve d enhancements for this model. Check with the manuf acturers of other devices to determine their compatibilit y with this device. There may be restrictions on using Bluetooth technology in some locations. Check w ith your local a uthorities or se rvice pr ovider. Features using Bluetooth technology, or allowing such fea tures to run in the background while using other features, increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life. Bl uetooth c onnectio n setti ngs Select Menu > Settin gs > Connectivity > Bluetooth . When you activate Bluetooth technology for the first time, you are a sked to give a name to y our pho ne. Bluetooth âÂÂto switch Bluetooth on or off. My phone's visibility > Sho wn to all â to allow you r phone to be fou nd by other Bluetooth devices at a ll times. T o allow your phone t o be found for a defined time period, select D efine period . For se curity reason s it is advisa ble to use th e H idden setting whenever possible. My phone's name âÂÂto define a name for you r phone. Remote SI M mode > On âÂÂt o enable the usage of the SIM card of t he phone by another device ( for example, a car kit ) by Bluetooth tech n ology (SIM access profile) When the wireless device is in the rem ote SIM mode, you can only use a com patible connected en hanceme nt, such as a car kit, to make or receive calls . Your wireless device will not m ake any calls , except to t he em ergen cy number s prog r amm ed into your devi ce, whil e in this m ode. To make calls fro m your devic e, you m ust first leave th e remot e SIM mode . If the devic e has been locked, enter the lock code t o unloc k it fir s t. Send d a ta There can be only one active Bluetooth conn ection at a t ime. 1. Ope n an application where the item you wish to send is save d.
86 2. Scroll to the item you want to send, and select Opt ion s > Send > Via Bluetooth . 3. The phone starts t o se arch for de vices within range. Paire d devices are shown wit h . When searching for device s, som e devices may sh ow only the unique device addresses. T o find out the unique address of your phone, enter the code *#2820 # in the s t andby mode. If you have searched for device s e arlier, a list of the devices t hat were found previously is shown first. To start a n ew search, select More de vices . I f y ou switch off t he phone, t h e list of devices is cle a red, and th e device s e arch needs to be sta rt ed again before sending data. 4. Se lect the device w ith which you want t o conn ect. 5. Pair the devices ⢠If the other de vice requires pa irin g before data can be transmitted, a ton e sounds and you are asked to enter a pa sscode. ⢠Create your ow n passcode (1âÂÂ1 6 digits) and a gree with th e owner of t he other device to use the same code. You do not have to memorize the passcode. ⢠After pairing, t h e device is saved t o the P aire d devices view. 6. When the connec tion has b een suc cessfu lly est ablish ed, t he note Se n ding data is displayed. Data received u sin g Bluetooth connection can be found in Inbox in Messaging . Paire d dev ices v ie w Paired devices ar e indicated by in the se a rch result list . In the Bluetooth main view, scroll right t o open a list of paired d evices. Do no t accep t Bluet ooth co nnection s from s ources yo u do not trust . To pair w it h a device, sele ct Optio ns > New paired device . Select the dev ice with which to pair. E xcha nge passcode s. To cancel pa iring, scroll t o the device whose pairing you wa nt t o cancel, a nd press the clear key. If you want to cancel all pairings, select Opti o ns > De le te a ll . To set a de vice to be a uthorized, scroll to t he device, and se lect Opti o ns > Se t as authorised . Connections betw e en your phone a n d the authorized device ca n be made without your know ledge. No separate accepta nce or a u thorization is
87 need ed. Us e this stat us only for your o wn dev ices t o whic h other s do not have access, for exam ple, your PC or devices that belong to someone you t rust. is added next to a u thorized devices in th e P aired devices view. If you select Set as unauthorised , each connection request from t he device must be accepted separately. Re ce ive d ata Whe n you rec eive d ata u sing Bl uetoot h tech nolog y, a t one sound s, a nd you are asked if you want to accept the me ssage. If you accept, the it em is placed in Inbox in Messaging . Disc onnect Bl uetooth conne ctio n A Bluetooth connection is disconnected aut om atically after sending or receiving data. â Connection manager In the connection manager, you can ident ify the sta t us of multiple data connections, vie w details on the amount of da t a sent and rec eive d, a n d end unus ed connec tions . Select Menu > Settin gs > Connectivity > Co nn. mgr . . Not e: The actual invoice for calls and servi ces from your service provider may va ry, depending on n etwork features, round ing off for billing, taxes, and so forth. To view connection details, scroll to a con nection, and select Opt ions > D etails . To end a connection, scroll to the connection, and select Optio ns > Dis conne ct . T o end all connections, s e lect Opt ions > Disc onnect al l . â Push to talk Push to talk (PTT) (network service) is a real-time voice over IP service (network service) a va ilable over a GSM/GPRS network. PT T provides direct voice communication connected wit h a single keypress. Before you ca n u se the PT T service , you must def ine the PTT a ccess poin t and PTT setti n gs. In PTT com munication, one person t alks while th e others listen. Spe akers take turns res po nding to each oth er. O nly one group m e mber can talk at a time. The len gth of ti me of ea ch turn i s lim ite d.
88 Phone calls always t ake priority over PTT ca lls. Besides the packet data counters, the ph one registers only one -to-one calls in the recent calls lists in Lo g . The pa rticipants should confirm the reception of any communications where appropriate as there is no oth er conf irm ation of w h ether the recip ients hav e hear d the ca ll. To check availability a n d costs, and to s u bscribe to the service, cont a ct your service provider. Note that r oaming services may be more limited than home netw ork se rvices. Many of the services available for tra di tional voice calls (for example, call mailbox) are not available for PTT communications. Define a PTT access point Many service providers re qu ire you to use an internet acces s poin t for your default access point . Other service providers allow you to use a WAP access poin t . Settings fo r PTT For PTT s ervice settings, contact you r service provider . To view and ch a nge PTT settings, s e lect Menu > Settings > Connectivity > PTT > Opt io ns > Settings > User settings or Co nnectio n sett ings . User se tti ngs Accepted list calls âÂÂTo see a not ifica tion of incomin g calls, select Not ify . To a ns w er PTT calls autom atically, sele ct Auto-accept . I f you do not want to receive PTT ca lls, select Not allow e d . PTT call alert tone âÂÂSelect the tone for in coming PTT calls. If you want the incoming call alert setting for PTT to follow your profile se ttings, select Set by profile . For example, if your profile is sile nt, PT T is set to do not disturb (DND) and, except for ca llback requests, you ar e not a va ilable to others us i ng PTT. Callback request tone âÂÂSe lect a tone for call back requ ests. Application start-up âÂÂTo start PTT automatically, select Alwa ys au tom a ti c . To s tart PTT automatica lly only w h ile in your home network, select Auto . in home ne tw . . Defaul t nicknam e âÂÂEnt er your n ickna me shown to othe r users. You r servi ce provider may h a ve disabled the editing of t h is option. Show my PTT addres s âÂÂSele ct Neve r if you w a nt to hide you r PTT addre ss from others.
89 Show my login status â Select whet her your s tatu s is sh own to ot hers. Connect ion sett ings Contact your PTT se rvice provide r for th e connection settings. Log in to PTT Select Menu > Settin gs > Connectivity > PTT . PTT aut o m atic a lly lo gs in to the service when started. When log in is su ccessful, PTT automatically conn e cts to channe l s that were active when the application was last close d. If the c o nnec tion is los t, the device automatically tries to log back in until you e xit PTT. indicates a PTT connection. indicates th a t PTT is se t to do not dis t urb (DND). Exit PTT Select Menu > Settin gs > Connectivity > PTT > Opti o ns > Exit . Log out from PTT after exiting application? is display e d. Select Ye s to log out and close the service. If you w a nt to keep t h e application active in the background, select No . Make a one-to-o ne call Warning: Do not hold the device nea r your ea r when the loud s peak er is in use, because t he v olume may b e extremely lo ud. 1. Sele ct Menu > Settin gs > C onn e cti vi ty > PT T > Op ti ons > Contacts , scroll to the contact you w a nt to talk to, a nd press th e call key. 2. When the c onnect ion h as b een est abl ished, to ta lk t o the o ther parti cipa nt, press and hold the call key while you talk. 3. To end t he PTT call, s elect Dis co nne ct , or if there are s everal PTT calls, select Op t i ons > Disco nne ct . An swer a PT T cal l If Accepted list calls i s se t to Not ify in User s ettin gs , a sho rt tone noti fies y ou of an incoming call. To accept the call, select Accept . To sil enc e the ton e , sele c t Sil ence . To rejec t th e call , pres s the end key.
90 Make a P T T group call 1. To ca ll a group, select Opti o ns > Contacts , s e lec t Op ti o ns > Talk to man y , m ar k the contacts you want to ca ll, and select OK . Ca llba ck re que st s Se n d a ca llb a ck re qu e st If you make a one - to -one cal l and d o not get a res p ons e, you ca n send a reque st for th e person to ca ll you back. To sen d a c all back req ue st fr om Cont act s , scroll to a conta ct, and select Op ti on s > Send callback request . Respon d to a cal lback requ e st When someone sen ds you a callba ck request, 1 new callback request is displayed in the stan dby m ode. Select Sho w to open Callback inbox . Scr oll to a con tact , and press t h e call ke y. Cha nnels Whe n you are c onnecte d to a chan nel, all members j oine d to th e channe l hear yo u t a l k i n g . U p to f i v e c h a n n el s c a n b e a c t i v e a t t h e s a m e t i m e . W h e n m o r e t h a n o n e channel is active, select Swap to change the c han nel yo u want t o tal k to . Cha nnels a re r egister ed wi th a U RL ad dress . One us er re giste rs the channe l URL i n the network by joining t he channel the first time. Cr eate y our o w n cha nnel 1. Sele ct Op ti ons > PTT chan nels . 2. Sele ct Op ti ons > N ew channel > Cr ea te new . 3. Ent er a Channel name . 4. Sele ct a Channel privacy level. 5. Ente r your own nick name i n Nickname . 6. If you w a nt to add a th u mbnail image to the group, select T humbnail and an image. 7. Sele ct Done . When you ha ve created a channel, you are a ske d if you want to send channel i n vitations. Channel invitations a re text me ssages.
91 Join a prec onfigured ch annel A preconfi gu red channel is a t a lk group t h at is set up by your service provider. Only preconfigured users a re allowed to join and u s e the channel. 1. Sele ct Op ti ons > PTT chan nels . 2. Sele ct Op ti ons > N ew channel > Add existing . 3. Ente r the C ha nnel name , Channel address , and Nickname . You can also add a Thumbnail . 4. Sele ct Done . Respon d to a c h annel i nvitatio n To save a received channel invitation, select Opti ons > Save ch annel . The chan nel is a dde d to y our PT T cont acts, channe ls vi ew. PTT se ssio ns PTT sessions are displayed as call bubbles in the PTT display, giving inform ation about the st atu s of t he PTT se ssion s: Wai t âÂÂshown when you pres s and h old the ca ll key and somebody else is st ill speaking i n the PTT s ession Ta l k âÂÂsh own when you pre ss and hold the call key and get the perm ission to spe a k To switch t he loudspeaker on or off, select Op tio ns > A ct ivate loudspeaker or Deactivate loudspeaker . To discon ne ct the s e lected PTT se ssion, select Opt ions > Disco n nec t . â Remote synchronization Sync enables you t o synchronize your calendar, contacts, or n otes with various calendar an d address book applicatio ns on a compa tible compu ter or on the internet. The synchronizat ion application uses SyncML technology for synchronizat ion. Select Menu > Settin gs > Connectivity > Sync . Create a new synchronization pr ofile 1. If no profiles h a ve been defined, t he phone asks you if you want to cre a te a new profile. Select Ye s .
92 To create a new pr ofile in addition to e xisting on es, s e lect Op tio ns > Ne w sync profile . Choose whet h er you wan t to use t h e default set t ing values or copy the values from an e xisting profile to be used as the basis f or the new profile. 2. Defi ne the Applicat ion s to be synch ron ized. Select an application, and edit the synchronization settings: In cl ude in s y nc âÂÂto enable or disable the synch ron ization Remote database âÂÂthe name of the used remo te databa se Synchronisation type âÂÂSel ect Bot h wa y s for synchronization of t he data on your phone and the r em ote database, To phone on ly for the synchr onizat ion of the data on your phon e only, or To se r v e r on ly fo r t he s ync h r oni zat i on o f th e data on the rem ot e database only. 3. Defi ne the Conne cti on s e tti ngs : Server version , Server ID , Data bearer , H ost address , Po r t , User nam e , and Pas s w o r d âÂÂContact your service provid e r or system administ rator for the correct settings. Access point âÂÂOnly visible if In ternet is selected as D ata be are r . Se lect an acc ess po i nt you want to use for the data conn ectio n. Allow sync requests > Ye s âÂÂt o allow that the server starts the synchronization Accept all sync requests > No âÂÂto require a confir m ation before th e serve r sta r ts th e sy n chr on i za ti on Ne twork authent ica tion âÂÂOnly visible if Interne t is selected as Data bearer . To use HTTPS authentication, select Ye s , and enter user name and password in Netw ork user name an d Network password . Sync hronize data In the main view, scroll to a pr of ile, and select Op ti ons > Synchronise . The stat us of th e syn chronization is sh own. After synchronization is complete, select Opt ions > View log t o open a log file showing the synch r onization status ( Com pl et e or Incompl ete ) and how man y calendar or cont a ct entries have bee n added, updated, de le ted, or discarded (not synchronized) in t he phone or on t h e server.
93 â Inf rared Use infrare d t o conne ct two devices a nd transfer data be tween them. With infrared, you can transfe r dat a su ch as busines s cards, calendar notes, a n d media files with a compatible device. Do not point the infrar ed (IR) bea m at anyon e's eye or all ow it t o i n terfer e with oth er IR devices. This device is a Class 1 laser product. Send and receive da ta 1. Ensure that the infra re d ports of t he devices face each other. The positioning of the devices is more im portant t han angle or distance. 2. To turn on infrared on your device, select Menu > Se ttings > Con nec t iv ity > Inf rared . T u rn on in frared on the other device. Wait a few seconds until a n infrared connection is established. 3. To send, loca te t he desired f ile in an a pplication or the file ma nager, and select Op t i ons > Se nd > Via infrar e d . If da t a transfer is n ot st arted soon after th e activati on of the infr a red port , the connection is ca ncelled and must be st arted agai n . All items received through infrared are placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging . â Modem Before you ca n use your phone a s a modem: ⢠Acqui re the appropr iate dat a commun icatio ns softw a re fo r your c omputer. ⢠Subscribe t o t he appropriate n etwork se rvices from your service provider or internet se rvice provider. ⢠Install the appropriat e drivers on you r computer. Select Menu > Settin gs > Connectivity > Modem . To connect the phone to a compatible computer using infr a red, press the scroll ke y. Make su re the infr a red port s of the phone and computer a re directly faci ng each other wi th no obstac les bet w een them . To connect your phon e to a comput e r using Bluetooth wireless t ech nology, initiate the connection fr o m the computer. To activa t e Bluetooth in your phone, select Menu > Connectivity > Bluetooth > Bluetooth > On .
94 If you u se a cable t o connect your phone t o a computer, initiate t he connection fr om the co mput er. No te that you m ay no t be a ble to use s ome of th e other commu nicati on f eatur es when th e phone is use d as a mode m. â USB data cable You can us e the USB data cable to tr ansfer dat a between the phone a nd a compatible PC. You can also us e the USB data cable with Nokia PC Suite. Select Me nu > Settings > Conn ectivity > USB . To s elec t th e def a u lt USB connection mode, select USB m ode and the desired m ode . To have t h e device ask the purpose of the connection each time t he cable is con nected, select Ask o n connection > Ye s . To use t he pho ne wit h Nok ia PC S u ite, se lect PC Suit e . To synchronize media files, such as music, w it h a compatible ve rsion of Windows Me dia Player, select Me dia player . To access files on t h e inserted memory card as a r e movable drive, select Dat a tr an s fer . Aft e r tra ns fe r rin g d at a, en sur e th at it i s saf e to u npl u g th e US B da ta ca bl e fr o m the P C . â Dat a trans fer With data tran sfer you can copy or sy nchron ize cont acts, ca l enda r entr ies, and possibly other data, such a s video clips a nd images , from a compatible phone using a Bluetooth or in frared connection. When both Bluetooth and inf r ared are available on both devices, it is pref e rable to use Bluetooth. Depending on the ot h er phone, synchronization may not be possible and da ta can be copied only once . To transfe r or synchronize data, do the follow ing: 1. Whe n using infrare d, place the devices so that the infrared ports face each other, and a ct ivate infrared on bot h devices. Select Menu > Settings > C onn e cti vi ty > Tr ansfe r . If you have not use d Transfer be fore, information about the application is displayed. Select Cont inue to sta rt tra nsf errin g dat a. If y ou have used Transfe r , se lect Tr ansfer data . 2. Select whet her to use Bluetooth or in frared fo r transferring t he data. Whe n using Bluetooth, the phones ne e d to be paired in or der to transfer data.
95 Depending on the type of t he other phone, an application may be sent and installed on the other phon e to enable the data t ransfer. Follow the instructions. 3. Select what content you want t o be transf e rred t o you r phone. 4. Content is transferred to your phone. The transfer time depends on the amount of data. Y ou can stop t he transfer and continue later. 16. Data manag er â Application manager You can install two t ypes of applications and software t o you r phone: J2M E TM applications based on Java TM tec hnology with the e xtens ion .jad or .jar. Per sonalJ ava TM applications cannot be installed on your phon e. Other a pplications a nd soft w are sui t able for the Symbia n operating system . The installation files have the .sis extension. Only install softw are specifically designed for y o ur phone. Installation file s may be tra n sferre d t o your phone f rom a compatible computer, downloaded during brows in g, or sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment or by using Bluetooth. You can use N okia Application Installer in Nokia PC Suite to install a n application to your phone or a memor y card. To open App. manager , sel e c t Menu > Settings > Da ta m gr . > App. mgr . . Install an application Import ant: O n ly install and use applica tions and other softwa re from trusted sources, such as applicat ions that are Symbian Signed or have passed the Java Ve rif ie d TM testing. Before installation , in App. manager , sc roll to the installation file, and select Opt io ns > V ie w de tails to view inf or mation such as the application type, version number, and the su pplier or manufa ct urer of the applica t ion. The .jar file is required for installing Java applications. If it is missing, the phone may ask you t o download it. To install an application or software package:
96 1. Scroll to an in stallation file. A pplications on the memory card are indicated wit h . 2. Sele ct Op ti ons > Ins t a l l . Alternatively, search the phone memory or t he memory ca rd, select t he application, a nd pre ss the scroll key to start t he in stallation. During the installation, th e phone shows information about the pr og ress of the installation. If you are installing an application without a digital signature or certification, the phone displays a warning. Continue installation only if you are sure of the origins and con t ents of t h e application. To view extra information about the application, scroll to it, and select Op tion s > Go to web address . This option may not be available with all applications. To see w h at software pa cka ges have be en installed or rem oved and w h en, select Opt io ns > View log . Rem ove an application In th e App. manager main view, scroll to the sof tware package, and select Opt io ns > Remove . Appl ication mana ge r sett ings In App. manage r , se le c t Opt ions > Set tings and from the following setti n gs: Software installation âÂÂto select if y o u want to allow installation of all Symbia n applications ( All ) or on ly signed applications ( Signed only ) Online certificate check âÂÂt o select if you want App. manager to check the on line certificates for an application before installing it Default web address âÂÂdefault address used when checking online ce rtificates Java applications may attem pt to, for ex a mple, establish a da t a connection or send a messa g e. To edit the perm issions of an installed Java application and define which access point the application will use, in the main view, scroll to t he application, and select Op tio ns > Open . â File manager In the f ile manager, you can browse, ope n, and manage files and f olde rs in the phone memory or on the me mory card.
97 To see a list of the folder s in the phone memory, select Menu > Settin gs > Data mgr . > File mgr . . Scr oll right to se e the folde r s on the m e mory card. Vie w memory c onsumpt ion Scroll eith e r right or le ft to view the phone memory or the memory card contents . To check memory consum ption of th e curren t memory, select Opti ons > Memory details . The phone c a lculates the appr ox imate amount of fre e memory f or storing data and installing new applications. In th e memory views, you ca n view th e memory consumption of the different applications or file types. If t h e phone memory is getting low, remove some files, or mov e th em to t he me mo r y ca rd. â Device manager You may receive serv e r profiles and configuration settings f r om your service provider or company information m anagement d epartment. To open t h e dev ice manager, select Men u > Se t tings > Dat a m gr. > D evice mgr . . If you have n o se rver pr ofile s defined, t h e phone asks wh e ther you w a nt to defi n e one. To connect to a s erver and receive configuration settings for your phon e , scroll to the serve r profile, and selec t Opt io ns > St art configuration . To edit a server profile, select Op tio ns > E dit profile and from t he following setti n gs: Allow configuration âÂÂTo receive configuration settings from t he server, select Yes . Auto-accept all requests âÂÂIf you want t he phone to as k for confirmation before accepting a configuration from t he server, select No . Contact your se rvice provider, or company inform a tion management departme n t for th e other ser ve r profile settings. â Me m ory c ard Keep all memory cards out of t he reach of small children. Select Menu > Settin gs > Dat a mg r . > Me mory . For details on in serting a m emory card into the phone, see â Get started , â p. 10 . You can use it t o s tore your multimedia files such as vide o clips, music tracks, and sound file s, photos, and me ssaging data, and to back up infor ma tion from phone memo ry.
98 Form at the m em ory c ard When a me m ory card is formatted, a ll data on the ca rd is permanently lost. Some memory cards a re supplied pre form atted an d ot hers re quire formatt ing. 1. Sele ct Op ti ons > Form at memory card . 2. Sele ct Ye s to co nf irm . 3. When form a tting is complete , en ter a na m e for the memory card. Back up a nd restore information To back up information from phone memory to the memory card, select Opti ons > Back up phone memory . To re st ore inf ormation from the memory card to the phone me mory, select Opt io ns > Restore f rom card . You can only ba ck up the phon e memory and re st ore it t o t he same ph one. Loc k t he me mo r y car d To set a pa ssword to help preve n t unauthorized use, select Optio ns > Set password . Y ou are asked to e n ter and confirm your pa ssword. The password c a n be up to eight c har act ers lo ng . Unl ock a me mor y car d If you i nsert anot he r pas sword-protected memory card into your ph one, you are prompted to e n ter the pa ssword of the card. To unlock t he card, select Op ti o ns > Unlock memory card . Ch eck me mory con sumpti on To check t h e memory consumption and the amount of me m ory available on you r memo ry c ard, se lect Optio ns > Mem ory details . â Activa tion keys Digita l righ ts man agem ent Content owners may use different type s of digital rights managemen t (DRM) technologies to protect their intellectual prope rty, including copyrights. This device uses various types of DRM so ftware to acc ess DRM- pro tected c ontent. With this de vice you can acce ss cont ent pr otecte d wit h WMDRM 10, O MA DR M 2.0 and OM A DRM 1 .0. If ce rtain D RM s oftware fai ls to protect the con tent, conten t owners ma y ask that such DRM softw are's ability to a ccess
99 new DRM-protected content be revoked. Revocation may also prevent renew al of such DRM-pro tected c ontent alr eady in you r device. Revocation of suc h DRM softwa re doe s not affect the use of content prote cted with other types of DRM or th e use of non-DRM- protected content. Digital rights man agement (DRM) pr otected cont ent comes with an associated activatio n key that define s your rights to u se the conten t. If your device has OMA DRM protected con tent , to back u p both the activ ation ke ys and th e content, use the backup feature of Nokia PC Suite. Other transf er methods may not transfer the activation k eys which ne ed to be restored with the content for you to be able to continue th e use of OMA DRM protected content af ter the device memor y is formatted. You may also need to res tore the activa tion keys in case the files on your device ge t corrupted. If your device h as WMDRM protected con tent, both the activa tion keys an d the content will be lost if the device mem ory is form atted. You may a lso lose the activation k eys and the content in cas e the files on your devic e get corrupted. Losing the activ ation keys or the content may limit your ability to u se the same content on your de vice aga in. For more information, conta ct your service prov ider. Some activation k eys may be connected to a specific SIM card, and the protected conten t can be accesse d only if the SIM car d is inserted in the device . Select Menu > Settin gs > Dat a mgr . > Actv . keys to vi ew the dig i tal ri gh ts activation key s saved in your phone. To view valid keys ( ) that are con n ected to one or m ore media file s, select Valid keys . Grou p ke ys, which con t ain several ke ys, are indicate d w ith . T o vie w the keys contain e d in the grou p ke y, se l ect the grou p key. To view i nvalid keys ( ) with which the t ime period for usin g the file is exce eded, select In valid keys . To buy more usage time or ex tend the usage period for a media file, select an invalid ke y and Op ti o ns > Get n ew key . It ma y not be possible t o update activat ion keys if web service m essage reception is disa ble d. See â Se rvice message sett in gs,â p. 39. To view activat ion ke ys that are not in use, sele ct Not in u se . U nused a cti vation keys have no m edia files c onn ected to the m . To view de tailed inform ation such a s the valid ity status a nd the abil ity to se nd the file, scroll to a n activation key, and select it .
100 17. Batte ry inf ormatio n â Charging and dis c harging Your device is powered by a rechargeable battery. The battery can be charged and discharged hund reds of times, but it will eve ntually wear out. When the talk and standby times are noticea bly shorter than norma l, replace the battery. Use on ly Nokia approved batteries, and recharge your batter y only with Nokia approved chargers designated for th is device. If a replacement ba ttery is being used for the first time or if the battery has not be en used for a prolonged period, it may be necessary to conne ct the charger, then disconnect and reconnect it to begin chargin g the battery. Unplug the c harger from the electr ical plug and the device when not in use. Do not leave a fully charged battery con nected to a charger, since over charging may shorten its lifetim e. If left unused, a ful ly charged battery will lose its charge over time. If the battery is completely dis charged, it may ta ke severa l minutes be fore the char ging indicator appears on the display or before a ny calls can be made. Use the battery only for its inte nded purpose. Never use any cha rger or battery that is damaged. Do not short-circ uit the batter y. Accidental short- circuiting ca n occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct conn ection of the positive ( ) and negative (â ) terminals of the batte ry. (These look l ike metal strips o n the ba ttery.) This might happen, for example, whe n you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short- circuit ing the te rminals m ay dama ge the bat tery or the connect ing object. Leaving the battery in hot or cold places , such as in a closed car in summer or winter condition s, will reduce the capa city a nd lifetime of the battery. Alwa ys try to ke ep the battery betw een 15ðC and 25ðC (59 ðF and 77ðF). A dev ice with a hot or cold battery may not work temporarily, even wh en the battery is full y charged. Battery performance is par ticularly limited in tem peratures well below fre ezing. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire as they may explode. Batteries may als o explode if damaged. Dispose of batteries according to loca l regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as household waste. Do not dismantle or shred cells or batteries. In th e event of a battery leak, do not a llow the liquid to come in con tact with the skin or eyes. In the event of such a leak , flush your skin or eyes i mmediate ly with water, o r seek med ic al he lp.
101 â Nokia batter y authenticati on guidelines Always u se original No kia batte ries for your safe ty. To che ck that you are ge tting an original Nokia battery, purchase it from an authorized Nokia dealer, look for the Nokia Original Enhancements logo on the pa ckaging, and inspect the hologram label usin g the following step s: Successfu l completion of the four s teps is not a total ass urance of the auth enticity of the battery. If you have any reas on to believe that you r battery is not an a uthentic, original Nokia battery, you should refrain from using it, and ta ke it to the nearest authorized Nokia service point or dealer for a ssistance. Your author ized Nokia service point or dea ler will inspect th e battery for authen ticity. I f authenticity can not be verified, retu rn the battery to the place of purchase. Auth enti cate ho logra m 1. When looking at the hologram on the label, you should see the Nokia connecting hands symbol f rom one angle and the Nokia Original Enhanceme nts logo when looking from another angle. 2. When you angle the hologram left, right, down, and up, you should see 1, 2, 3, and 4 dots on each side respectively. 3. Scratch the side of the label to reveal a 20- digit code, for examp le, 12345 678919 876543 210. Tur n the batter y so that th e numb ers are faci ng upwar ds. The 20- digit c ode reads starti ng from the number at th e top row followed by the bott om row. 4. Confirm that the 20- digit code is valid by followin g the instruc tions at www.nokia .com/ba tterycheck. To cr eate a t ext message , enter the 20-digi t code, for example , 1234 567891 987654 3210, and se nd to 44 7 786 200 276. National and interna tional operator charges will apply. You shou ld rece ive a me ssag e indica ting whe ther th e cod e can be authentica ted.
102 What if your b a tter y is not a uthentic ? If you c annot confir m that you r No kia battery with the ho logram on the label is an a uthentic Nokia battery , please do not use th e battery. Take it to the nearest authorize d Nokia service point or dealer for assistance. The use of a battery that is not approved by the manufacturer may be dangerous and may result in poor performance and damage to your devic e and its enhance ments . It may a lso invalida te an y approval or warran ty ap plying to the device. To find out more abo ut original Nokia ba tteries, vis it www.nokia.com /battery. 18 . Enhan ceme nts Pra ctical rule s about a cces sories and enh ancemen ts ⢠K e ep all accessories a nd enhancements out of the reach of small chi ldren. ⢠When you disconnect the power cord of any accessory or enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, n ot the cord. ⢠Che c k regularly that enhance ments installed in a vehicle are mounted and are operating properly. ⢠In s tallation of a ny complex car enhancements must be m a de by qualified personnel on ly. Car e and ma in te nan ce Your device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The following suggestions will help you protect your warr anty cover age. ⢠K e ep the devic e dry. Precipitation , humidity, and all types of liquids or moisture can conta in minerals th at will c orrode electron ic circuits. I f your de vice does get w et, remove the battery , and allow the device to dry comp letely before replacing it. ⢠Do not use or st or e the device in dus ty, dirty areas. Its moving parts and electronic components can be dam aged. ⢠Do not store th e device i n hot areas . High temper atures ca n s horten the life of electron ic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastic s. ⢠Do not store the de v ice in cold a r eas. When t he device returns to its n ormal temperature, moisture can form in side the device and damage electr onic circuit boards. ⢠Do not attem pt to open the de vice other than as instructed in this guide . ⢠Do n ot dr op, kn ock, or shake th e d evice. Rough h andlin g can br eak inte rna l circuit boar ds an d fin e me chan ics. ⢠Do no t use h a rs h chemi c als , clea ning sol vents, o r stro ng deter gents t o clea n the dev ice.
103 ⢠Do not paint th e device. Paint can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operation. ⢠Use a soft, cle an, d ry cloth to clea n any len ses, su ch as c amera, pr oximity s enso r, and lig ht sens or lens es. ⢠Use on ly the supplied or an approved replacem ent antenna. Unauthorize d antennas, modifications, or attac hments could damage th e device and may violate regulations governing radio devices. ⢠Use chargers indoors. ⢠A lways c reate a backu p of da ta you w ant to ke ep, such as cont acts and calendar notes. ⢠To reset the device from time to time for optimum performan ce, power off the device and remove th e battery . These su ggestio ns apply eq ually to you r device, battery, charger, or a ny enhanc ement . If any device is not w orking properly, take it to th e nearest auth orized serv ice facility for service. D isposa l The crossed-out wheeled-bin symbol on your produc t, literature, or packaging reminds you that in the Eu ropean Union all electrical and electr onic products, batteries, and accum ulators must be tak en to separate collec tion at the end of their working life. Do not dispose of these products as unsor ted municipal waste. Return the products to c ollection to prevent possible harm to th e environme nt or human health from uncontr olled waste disposal and to promote the sustainable reuse of material res ources. Collection information is available from the product retailer, local waste au thorities, national producer responsibility organizations, or your loca l Nokia repre sentative. For more inf ormation , see produ ct Ec o-Declara tion or country-spe cific in formation at www.no kia.com. Add itio nal sa fety infor mation â Sm a ll ch ildren You r device a nd its en hancemen ts may c ontain s mall p a rt s . K eep them o ut of the r each o f small children. â O perat ing en viro nment This device m eets RF exposu re guideli nes when u sed either in the normal us e position against th e ear or wh en positioned at least 2. 2 centimeter s (7/8 inches) a way from th e body. When a carry ca s e, belt clip, or holder is used f or body-worn operation, it sh o uld not contain metal and should position the device the above-stated dist ance from your body.To transmit data files or messages, this device requir es a quality connection to the net work. In some cases, transmission of dat a files or messages may be delayed until such a connection is available. Ensur e the above separa tion distance instruction s are followed until the tran sm ission is com ple te d.
104 Parts of the device ar e magnetic. M etallic materials may be attracted to th e device. Do not place credit cards or other magnetic storage media near the device, because information sto r ed on them may b e erased. â Medic al de vice s Operation of any radio transmitti ng equipment, including w ireless phones, may interfere with the functionality of inadequ ately protected medica l devices. Consult a physician or the manufact urer of the medical de vice to determ ine if they are adequ ately shielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off your device in health care facilities when any r egulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilit ies may be using equ ipment that could be sensitive to exter nal RF energy. Impl anted med ical de vices Manufacturers of medica l devices recommend that a minimum separation of 15.3 centime ters (6 inches) should be m aintained between a wireless device and a n implanted medica l device, suc h as a pacemake r or implanted cardiover ter defibrillato r, to avoid potential interference with the medical device. Persons who have such devices should: ⢠Alway s keep the wirel ess device mor e than 15 .3 centi m eter s (6 i nches ) from the medica l device w hen th e wireles s device is tu rned on. ⢠Not ca rry th e wireles s device in a b reast pocke t. ⢠Hol d the wirele ss device to th e ear opposite th e me dical device to m inimize th e potential fo r in t erf er e nc e. ⢠Turn the wireles s device off immed iately if there is an y rea s on to suspec t that interfere nce is taking plac e. ⢠Read and follow the directions from the manufac turer of their implanted medical device. If you have any questions about us ing your wireless device with an impla nted medical de vi ce , co ns ult y our he a lt h c are p r ov id er . Hear i ng ai ds Some digital wireless devices may in terfere with some hearing aids. If interference occurs, cons ult y our se rvice pr ovide r. â Vehicles RF signals may af fect improperly in stalled or inadequate ly shielded electr onic systems in motor vehicl es such a s el ectronic f uel inj ection s ystems, electron ic antis kid (anti lock) brak ing syst ems, ele ctron ic s peed con tro l syst ems, and air bag s yste m s. For m or e informa tion, check w ith the m anufac turer, or its representa tive, of yo ur vehi cle or any equipment that has bee n added. Only qualified personn el should service th e device or install the dev ice in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty that may apply to
105 the devic e. Check reg ularly tha t all wireles s device e quipment in your veh icle is mo unted and operating pr operly. Do not store or carry flamm able liquids, gases, or e xplosive ma terials in the sa me comp artment a s the device , its pa rts, or enhance ments . For vehi cles eq uipped with an air bag, remembe r that air bags inflate with great force. Do not plac e objects, inclu ding ins talled or portable w ireless equipm ent in t he area over the air ba g or in t he air bag deployment are a. If in-vehicle wire less equipment is improperly installed a nd the air bag inflates, serious injury cou ld result. Using your device w hile flying in air craft is prohibited. Switch off you r dev ice before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be dang erous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the wireless telephone network, and ma y be illegal. â Pot entially e xplosive e nvir onm ent s Switch off your de vice w hen in any area w ith a pote ntially explosi ve atm osphere , and obey all signs and instruction s. Potentially ex plosive atmos pheres include are as where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Switch off the device at refueling points such as near gas pumps at service stations. Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots , storage, and dis tribution a reas; chemica l plants; or w here bla sting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosph ere are often, but not always , clearly marked. Th ey includ e below dec k on boat s , ch em ica l transfer or storage facilities, veh icles using liquefied petrole um gas (such as propane o r butane), and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust, or metal powders. â Em e rgenc y call s Import ant: W ir eless phones, including this device, operate using radio signals, wireless networks, landline network s, and u ser-programmed function s. Because of this, conn ections in all con ditions cann ot be guaranteed. Y ou should never rely sole ly on any wireless device for essen tial communica tions like medica l emergenc ies. To ma ke an emergen cy call : 1. If the device is not on, switch it on. Check for adequate signal strength. Some network s may require that a valid SIM card is properly inserted in the device. 2. Pre s s the end key a s many tim es as ne eded to c lear the display a nd r eady the dev ice for calls. 3. Ent er th e offic ial emer gency nu mber for your p resent l ocation. Emerge ncy num bers va ry by location. 4. P ress th e call key. If c ert a in fe atu re s are in us e, y ou m ay f i rst ne e d to tur n tho s e f eat ure s o f f be fo re yo u can make an e mergency c all. If th e device is in the offline prof ile mode, you may n eed to change
106 the profile to activate the phone fun ction before you can make an emergency call. Con s ult this guide or your service provider for more inform ation. When ma king an emergency ca ll, giv e all the nece ssa ry inform ation as accu rately as possible. Your wireless device may be the only means of communication at the scene of an accident. Do not end the call until give n permission to do so. â Cert ification inf orm ati on (SAR) THIS M OBILE DEVI CE MEETS GUIDELI NE S FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES. Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio wave s recommended by in ternationa l guidelines. These guideline s were developed by the independe nt scientific organization ICNIRP and include safety margins designed to assure the protection of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure guidelines for mob ile devices employ a unit of meas urement known as the Specific Absorption Rate or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the ICNIRP guidelines is 2.0 watts/ kilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of tissue. T es ts for SAR are conducted using standard operating pos itions w ith the devi ce transmitt ing at its highest certified pow er level in all tested frequen cy bands . The actu al SAR level of a n operating device can be bel ow the maxim um value b ecause t he devi c e i s desig ned to us e onl y the p ower req uired to reach the network. That amount changes depending on a number of factors such as how close you are to a network b a se st ation. Th e highes t S A R val ue under t he ICNIRP gu idelines f or use of the device at th e ear is 1.2 4 W/kg. Use of device a ccessories and enha ncement s may r esult in di fferen t SAR values . SAR valu es may vary depending on national reportin g and testing requirements and the networ k band. Additional SAR information may be provided under product information at www.nokia.com.
107 Inde x A access codes barring password 9 chang e 74 lock code 8 , 13 module PIN 9 PIN 8 , 13 PIN2 8 PUK 9 PUK2 9 signing P IN 9 UPIN 8 UPUK 9 access points 79 activation keys 98 act ive s tan db y 16 alarm clock. See clock. application ma nager 95 applications 95 B battery charg ing 12 Bluetooth conne ction set tings 85 disconnecting 87 paired devices 86 receiving data 87 sending da ta 85 bookmarks 61 browser. See web. C cache 64 calcula tor 68 calendar 67 call re gi ster. See log. callb ack requests 88 , 90 calls an swer in g 23 barring 78 confer ence call 23 diverting 78 endin g 22 interna tional 21 makin g 21 options during a ca ll 24 reje cting 23 reje cting with SM S 24 speed dial 22 , 42 swapping 24 voi ce dia l 22 voice mailbox 22 wa iting 24 camer a 53 ca me r a mo d e 15 certifica tes 75 cloc k 66 conne ction mana ger 87 connec tivity 84 conta cts 40 conver ter 68 copyright protection. See activation keys. D data cable 94 data connection indicator s 17 data transfer 94 device ma nager 97 digital r ights management. See activ ation keys . downloading 64 E editing v ideos 44 e-mail ma ilbox 34 se ttings 33 e-mail m essages deleting 35 retr ievi ng 34 en ha nc em e nt s 74 F file m anager 96 Fl ash P layer 58 functional modes 15
108 G gallery 42 transferring videos 45 GPS data 70 H he lp 20 I IM. See i nst ant me ss agin g . indicators 17 infrared 93 in stant mes sagi ng conne ctin g 82 conta cts 84 convers ation 83 groups 82 , 83 , 84 settings 82 K keygu ard. See key pad lock. keypad lock 20 L landmarks 71 listening to m usic 46 log 28 M media player. See RealPlayer. me mory car d 97 me mory con sumpt ion phone memory 97 me nu 19 message settin gs cell broadcast 39 e-mail 38 multimedia s ettings 37 other sett ings 40 ser vice mess ag es 39 text m essages 36 me s sa ges au dio 32 cell broadcast 36 lis tening to 40 multimedia objects 33 organizing 34 outbox 31 , 35 rece iving 33 sen di ng 31 ser vi ce c omm ands 36 ser vi ce me ss age s 34 SIM m essages 36 spe cial message types 33 writin g 31 mobile browser. See web. mobile s earch 60 modem 93 movies , muvees cu stom mu ve es 54 qu ic k muve es 54 music mode 16 musi c pla yer downloading music 48 mu sic sh op 48 playlist s 47 transf erring mus ic 48 musi c.See musi c pla yer. N networ k 78 notes 68 O one-t ouch dial. See speed d ial. P phone mode 15 phonebook. See contacts. profiles 59 PTT. See push to talk. push t o ta lk 87 â 91 R RealPlayer 57 re c or der 56 r ing in g to ne s add to contacts 41 se lecting 59 thre e-dime nsio nal 60 video ringing tones 42 S services. See web. settings con ne ct ion 79 data call 80
109 date 73 enhan cements 74 packet da ta 80 phone 72 phone language 73 predictive t ext inp ut 73 secu rit y 74 Setting w izard 81 speec h 81 time 73 writing language 73 SIM card using phon e with out a SIM card 17 son gs transf erring 48 speed d i al assigning a nu mber 41 , 72 calling 22 cha nging a num ber 72 dele ting a num ber 72 standby mode 16 sy nchro nizati on 91 T text input 73 copying text 30 deleting text 30 predictive 29 themes 58 to-do 68 tran sfer rin g m u sic 48 transferring v ideos 45 tutorial 19 U USB. See data cable. V video call 24 , 25 video call mode 16 video view mode 16 videos transf erring 45 Vis ual Rad io 50 voic e command s 71 voice dialing 22 voice mailbox 71 voic e recorder. Se e recorder. volum e 20 W web blogs 63 bookmarks 61 browser settings 65 browsing 62 con ne ct ing 61 con ne cti on se cu rit y 62 disconnecting 64 fee ds 63 saving a page 64 se ttings 61 viewing a saved page 64 writin g text. See t ext input.
DECL ARAT ION OF CONFORM ITY Hereby, NOKIA CORPORATION declares that this RM-230 product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. A copy of the Declaration of Conformity can be found at http://www.n ok ia.com/phones/declar a tion_of_conformity/ é 200 7 No kia. A ll ri ghts r es erved . Nokia, Nokia Connecting People, Nok ia Care, Navi, and Visual Radio are trademarks or r egis tered trademarks of Nokia Corporation. Nokia tune and Visual Radio are sound marks of Nokia Corporation. Other product and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks or tradenames of their respe ctive own ers . Reproduction, transfer, distribution, or storage of par t or all of the contents in this document in any form without the prior written permission of Nokia is prohibited. This product includes softwa r e licensed from Symbian Software Ltd é 1998-2007. Symbian and Symbian OS are trademarks of Symbian Ltd. US Patent N o 5 818437 and ot her pending patents. T9 text input software C opyright (C) 1997-2007 . Tegic Communications, Inc. All rights res erved. Java⢠and all Java-based marks are t rademarks or registered trademarks of Su n Microsystems, Inc. This product is licensed under the MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfolio License (i) for personal and noncommercial use in connection with information which has been encoded in compliance with the MPEG-4 Visual St andard by a cons u mer engaged in a person al and non commercial activity and (ii) for use in connection with MPEG-4 video provided by a licensed video provider. No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional information, including that rela ted to promotional, internal, and commercial u ses, may be obtained from MPEG L A , LLC. See <http://www.mpegla.c om> . Nokia operates a policy of ongoing development. Nokia reserves the righ t to make changes and improvements to any of the products described in this document without prior notice. TO THE M A XIMUM EXTEN T PE RMITTED B Y APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO CI R CUMSTANCE S SHALL NOKIA OR ANY OF ITS LICENSORS BE RESPO N SIBLE FOR ANY LOSS OF DATA OR IN C OME OR ANY SPECIAL, IN CI D ENT A L, C O N SEQ U E NT IA L O R I ND I RE CT D AMA G ES H OW S OEV E R CAU S ED . T H E C O NT E N T S O F TH I S DO C U M E N T A R E P R O V I D E D " A S IS " . E X C E P T A S R E Q U IR E D B Y A P P LI C A B L E L A W , NO WARRA N TIES OF ANY KIND, EITHE R EXPRESS OR IMPLIE D , INCLUDIN G , BUT NOT LI MI TED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE MADE IN RELATI O N TO THE A CCURACY, RELIAB ILITY OR CONTENTS OF THIS DOCU M ENT. NOKIA R E SERVES THE RIGHT TO R EVISE THIS D OCUMENT OR WITHDR AW IT AT A N Y TIME WITHO UT PRIOR NOTICE. The availability of particular products and applications for these products may vary by region. Please check with your Nokia dealer for details, and availability of language options. 0434
This device complies with Directive 20 0 2/95/EC on the restriction of the use of certain h azardous substances in elec trical and electron ic equipment. Export controls This dev ice may conta in comm odit ies, tech n ology or softwa re s ubject t o export laws and regulations from the US and other countries. Diversion contrary to law is prohibited. NO WARRAN TY The third-party applicat ion s provided with your device may have been created and may be owned by persons or entities not affiliated with or related to Nokia. Nokia does not own the copyright s or intellectual property rights to the third-party appli cations. As su ch, N okia does not take a ny responsibility for end-user support, functionalit y of the applications, or the information in the applications or these materials. Nokia does not provide any warranty for t h e third-party applications. BY USI NG THE APPL ICATI ONS Y OU A CKNOWLED GE T HAT T HE APPL ICATI ONS A RE PRO VIDED AS IS WITHOUT WA R RANTY OF ANY K I ND, EXPRESS OR IM PLI ED, TO THE MA XIMUM EXTENT PER MITTED BY APPLICAB LE LAW . YOU FURTH ER AC KNOW LEDGE THAT NEI THER N OKIA NOR IT S AFFILIA TES MAK E AN Y REPRESENTATI O NS OR WARRANTIES, EXPR E SS OR IMPLIED, INCL U DING BUT NOT LIMITE D TO WA RRANTIE S OF TI TLE, MERCHANT ABILI TY OR F ITNES S FOR A P ARTICU LAR PU RPOSE , OR THA T THE APPLICATION S W ILL NO T I NFRINGE ANY THI RD -PARTY PATE N TS, COPYRIG HTS, TR ADEMARKS, O R OTHER RIG HTS. 9255 338 I ssu e 1
4 Cont ents For your safety ................................. 6 General i nformatio n ........................ 8 Access codes ........ .......... .......... ......... .......... ....... 8 Nokia suppor t and con tact i nformation .... 9 1. G et star ted .................................. 10 Insert a (U)SIM card and battery .......... .... 10 MicroSD c a rd sl ot ......... .............. .......... ......... 11 Charge t h e ba tt ery ....... .......... ......... .......... .... 12 Switch the phone on and off ....... .......... .... 13 Set time and date ......... .......... ......... .......... .... 13 Normal operating position ....... .......... ......... 13 Configur a tion settings .......... ......... .......... .... 13 2. Y our ph one ................................. 14 Keys a nd parts .......... .......... ......... .......... ......... 14 Modes...... .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... ......... 15 Standby mode ...... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 1 6 Indic a tors ......... .......... .......... ......... .......... ......... 1 7 Menu ....... .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... ......... 19 Welcome a pplication ........ .............. .......... .... 19 Tutoria l......... .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 1 9 Help ......... .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... ......... 2 0 Volume control .... .......... .............. .......... ......... 20 Keypad loc k ( keygu a rd) ......... ......... .......... .... 2 0 Connect a compatib le headset ......... ......... 21 Connect a USB data c able ....... .......... ......... 21 Attach a wrist s trap .......... ......... .......... ......... 2 1 3. Ca ll fu nctions ............................. 21 Make a voice call .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 21 Answer or r eject a call .............. .......... ......... 23 Make a video call .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 24 Answer a v ideo call ...... .......... ......... .......... .... 25 Video s h arin g ....... .......... .......... .............. ......... 26 Log ........... .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... ......... 28 4. W rite te xt ................................... 29 Trad iti onal text input ............ ......... .......... .... 29 Predic t ive text input .... .............. .......... ......... 29 Copy and delete text ........ ......... .......... ......... 30 5. Messagi ng .................................. 30 Write a nd send message s ........ .......... .......... 3 1 InboxâÂÂre c eive mess a ges .......... .......... .......... 3 3 My folders ...... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... 34 Mailbox ....... ......... ............... .......... .......... .......... 3 4 Outbox ......... ......... .......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 35 View m es sages on the SIM c ar d ...... .......... 36 Cell br oad cas t ......... .......... .......... .......... .......... 3 6 Service co mmand e ditor .......... .......... .......... 3 6 Messaging s ettings ..... .......... .......... .......... ..... 36 Message reader ....... ............... .......... .......... ..... 40 6. Contact s ......... ............................ 40 Manage conta cts......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 40 Manage conta ct groups ...... .......... .......... ..... 41 Add a r inging tone ...... .......... .......... .......... ..... 41 Assign speed dialing k eys ........ .......... .......... 4 1 7. Gal lery ............ ............................ 42 Gallery f unctions ......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 42 8. Musi c player ... ............................ 46 Listen to music........ .......... .......... .......... .......... 46 Music m e nu ........ .......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 47 Playlist s ....... ......... .......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 47 Music sh o p ..... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... 48 Transfer music ......... .......... ............... .......... ..... 48 9. Medi a .............. ............................ 50 Visual R adio ........ .......... .......... ............... .......... 5 0 Camera ... ......... .......... ............... .......... .......... ..... 53 Movie director......... .......... .......... .......... .......... 54 Videos .......... ......... .......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 56 Recorde r ...... ......... .......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 56 RealPlayer....... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... 5 6 Flash Player ......... .......... .......... ............... .......... 58 10.Perso nalization ......................... 58 Themes ........ ......... .......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 58 Profiles ........ ......... ............... .......... .......... .......... 5 9 3-D to n es........ .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... 60
5 11.Web.... ........................................ 60 Mobile Sea rch ...... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 60 Web.......... .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... ......... 61 12.Organ izer ................................... 66 Clock ........ .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... ......... 6 6 Calenda r ...... .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 67 Notes ....... ............... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 68 Calc u lator.... .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 6 8 Converter .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... ......... 68 13.Applicatio ns .............................. 70 Down l oad!........ .......... .......... ......... .......... ......... 7 0 My own ........ .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 70 14.Setting s ..................................... 71 Voic e commands ...... .......... ......... ............... .... 71 Call ma ilbox ......... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 71 Speed dial ............. .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 72 Phone set tings .......... .......... ......... .......... ......... 72 Speech..... .......... ............... .......... ......... .......... .... 81 Settings wizard.... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 8 1 Ins t ant messaging ........ .............. .......... ......... 81 15.Connect ivity .............................. 84 PC Suite ....... .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 84 Bluet ooth connection ....... ......... .......... ......... 8 4 Connect ion manager ........ ......... .......... ......... 87 Push to talk .... .......... ............... .......... .......... ..... 87 Remote s y nchron ization .......... .......... .......... 9 1 Infrar ed ....... ......... .......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 93 Modem ........ ......... .......... ............... .......... .......... 9 3 USB data cable........ .......... .......... .......... .......... 94 Data tr an sfer ...... .......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 94 16.Data man ager ........................... 95 Application m anager ....... .......... .......... .......... 9 5 File mana ger ....... .......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 96 Device ma n ager ...... .......... .......... .......... .......... 9 7 Memory card ........... .......... .......... .......... .......... 97 Activation keys........ .......... .......... .......... .......... 9 8 17.B attery infor mation ............... 100 Charging a nd discharging........ .......... ....... 10 0 Nokia ba ttery authe ntication guidelin es ....... .......... .......... .......... .......... ....... 101 18.En hancements ........................ 102 Care an d mainten ance ................. 102 Addit ional safe t y infor mation .................................. 103 Index ................... .......................... 107
6 For y our sa fety Read these sim ple guidelines. Not following them may be dangerous or illega l. Read the co mplete user g uid e for f urth er in forma tio n. SW ITC H O N S AF E LY Do not switch the device on when wir eless phone use is prohibited or whe n it may ca use interfe rence or dan ger. RO AD SA F ETY CO ME S F IR S T Obey all loca l laws. Always kee p your hands fre e to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consider ation while driving should be road safety. INT E RF ER E NCE All wireless device s may be susceptible to in terferenc e, which could a ffect performance. SWITC H OF F IN HOS PITA LS Follow any res tricti ons. Switch the devic e off near medical equip ment. SWI TCH O FF IN A IRCRAFT Follow an y restricti ons . Wireless device s can ca use interfe rence in aircraf t. SW ITC H O F F W HEN REF U EL I NG Do n o t u se the de v ice a t a refuel ing po int. Do n ot us e near fue l or che micals. SWI TCH O FF NEA R BLASTI NG Follow any res tricti ons. Do no t use the de vice wh ere blasting is in progr ess. USE S E NSIB LY Use only in the norma l position as explained in the product doc umentation. Do n ot to uc h the ant en na un nec es sar i ly. QUA L IF IE D SE R VIC E Only qualified personn el may install or repair thi s product. ENH AN C EM EN TS A ND B AT TER IE S Use only approved enhanceme nts and batteries. Do not connect incompatible products. WA TER - RE SI ST AN C E Your device is not wate r-resistant. Keep it dry. BAC K - UP CO PIES Remember to make back-up copies or keep a written record of all important information stored in your device.
7 CONN E CTING TO O TH ER DE V ICES When conne cting to an y othe r device, read its user gu ide for detailed s afety instructions. Do not con nect incompatib le products. EM ER GEN C Y CA L LS Ensur e the phone f unction of the devi ce is swi t ched on and in se rvice. Pr es s th e end key as man y times as need ed to clear the display and return to the stan dby mo d e. E nter the em ergency number, then pres s the ca ll key. Give your locati on. Do not end the call until giv en permission to do so. â About your device The wireless device described in this guide is approved for use on the GSM 850, 900, 1800, and 1900 a nd UMTS 210 0 netwo rks. Co ntact your s er vice pro vider for mor e inf ormati on about networks. When using the features in this device, obe y all laws and respect local customs, pr ivacy an d legitimate rights of others, including copyrigh ts. Copyright protections may prevent some image s, music (including ringing tones), and other content from being copied, modified, transferred, or forwa r ded. Your device supports internet connections and other meth ods of connectivity. Like comput ers, yo ur device may be exp osed to vir u ses, m alicious mess ages a nd applicat ions, an d other ha rmful con ten t. Exercise caut ion and ope n mess ages, ac ce pt connectivit y req uests, download content, and accept ins tallations only from trustw orthy sources. To increase the security of your device , consider installing antivir us software with a regular update se rvice and using a firewall application. Warning: T o u se any fea tures in t his device, oth er than th e alarm cl ock, the device mu st be sw itched on. Do not sw itch the de vice on when wireless de vice use may cause i nterfere nce or danger. â Netwo rk se rvi ces To use the pho ne you must have serv ice from a wireles s servic e provide r. Many of the featu res req uire spec ial netwo r k f eatures. T hese fea tures ar e not av a ila ble on all networks ; other netw orks m ay re quire that you make specific arrangemen ts with you r service provid er before y ou can use the n etwork se rvice s. Your se rvice provid er can give you instructio ns a nd explain what charges will apply. Some networks may have limitations that af fect how you can use networ k serv ices. For in stanc e, some networ ks may n ot sup port all lan guage - dependent characters and services. Your service provider may have requested that certain features be disa bled or not activated in your device . If so, these featu res will not appear on your device men u. Your device ma y also have a specia l configuration such as changes in menu n ames, menu orde r, and icons. Co nt act you r se rvi ce pr o vid e r f or m ore i nfo r ma ti on .
8 This device supports WAP 2.0 protocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/IP protocols. Some features of this devic e, such as web browsing, e-ma il, push to talk, instant m essaging, and multimedia me ssaging, require network s upport for these technologie s. â Enhancements, batteries, and charger s Check the model number of any charger before use with this device. This device is intended for use when supplied with power from the AC-3, AC-4, AC-5, DC-4 chargers or C A -44 ch arg er ad a pte r. Warning: U se only batte ries, charge r s, and enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The use of any other types m ay invalidate any approval or warranty, and may be dangerous. For availability of approved enhance ments, pleas e check with you r dealer. When you disconnect the power cord of any enh ancement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. Ge nera l info rmat ion â Access codes Lock c ode The lock code ( 5 digits) helps t o protect your phone against unauthorized use. The pre set co de is 12 345. Chan ge the c ode, an d keep t he new co de secr et and i n a safe place separate from your phone. To cha n ge the code a nd to set t he phone to request the code, se e âÂÂSecurity ,â p. 74. If you e nter an incorrect lock code five t ime s in su cce ssion, the phon e ignores furth e r ent ries of the code. Wa it for 5 m inutes , and enter the code again. When the de vice is loc ked , calls may be poss ible to the of ficial eme rgency n umber programmed in to your devic e. PIN codes The person a l identifica t ion number (PIN ) code and t h e universa l personal identification nu m ber (UPIN) code (4 to 8 digits) help to protect you r SIM card against unauthorized use. Se e âÂÂSecurity ,â p. 74. The PIN code is usu a lly supplied wit h the SIM car d. The PIN2 code ( 4 to 8 digits) may be supplied with the SIM card and is required for some fu n ctions.
9 The module PIN is required to access the information in the security module. The module PIN is su pplied with the SI M card if t he SIM card has a se curity module in it. The signing PIN is req uired for the digital signat ur e. The signing PIN is supplie d with the SIM card if t h e SIM card has a s ecurity module in it. PUK co de s The personal unblocking key (PUK) code and the universal personal unblocking key (UPUK) code (8 digits) are required to change a blocked PIN code a nd UPIN code, respectively. The PUK2 code is r equ ired to ch ange a blocked PIN2 code . If the codes are not supplied with the SIM card, contact your local service provider for th e codes. Ba rrin g p a ssw ord The barring passw ord (4 digits) is required w hen using Call barring . See âÂÂCall barring,â p. 78. You can obtain t h e password f rom your service pr ovider. If you enter an incorrect barr in g password three times in succession, the pass w ord is blocked. Con t act your service provide r. â Nokia support and contact infor ma tion On the web site, you can get information on the u se of Nokia products and services. If you need to contact customer service , check the list of loca l No ki a contact cent e rs at www.nokia. com /customerser vice . For mainte n ance service s, check y our nearest Nokia service ce nter at www. noki a.com/ rep a ir. Softw are upd ates Nokia may produce software updates that may offer new features, enhanced functions, or improved performance . You may be able to r equest these u pdates through the Nokia Software Updater PC application. To update the device software, you need th e Nokia Software Updater application and a com patible PC with Microsoft Windows 2000 or XP operating system, broadband internet ac cess, and a compatible data cable to connect y our device to th e PC. To get more information and to dow nload the Nokia Software Updater application, visit www.nokia.com/softwareupdate or your local Nokia web site.
10 1. Ge t st a rte d â Insert a (U)SIM card and battery Always sw itc h the dev ice off and discon nect the charg er befor e removi ng the b attery. This phone u ses BP- 5M batteries. For availability a nd information on using SIM card services, con tact your SI M card vend or. This may be the service provider or other vendor. 1. To open t he back cove r of the phone for t he first ti m e, lift it us ing the plastic strip shown on t he back of the phone (1). You ca n then remove the str ip. To open th e back cover la t er, turn t he lower part of the phone 90 de grees le ft or right w hen the number key s of the lower part a re on the sa me side as t he display, and lift t h e back cover ( 2). To re move the ba ttery, lift it a s shown (3). 2. To release the SIM card holder, slide it backwards (4), and lift it ( 5). I n s e r t t h e ( U ) S I M c a r d t o t he S IM c a r d h o l d e r ( 6 ) . M a k e s u r e t h a t t h e ( U ) S I M card is pr ope rly inserted and th at the golde n-colored contact area on the ca rd is facing dow nwards, and the beve le d corner f a ces upwards.
11 Close the SIM card holder (7), a n d slide it forward to lock it (8). 3. Replace the ba t tery (9). Replace t h e back cover (10) a n d (11). â MicroSD card slot Use only compatible microSD cards approved by Nokia for use with this device. Nokia uses approved industry standards for memory cards, but some brands may not be fully compatible with this device. Incompa tible c ards may d ama ge the card and the device and cor rupt data stored on the card. Keep microSD cards out of the re a ch of sm a ll children. You can ex tend t he avai lable me mory w ith a m icroSD memory c ard. Y ou can in sert or remove a m icroSD card w ithout switching the phone off. Import ant: Do n ot r emove the memory card in the middle of an operation when the ca rd is being a cces s ed. Rem oving the car d in the mi ddle of a n operati on may dam age th e memory card as well as th e device, and data s tored on the card m a y be cor ru pt ed.
12 Inse r t a microSD card No te that the m emory car d may b e supplied with the phon e, and m ay alre ady b e ins ert ed. 1. Open the side door (1). 2. Place the m icroSD card in the slot wi th the gol de n con ta ct a re a f aci ng down (2). Push t he card ge n tly to lock it into place. 3. Close tight t he side door (3 ). Remove a microSD card 1. Open the side door. 2. Push the card gent ly t o release it. Remove me mory card and press 'OK' is displayed. Pull the c a rd out, and se le ct OK . 3. Close tight t he side door. â Char ge the batter y 1. Conne ct the cha rger to the wall sock et. 2. Open the side door (1), and connect t h e charger plug to the ch arger connector in t he phone (2). 3. After charging, close tight t he side door. If the battery is com p letely discharged, it may take a fe w minutes be fore the charging indicator appears on th e display or befor e any calls can be made. The charging time de pends on the charge r and the battery used. Cha rging a BP -5 M batt er y w ith th e AC -5 c ha rg er ta kes ap pr o xi ma te ly 80 mi nu te s. 1 3 2 1 2
13 â Switch the phone on and off Press and h old the power key. If the ph one asks for a PIN code, enter t he PIN c ode , and select OK . If the ph one asks for the lock code, ent e r the lock code , and select OK . The factory s e tting for the lock code is 12345. â Set time and date To se t th e corr e ct ti m e zone , tim e, an d d ate , sel e ct th e country you are pre sently in, t hen enter the local time and date. â Normal operating position Use the phone on l y in its normal operatin g position. Not e: As with an y radio transmittin g device, avoid touching an an t enna unneces sari ly when t he anten na is in use. For example , avoid touching the cellular antenna du ring a phone call. Contact with a tr ansmitting or receiving antenn a affects the quality of the radio comm unication, may cause th e device to operate at a higher power level than ot herwise ne eded, a n d may r ed uce the batt ery li f e. Yo ur d ev ic e ha s in t er n al a n te n na s. Cellular a ntenna (1) Blue toot h antenn a (2) â Configuration set t ings Before you can use multimedia messaging , instant messaging, push to talk, e-mail, synchronization , streaming, a n d the browse r, you mu st have the proper configuration settings on y o ur phone. Your ph one may automatically configure browser, mu l timedia messaging, a cce ss point, a nd streamin g set t ings based on the SIM card used. Y ou may also receive the se ttings directly as a con figu ration
14 message, which you save to you r phone. For more information on availability, contact your se rvice provider or near e st authorized N o kia dealer. When you receive a conf igu ration message, and the settings are not automatically saved and a ctivated, 1 new message is displayed. Sele ct Sh o w to open the message. To save the settings, sele ct Op tion s > Save . You may need to ente r a PIN code provided by t he service provider. 2. Y our p hone â Keys and par ts Power key ( 1 ) Loud spea ker (2) Earpie ce ( 3) Volume keys (4 ) Left and r ight selec t ion keys (5) Men u key (6 ), hereaft er described a s "select Menu " Clear key (7) Call key (8) End key ( 9 ) Navi⢠scroll ke y (10), hereaft er referred to as scroll key Number keys ( 11) Microphone (12) No kia AV 2 .5-mm c onnector (13) Louds peaker ( 14) Char ger conn ector (15) microSD card s lot (16) USB connect or (17) Infra re d port (18)
15 Media keys: Rewind, zoom out (19) Play/Pause/Stop, capture ke y (20) Fast forward, zoom in (21) Camera lens (22) Ca m e ra fl a s h (2 3 ) â Modes Your phone h a s five f u nctional modes: phone m ode (1), came ra mode (2), music mode (3), video ca ll mode (4), and vide o view mode (5). To sw it ch between the modes, turn the lower part of t he phone. T here is a shor t pause before a m ode is activated. In the phone mode , do not try to rota t e the lower pa rt of the phone more than 90 degrees to the left or 180 degrees to the righ t. If you force the lower part of the ph one to rotate more, the ph one will be damaged. Phone mode The phone mode is activated when the number ke ys of t he lower part a re on t h e same side as the display. Camera mode To activat e the camera mode w hile in the phone mode , turn th e lower part of t he phone 90 degrees t o the left so th at th e camera lens is point in g away from you when you look at th e display. To take a se lf port ra it, turn the lower part of t he phone 90 degr ee s to the right while in the phon e m ode so that the came ra lens is pointing t oward you w hen you look at the display.
16 Music mod e To activat e the music mode while in the phone mode, turn t h e lower part of t he phone 180 degrees to the righ t so that the keys us e d to control music playback are on the same side as the displa y. Video call mode During video calls, you can let the call recipient to see your f a ce. Turn t h e lower part of the phone so that t h e camera le ns is pointing toward you when you look at the display. You ca n also tu rn the ca m era lens to t h e opposite direction. Vide o view mode When you are viewing a video or still images in the phone mode, you can activate the video view mode. Turn th e lower part of the phone 90 degre e s to t h e left so that the camera lens is pointing away from you. In video v i ew mode the display a utomatically changes to la ndscape, and you can put the phon e on the table, for e xample, while viewing. To view the next or previous still images or t o fast forward or rewind the v ide o, press t he fa st forward or rewind media ke y. To play or pause the video, pre ss t he play/paus e /stop media key. T o stop the video, press and h old t he play/pause/stop me dia key. â Standby mode When you have switch e d on the phone, a nd it is regis t ered to a network, t h e phone is in the standby mode and r eady for use. To open t h e list of la st dialed numbers, press the call key. To use the voice comm ands or voice dialing, pr e ss and hold the r ight selection key. To change t h e profile, press t he power key, and select a profile. To star t a connection t o the web, press a n d hold 0 . Active sta ndby When active st a ndby is e n abled, you ca n use the displa y for f a st access t o frequently used applications. To select whether the active standby is show n , select
17 Menu > Settings > Phone sett. > General > Personalis at ion > Standby mode > Act ive standby > On or Of f . To access active standby a pplications, scroll to the application, and select it . In active st a ndby the defa ult applications are s how n across t he top of t he active standby area, a nd calendar, to-do, and playe r e vents are lis t ed below. To select a n application or event, scroll to it, and se lect it. Offline profile The Off line profile lets you u se the phone without connecting it to a network . When the O ffline profile i s active, the conn ection to the wireless network is turned off, as indicated by in the s i gnal str e ngth indicator area. All w ireless RF signals to or from your phone a re prevented, a nd you can use your device without a (U)SIM card. Use t he off lin e profile in radio sen sit ive environmentsâÂÂon board aircraft or in hospitals. You ca n listen to music using the music p layer when the offline pr ofile is active. To leave the Offlin e profile, pre ss the power key, and select anot h er profile. Import ant: I n th e offline profile you cannot make or receive any ca lls, or use other features tha t require cellula r network cov erage. Calls may still be poss ible to the official emergency num ber programmed into your device. To make calls, you must first activ ate the phone functio n by changing profiles. If the device has been locked, enter t he lock co de. â Indicators The phone is connect e d to a UMTS network. The phone is conn e cted to a GSM network. The phone is in offlin e mode and not con nected to a cellu la r network. See âÂÂOffline profile,â p. 1 7. You recei ved on e or sever al mes sages to th e Inbox folder in Messaging . You received new e-mail in your remote mailbox. Ther e are mess ages wa iti ng to b e sent in Outbox . See âÂÂO u tbox,â p. 35 . You have missed ca lls. See â Re cent calls,â p. 28. Shown if Ringing t ype is se t to Silent an d Message alert to ne and E -mail alert tone ar e s et to Off . See âÂÂPr ofi les , â p. 5 9.
18 The phone keypad is l ocked. Se e âÂÂK e ypad lock (keyguard),â p. 20 . The loudsp eaker is ac tivat ed. An a larm is ac t ive. The second phone line is be ing used. See L ine in use in âÂÂCall ,â p. 7 7. / All calls to t h e phone are diverte d t o your call m a ilbox or to another number. If you h a ve two phone lines, t h e divert indicat or is for th e firs t lin e and for the second. A he ad s e t is co nn e cte d to th e ph on e. A loopset is conn e cted to the phone. The conne ction to a Blue toot h hea dset ha s been lost. / A data call is active. A GPRS packet data connection is active. indicates the connection is on hol d an d t h at a con nect io n is avai la ble. A packet dat a connection is a ctive in a pa rt of t he network t hat supports EGPRS . in dicate s the c onnecti on is on hold and tha t a connecti on is available. The icons indicate that EGPRS is availa ble in t he network, but your device is not ne ce ssarily u sing EGPRS in the data t r ansfer. A UMTS packet data connection is a ctive. indicates the con n ection is on hold and that a connection is ava ila ble. Bluetooth is switched on. Data is being tr a nsmitted using Bluetooth. See âÂÂBluetooth connection,â p. 84. An infrared connection is active. Wh e n infrared is active, but there is no connection, the indicator blinks. A U SB co nn e cti on is ac tiv e . Other indicators may also be shown. For push to talk indicators, se e âÂÂPush to talk,â p. 87.
19 â Menu In the menu you can access the functions in your phone. To a ccess the main menu, press t he menu key; hereafter described as "sele ct Menu ". To open an application or a folder, scroll to it, a nd press t he scroll key. To change t h e menu view, select Menu > Opti o ns > Ch ange Menu view an d a view type. If you ch a nge the orde r of t he functions i n the menu , the order may differ from the default orde r descr ibe d in this user guide . To close an application or a f older, select Back and Ex it as many ti mes as needed to return to the standby mode, or select Op tio ns > Exit . To display and sw it ch between open applications, se le ct and hold Menu . T he application switching window ope ns, showing a list of open applications. Scroll to an application, and select it. To mark or unmark an item in applications, press # . To ma rk or unma rk several cons ecuti ve it ems, pr ess and hol d # , and scroll up or down . Leaving applications running in the background increases the de mand on battery power and reduces the battery life. â W e lcome application We l c o m e appli cation sta rt s when you sw itch on your phon e for t h e first time. With th e We lc o me application, you can a ccess the following applications: Tu t o ri a l âÂÂLearn about the features of your phone an d h ow to u se them. Se tt. wi za rd âÂÂConfigure connection set t ings. Tr a n s f er âÂÂCopy or synch r onize data from othe r compatible phones. T o ope n We lcom e later , select Me nu > Applications > Wel c o m e . â Tu t o r i a l Tu tor ial con ta in s an in tr od u cti on to th e ph on e fea t ure s and a tut or ial to t ea ch ho w to u s e t he p h one . The tuto ri a l st ar ts a uto m at ic all y w he n you tur n on y ou r ph one f or t he f irs t tim e . To s ta rt th e tu tor ial yo u rs elf , se le c t Menu > Tu to r i a l an d a tut o ria l i tem.
20 â He lp You r devic e has c ontext -sensit ive h elp. Yo u can a cce ss the help from an application or from the main menu. To access help when an application is open, se le ct Op tion s > Help . To s w i tch between help and the application that is open in the background, select and h old Menu . S e le ct Opti ons and from the follow ing options: T opic list âÂÂto view a list of ava ila ble topics in the appropriate ca tegory Help c at egory l ist âÂÂto view a list of help categories Search by keyword âÂÂto search for help topics using ke yw ords To o pen he lp fro m th e main menu, se lect Me nu > Applications > He l p . In the list of help categories, select t he desired application to view a list of help topics. To switch between the h elp category li st, indicated with , and a ke ywords list, indicated with , scroll left or right. To display the re la ted help text, select it. â V olume control To adju st the earpiece or loudspe aker volume during a ca ll or when list ening to an audio file, pr e ss the volume keys. To activate t h e loudspeaker durin g a call, select Loudsp eaker . To deactivate t he loudspeaker dur ing a call, select Ha ndset . Warning: Do not hold the device nea r your ea r when the loud s peak er is in use, because t he v olume may b e extremely lo ud. â Keypad lock (keyguard) To prevent a ccide ntal keypr esses, you can lock the ke ypad. To lock the ke ypad in the phon e mode, press t he left se le ction key a n d * with in 1.5 s econds. To set the phone to automatica lly lock the keypad after a cert a in tim e , sele c t Menu > Settings > Phone sett. > Ge neral > Security > Phone and SIM card > Keypad autolock period > User defined and the desired tim e . To lock the ke ypad in music m ode, press th e power key qu ickl y, and select L ock keypad . To unlock the ke ypa d in the ph one mode, select Unl ock , and press * wi thin 1.5 seconds. To unlock the ke ypa d in music mode, se le ct Unlock > OK .
21 When the keypad lock is on, calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into you r devic e. â Connect a compatible headset Do not connect pr oducts that cre ate an output signal as this may cause damage to the device. Do not connect any volta ge source to the Nokia AV con nector. When c onnec ting any externa l devic e or any headset, other than those approv ed by Nokia for use with this dev ice, to the Nokia AV connec tor, pay special attention to volu me levels . â Connect a USB data cable To set the default USB connection mode, select Menu > Settings > Connectivity > USB > USB mode and the de sired mode. T o set whether the d efault mode is activated automatically, se lect Ask o n connection > No . â Atta ch a wrist s tra p Conn ect the w rist strap a ccor din g to the graphic. 3. Call func tions â Make a voice c all 1. In th e standby mode, e nt er the ph one number, including t he area code. Pre ss th e clear key to r emove a numbe r. For international calls, press * twi ce f or th e in te r na tion al p r efi x (t h e character re pla ces the in ternational access code ) , and en t er the countr y code , area code (omit the leading zero if necessary), and phon e nu mber. 2. To call the number, press t he call ke y. To adjust the volum e during the ca ll, press the volu me keys. 1 2
22 3. To end th e cal l, or to c a n cel the call atte mpt, pres s the end k ey. To make a call from Con tacts , s e le ct Me nu > Cont acts . Scroll to the desired name; or ent e r the first lett e rs of t he name, and scrol l to the desired name. T o call the number, pre ss the call key. To call your call mailbox (network service), pre s s and hold 1 in the standby mode . You must define th e mailbox number before you can call your mailbox. See âÂÂCall mailbox,â p. 7 1. To call a re cently dial e d number, press the ca ll key in the standby m ode. The list of the last 20 number s you called or attempted to call is shown. Scroll to the number you want, a n d press t h e call ke y. To make a push to talk ca ll, see âÂÂPush to talk,â p. 8 7. Speed dialin g You can assign a phone number t o on e of t h e speed dialing keys 2 to 9 . Se e â Assign speed dialing keys, â p. 4 1, or âÂÂSpeed dial,â p. 72 . Call a speed dialing number in either of the following ways: ⢠Press the s pe ed dialing key, then t h e call key. â¢I f Speed diallin g is se t to On , press and hold the spee d diali ng key until t he call begins. To set Speed dialling to On , s e l ec t Me nu > Settings > Phone se tt. > Phone > Call > Spee d dialling > On . Voic e d ialing A voice tag is added automatically to all entries in Contacts . Use long names, and a void similar names for different numbers. Mak e a voi ce d ial ing c al l Voi ce tags a r e sen sitive t o back g roun d noise. Us e voice t ags in a q uiet envir onment. Not e : Using voice ta gs may be difficult in a noisy envi ronment or during an emergency, so y ou should not rely solely u pon voice dialin g in all circumstanc es. 1. In th e standby mode, pre ss and hold the ri g ht selection key. A short tone is played, a nd Speak now i s displayed. If y ou are using a compat ible h eadset with t he hea dset key, press and ho ld the heads et key.
23 2. Spe ak the voice command clearly. T h e phone plays the voice com mand of the best match. After 1 .5 s econds, the ph one d i als the num ber; if the resul t is not the correct one, be fore dialing select Next an d an oth er en try . Using voice commands t o carry out a phone function is s imila r to voice dialing. See âÂÂV oice commands,â p. 7 1. Make a confere nce call (ne twork service) 1. M ake a call to th e first participant. 2. To m ake a call to a n other participant, select Opt io ns > Ne w ca ll . T he fi rst call is automatically put on hold. 3. To join the first participant in the conf e rence call when the new call is answered, se lect Opt ions > Conference . To add a new pers on to the call, repeat st ep 2 , a n d select Op tio ns > Conference > A dd to conference . The phone su pport s conference ca l ls between a maximum of six participants, including yourself. 4. To ha ve a p riv a te c onv ersat ion wit h on e of th e par tici pants, sele ct Opt ion s > Conference > Private . Select a participant and Pri va te . The conference call is put on hold on your phone. T he other participants can still continu e the conference call. T o return to the conf erence call, s ele ct Opti o ns > Add to conference . 5. To drop a participant, select Opti ons > C on ference > Drop participant , scroll to the participant, and select Drop . 6. To en d th e conf erenc e call , pres s th e end key . â Ans wer or r eject a call To answer a ca ll, press th e call ke y. To adjust the volu m e during the ca ll, press t h e volume ke ys. To mute the ri ngi ng tone, sele ct Silence . Tip : I f a comp atibl e he a dse t is conne cted to th e phon e, press th e heads et key to a nswer a nd end a cal l. To rejec t th e call , pres s the end key, o r sel ect Opti on s > Re ject . The c al ler he ars a busy ton e . If you have activated the Call divert opt io n If bu sy to divert calls, rejecting the call diverts the call.
24 To send a t ex t message to t he caller infor m ing why you cannot answe r the call, select Op ti ons > Se nd text message . You c an act iva te th e text messa ge rep ly and edit the te xt in the mess age . See Reject call with SM S and Message te x t in âÂÂCall,â p. 77. Call waiting ( n etwork service) During a call, to answer the waiting call, press t he call key. The first ca ll is put on hold . T o end th e acti ve c all, press the end key. To ac t iv ate th e Ca ll waiting function, sele ct Menu > Settings > Phone set t . > Phone > Call > Call w aiting > Ac t i v at e . To s witch betwe en the tw o calls, select Swap . Optio ns duri ng a ca ll Many of t he optio ns tha t you ca n use during a call a re net work s ervic es. For availability, contact your service provide r. Select Optio ns during a ca ll for some of the following options: Tr a n s f er âÂÂto connect a call on hold to an a ctive call and disconnect yourself Replace âÂÂto end an active ca l l and replace it by a nswering the waiting ca ll Send DTMF âÂÂto se nd DTMF tone str ings (for example, a password). Ent e r the D T MF string or search for it in Contacts . To ente r a wa it ch arac ter ( w ) or a pause char acte r ( p ), press * re peatedl y. T o send t he tone , sel ect OK . Tip : Yo u c an ad d D T MF t one s to th e DTMF field in a con tact card . â Make a video call When you make a video ca ll, you can see a re al-time, two-way vide o between you and the recipient of the call. The live video image or vide o image captured by the camera in your device is shown to the video call re cipie nt. To be able to make a video call, you m ay need to have a USIM card and be in the coverage of a UMTS network. For a vaila bility of and subscription to video ca ll services, cont a ct your service provider. A video call can only be made between two parties. T he video call can be ma de to a compatible mobile ph one or an ISDN client. Video calls ca nn ot be made while there is a nother voice, vide o, or data cal l act ive.
25 You are not r e ceiving video (the re cipient is not se nding video or t he network is not transmitting it) . You have de nied video sending from your device. 1. Enter the phone number in t he sta n dby mode; or sele ct Menu > Contacts , and sc ro ll to th e des ir ed co n ta ct. 2. Sele ct Op ti ons > Call > Video call . Starting a video call m ay take a while. W ait ing for video image is s hown. If the call is not su cce ssful ( for example, video calls are not suppor t ed by t h e network, or the re ceivin g device is not com patible), you a re asked if you w a nt to try a norm al call or send a message instead. The video call is act ive whe n you see t w o video images, and h e ar the sound through the loudspeaker. The call recipient may deny video sending, in which case you hear the sound a n d may see a s t ill image or a grey ba ckgr ound graphic. During video ca lls while the phone is in ph one mode, turn the low er part of the ph on e so that the ca mera lens is poin t ing toward you to let th e call recipient to see your face, or tu rn the lower part to opposite direction t o sh ow the view away from you . To increase or decrease the volume during a call, pres s th e volume keys. To change between showing v i deo or only he a ring sound, select Enable or Dis able > Sending video , Se nding audio , or Sendin g aud. & video . To zoom your own image, se lect Zoom in or Zoom out . The zoom in dicator is shown on the t op of the display. To switch the plac e s of th e sent and received v i deo images on t h e display, select C hange image order . Even if you have denied video sending duri n g a video call, the call w i ll still be charged as a vide o call. Check the pricin g with your ne twork operator or service prov i der. To en d th e vide o call , pre ss t he end key . â Answer a video call When a video call a rrives, is displayed. Press t h e call k e y to answer the vide o call. Allow video im age to be sent to caller? is sh own. If you selec t Yes , th e image captured by the ca mera in your device is
26 shown to the ca ller. If you select No , or do nothing, video sending is n ot activated, and a gre y screen is shown in place of the video. Even if you have de n ied video sending during a video ca ll , the call is still ch arged as a video ca ll. Check the pricing wit h your se rvice provider. To end t h e video call, press t he end key. â Video sharing Use Video sharing t o send live video from your mobile device to a nother compatible mobile device during a voice c a ll. Vide o sharing requir ements Because V ideo sharing r equires a 3G universal mobile telecommunications system (UMTS) connection, your abilit y t o use Video sharing depends on 3 G network availability. Contact your service provider for qu estions about netwo rk availability and fees asso ciated with thi s appl i c a ti on. To use V ideo sharing you must do t he following: ⢠Ensure that you r de vice is s et up for person-to-person connections. ⢠Ensure you have an act ive UMTS connection and are within UMTS network coverage. If you start th e sharing session w h ile you are within UMTS network coverage and a handover t o GSM occurs , the sha r ing session is discont inu ed, but your voice call con t inues. ⢠Ensure that bot h the sen de r and recipient are registered to the U MTS network. If you invite som eone to a sharing session and that personâÂÂs phon e is tur n ed off, or the person is not within UMTS network coverage, they do n o t k now that you are sending a n invitation. How e ver, you rece ive an error me ssage that t he recipient cannot a cce pt the invitation. Settings A person - to-person connect ion is a lso known as a ses sion initiation protocol (SIP) connection. T he SIP profile se ttings must be con figured in your de vice before you can use Video sh aring . Ask your service provider for the SIP profile settings, and save t hem in your de vic e . You r ser vice pro vider may sen d you the set tings over the air. If you know a r e cipientâÂÂs SIP a ddre ss, you can enter it on your co n tact card for that person. Select Menu > Con tac ts , a con tac t, an d Op ti o ns > Ed it > Op ti o ns > A dd
27 detail > SIP or Share view . Enter the SIP address in the form a t sip:username@domainname (you can u se an IP a ddress inste a d of a domain name ). Sh are live v ide o To receive a sharing session, the recipient must install Video sharing a nd configur e the requir e d settings on th e ir mobile device. Y ou and the re cipie nt must both be registe re d to t he service before you ca n start sharing. To re ce ive share invitations, you m ust be registered to t he service, ha ve an act ive UMTS connection, and be w it hin the UMTS network covera ge . Liv e vi de o 1. Wh en a voice call is a ctive, select Op tio ns > Share video > L ive video . 2. The phone sends the invitation t o the SIP addre ss you have added to t h e contact card of t he recipient. If the re cipie nt has se ve ral SIP a ddre sses in t he conta ct card, sele ct the SIP ad dress to whi ch yo u want t o sen d th e inv itatio n, a nd Select to send the in vi ta tio n. If the SIP a ddress of t he re cipie nt is not a vailable, enter a SI P address. Select OK t o sen d the i n vita tion . 3. Sharin g begins automatically when th e recipient accepts t h e invitation. The loudspeaker is a ct ive. Y ou can also u se a headset to conti nue you r voice call while you share live video. 4. Sele ct Pa u s e to pa use the sha r ing session. Se lect Co nt in ue to resume shari ng. 5. To end the sh a ring sessi on , select Stop . To end th e vo i ce ca ll , pre s s the en d k ey. Accept an inv itation When someone sen ds you a share inv it ation, an in vitation message is displa ye d showing the sen der âÂÂs name or SI P address. If your device is not set to Silen t , it rin gs w hen y ou receive a n invit a tion. If some one sends you a share invitati on and you a re not w ithin UMTS n et work coverage, you will not know that you receive d a n invitation. When you receive an invitation, select f rom the following: Accept âÂÂto begin t he sharing ses sion and activate the vie w mode.
28 Reject âÂÂt o declin e the invi tati on. Th e sender rece ives a messa ge tha t you r eject ed the invit ation. Y ou can also press t he end ke y to de cline the sh aring se ssion a nd disconnect the voice ca ll. To end t he shari n g session, select St op . â Log In the log, you can m onitor phone calls, text mess a ges, packet data con ne ctions, and fax and da t a calls re gist ered by th e phone. Connections to you r remote m ailbox, multimedia messaging cen t er, or browse r pages are show n as data calls or packet data connections in the gen e ral communications log. Not e: The actual invoice for calls and servi ces from your service provider may va ry, depending on n etwork features, round ing off for billing, taxes, and so forth. Not e: Some tim ers, including the lif e timer, may be reset durin g service or softwa re upgrades. Recent calls The phone regis t ers the p hone numbers of m issed, r e ceived, and dialed ca lls, and the approximate du ration of you r calls. The phone re gist ers mi sse d and rece ive d calls only if the network supports these functions, a n d the phone is s wit ched on and withi n th e net work se rvic e area . To view r ecent calls ( network se rvice), select Me nu > Log > Recent calls and a ca ll typ e. To clear all recent call lists in the Recent calls view, s e lect Op tion s > Clear recent calls . T o clea r on ly one of t he call regi sters , open th e regi ster yo u wa nt to erase, and s elec t Op t i ons > Clear list . General log To view the ge neral log, select Me nu > Log , a nd scroll right. To filter the log, select Opti o ns > Filter and the filt e r type. To er as e all th e log conte nts perman entl y, sel ect Opti on s > Cle ar log > Ye s .
29 4. Writ e text When you write text, appears on the t op righ t of t he display, indicating predictive text input, or appears, indicating traditional text input. To set t h e predictive text in put on or off wh en writing text , press * , a nd select Ac t i va te pre dic tive text or P red ic t iv e te xt > Off . , , or is displayed next t o the text input indicator, in dica ting the cha ra cter ca se . To ch ange the chara ct er case, press # . indicates the n umber mode. To ch ange between letter and n u mber mode, press # r e peatedly until number mode is active; or press * , and selec t Numbe r mode or Al ph a mode . â T r aditional text input Press a n umber ke y, 1 to 9 , r epeat edly unt il the des ired c har act er appe ar s. No t all characters available under a n um ber key a r e printed on t h e key. The a v ailability of characters de pends on the sele ct ed writing language. See Writing language in âÂÂLangu age ,â p. 73 . If t he ne x t le tt er yo u w an t i s o n t he sam e k e y a s th e p res e n t on e, wa i t u nt il th e cursor appears ( or scroll forwar d t o end t he time-out period), a nd enter t he letter. To i nsert a number, press and hold the num ber key. The most commo n punctuation marks and special characters are available under the 1 key. For m ore characters, pre ss and hold * . To er as e a cha racte r, p ress th e cle ar key. To era se mor e cha racte rs, p ress a nd hold the c lear key . To ins ert a space, press 0 . To mo ve t he cur sor to the next l i ne, press 0 th ree tim es. â Predictive text input To enter any letter with a single ke ypress, use predictive text in put. To select the predictive te x t input, pre ss * , a nd selec t Acti va t e pr ed ic tiv e t ext . This act ivates predictive text input for all e ditors in the phone. 1. To write the desired w ord, press t he keys 2 âÂÂ9 . Press each key only once f or on e letter. Th e word change s aft er ev er y keypres s. For t he most common pu nctuat ion marks , pre ss 1. For more punct uation marks and special characters , press and hold * .
30 To er ase a ch arac ter , pre ss th e cle ar key. To eras e mor e char a cte rs, pr ess an d ho ld th e cl e ar k ey . 2. When you have finis hed the word a nd it is correct, to confirm it, scroll for ward or insert a space. If the wo rd is not co rrect, to vi ew the mat ching word s the dic tiona ry has found one by one, pre ss * repeatedly. If the ? char ac t er i s s how n af te r the wo rd , th e wor d you in te nd ed to w ri te is not in the dictionary. To add a word t o the dictionary, select Spe ll . En t er th e word (up to 32 letters) using traditional text input, and select OK . T h e wo rd i s added to the dictionary. W hen the dict i onary becomes full, a n ew word replaces the olde st added word. Wri te co mpound wo rds Write the first half of a compound word, and scroll forward to confirm it. Write the las t part of the compound word, a nd to complete the compound wor d, press 0 t o ad d a spac e. â Copy and delete text 1. To select letters a nd w ords, pre ss and hold # , and at the same time scroll left or right. As the selection moves, text is high ligh ted. To select lines of text, press and hold # , and a t the same time scroll up or down. 2. To copy the text to t he clipboard, press and hold # , and at the sam e t ime se lect Copy . If you want to del ete the se lect ed tex t fr om the docume nt, pr ess t he cl ear key. 3. To in sert the text, scroll to the insertion point, press and hold # , a nd at the sa me time sele ct Pas te . 5. Messagi ng You can create, send, r e ceive, view, edit, and organize text messages, multimedia messages, e-mail messages, pres ent a tions, an d docu ments. Y ou can also receive messages and da ta using B luetooth wireless technology, receive and forward picture messages, receive se rvice messages and cell broadcast messages, a nd send service commands.
31 To open t h e Messaging menu, sel ect Me nu > Messaging . You can s ee the New message functi on and a list of de fault folde rs: Inbox âÂÂcontains received messages except e-mail a n d cell broa dca st messages. E-mail messa g es a re save d in the M ailbox folder. T o read cell broa dcast messages, select Op ti on s > Cell br oadcast . My folder s âÂÂfor orga n izing your messages into folde rs Mailbox âÂÂfor connecting to your re m ote mailbox to retrieve you r new e-mail messages or viewing your previously retrieved e- m ail messages offline. After you define settings for a new mailbox, the name given to that m a ilbox is displayed instead of Mailbox . Dr af ts âÂÂs aves draft messages that have not been se nt. Sent âÂÂsaves the me ssages t hat are sent, ex cludi ng m essages sent using Blue toot h. O utbox â t emporarily saves t he messages wait ing to be sen t . R eports (network service ) âÂÂsaves the de livery repor t s of the tex t messages, special me ssage type s such as business ca rds, a nd multimedia messages you have sent. Receiving a delivery report of a multimedia m essage that has been sen t to an e-mail address may n ot be possible. â Write and send messages Your device supports the sending of text messages beyond the char acter limit for a single messa ge. Longer messages a re sent as a series o f tw o or more mes sages. You r service prov i der may c ha rge ac cordi ng ly. Ch ar acte r s th at u se a cce nt s or ot her ma rks , an d ch arac te rs from some language option s, take up m ore space, lim iting the numbe r of char acters that can be se nt in a s ingle m essa ge. The wir eless network ma y lim it the si ze of MMS m es sa ges. If t he inserted pictur e exceeds this limit, the de vice may m ake it smaller so th at it can be sent by M MS. Only devices that have com patible featu res can receive and dis play multim edia messages. The appearance of a message may vary depending on th e receiving device. Before you ca n send and r e ceive an SMS message , a m ultimedia message, or a n e-mail, or conn e ct to your r e mote mailbox, you must have t he corr e ct connection settings in pla ce. See âÂÂMessaging se t tings,â p. 36. 1. To create a me ssage, sele ct Menu > Messaging > New m essage and th e message type. T o create an Audio message , se e âÂÂAudio messaging,â p. 32.
32 2. Press the scroll ke y to s e lect the re cipients or grou ps from Contacts or enter the phone number or e -m ail address of t he recipient in t he To field. Separate re ci pi en ts w i th a sem ic ol on (; ). 3. Wh en creating an e-mail or multimedia message , scroll dow n to the subject field, and w r ite the message s u bject. 4. Scroll down to the message fi e ld, and write the m essage. When you write text messages, the message length indicator shows how many characters you can enter in the me ssage. For example, 1 0 (2) me a ns that you can still add 10 charac t ers for the text t o be sent as t w o separate text messages. To use a templa te fo r the text mess a ge , sel ect Op tion s > Insert > Temp late . To create a presentation based on a template to be sent as a mu ltimedia message, select Optio ns > Crea t e p re s en tat i on . T o use a text temp late for t he multimedi a message, select Opt io ns > Insert object > Tem p l a t e . To add a media object to a m ultimedia message, select Op tio ns > In s er t object > Image , Sound clip , or V ideo clip . To create a nd add a new me dia object, select Op tion s > Insert new > Image , Sound clip , Video clip or Slide . When sound is added, is show n . To add a media object to a n e-mail, select Opt ion s > In s e rt > Im age , Sound clip , Video clip , No te , Other or Template . 5. To send the m e ssage, sele ct Optio ns > Send . Audi o m essaging Audio messages are multime dia messages that consist of a single sound clip. To create a nd send an a udio m essage: 1. Sele ct Menu > Me ssaging > Ne w message > Audio message . 2. In the To field, pres s the scroll key to choose the recipients fr om Con tacts , or enter the ph on e number or e- m ail address. Scroll down to the message f ie ld. 3. To record a new sou nd cli p, press the scrol l ke y, or se lect Op t i ons > Insert sound clip > New so und cl ip . The recording start s. To use a previously recorded sound clip, select Optio ns > Inse rt sound clip > From Gallery , scroll to the sound clip, and select it. The sound clip has to be in .amr format. To play the sound clip, select Opti o ns > Play soun d clip . 4. To send the m e ssage, sele ct Optio ns > Send .
33 E-mail se ttings Before you use e-mail, you must do t he following: ⢠Configure an internet a cce ss point (I AP) correctly. See âÂÂConnection, â p. 79. ⢠Define your e-mail settings correctly. See âÂÂE-m ail settings,â p. 33. Follow the instructions given by your e-m ail service provider and internet service provider. â InboxâÂÂreceive messages Select Menu > Me ssagin g > Inbox . Wh en th e re ar e un r ea d me s sa ges i n th e i nb o x , the i co n ch a ng es t o . To open a re ceived m essage, select Me nu > Messaging > Inbox and the desir e d message. Import ant: Exercise caution when open ing mes sages. Multim edia me ssage objects may contain maliciou s software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. View multimedia objects To v iew t he lis t of media obje cts tha t ar e in cluded i n th e multi medi a mes sage, open the message, and select Opt ions > Ob je cts . You can save th e file in your phone or send it using Bluetooth technology or a s a m ultimedia message to another compatible de vice. Spec ia l message t ypes Your phone can r ece ive many kinds of messages, such as ope rator logos, business cards, calendar entries, and ringing ton e s. To open a re ceived m essage, select Me nu > Messaging > Inbox and the desir e d mes sage. You can save t he spec ial mes sage c ontent to your phone . For example , to save a re ceived calendar e ntry to the calendar , select Op tio n s > Save to Calendar . Not e: The picture messa ge function can be used only if it is supporte d by your service pr ovider. Only c ompatible device s that offer picture mess age features can re ce ive and di splay p ictu re mes sage s. The appe a ra nce o f a m es sag e m ay var y depending on th e receiving device.
34 Service m essages Service messages (network service) are notifications (for e xample, news headlines) t ha t may contain a t ext message or t he address of a browser service. For availability and s u bscription, contact your service provide r. â My f olders You can orga nize your mess ages into fo lders, c reate new fol ders, a nd rena me and delete folders. Select Menu > Me ssagin g > My fold ers . To crea te a fol der, s elect Op tion s > New folder , a nd ent er a name f or the f old er. â Mailbox Select Menu > Me ssagin g > Mailbox . Whe n you o pen M ailbox , Conne ct to mailbox? is displayed. Select Ye s to connect to your mailb ox (network service) or No to view previously retrieved e-mail messages of fline. To connect to t he mailbox afterwards, s ele ct Opti o ns > Connect . When you create a n ew mailbox, t h e name you give to t h e mailbox replaces Mailbox . You can ha ve up t o six mailb oxes. When you are online, t o end the data con nection to the remote mailbox, se lect Opt io ns > Dis conne ct . Retrieve e-mail messages from the mailbox Import ant: E xercise caution when op ening mes sages. E - mail messa ges may contain malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. 1. Sele ct Menu > Me ssaging > Mailbox > Opti o ns > Conn e ct . 2. Sele ct Op ti ons > Retrieve e-mail and from t he followin g opt ions: Ne w â to retrieve all new e-mail messages to your ph one Selected â to retrieve only the e-m ail messages t h at have be e n marked All âÂÂto re t rieve all messages from the mailbox 3. Af ter you retrieve the e-mail me ssages, you can continue viewing them on line. Select Op ti o ns > Disco nnect t o close the conne ct ion and to view the ret r ieved e-mail messages an d headings offline.
35 4. To ope n an e-mail message, select it. If the e-mail message has not been retrieved and you a re offline an d se lect Open , you are a sked if you want to re tr iev e thi s me s sa ge fro m th e m ail bo x . To vie w e-mail a ttachments, indicated w ith , select Op tio ns > At tachmen ts . You can retrie ve, open, or save attachments in su pported f orm ats. Delete e-mail messages To delete an e-mail message from the phone and retain it in the remote mailbox, select Menu > Messaging > M ailbox > Opt ions > Dele te > Phone only . Th e e-mail heading stays in your phone. To remove the heading as well, delete the e-mail m essage from your re mote mailbox first , then conn e ct your ph one to the remote mailbox t o update the stat us. To delete an e - mail from the phone and the remote mailbox, select Opti ons > Del ete > Phone and server . To cancel deletion of an e-mail from both the phone and server, s croll t o an e-mail that has be en marked to be dele t ed during th e next connection, and sele ct Opt io ns > Restore . â Out bo x The outbox folder is a temporary storage place for messages that are waiting to be sent. To access t he outbox folde r, select Men u > Messaging > Outbox . Message statuse s: Sending âÂÂThe phone is sending th e message. Waiting or Queued â The phone is waiting to send m essages or e- m ail. Resend at ... (time)âÂÂSending fa ile d. The phone trie s t o send t he message agai n after a t ime -out pe riod. To retr y se nding the me ssage immediately, se lect Opt io ns > Sen d . Defe rre d âÂÂTo put documents to be on hold while they ar e in the outbox folder, scroll t o a messa ge that is be ing sen t , a n d select Op ti ons > Defer se nding . Failed âÂÂTh e maxim um numb er of sendi ng at tempt s has be en r eached.
36 â View mes sages on the SIM card Before you ca n view SIM messages, you ne e d to copy the m to a folder in your phone. 1. Sele ct Menu > Me ssaging > Op tio ns > SI M messages . 2. Mark the mes sage s you want to copy. 3. To copy the marked m essages, select Opti ons > C opy , and the folder to w hich you want to copy the messages. â Cell broadcast You may be a ble to rece ive messages, su ch as we a ther or t raffic conditions from your ser vice pro vide r (ne twork servi ce). T o turn on th e servi ce, s ee Cell broadcast in âÂÂCell broadcas t settings,â p. 39. Select Menu > Me ssagin g > Op ti ons > Cell broadcast . A packet data conne ction ma y prevent cell broadcast re ception. â Service command editor To ente r and send service com mands (also know n as USSD commands) such a s activati on commands for network services to your service provider , select Menu > Messaging > Op ti ons > Ser vic e comman d . To se nd the comma nd, sele ct Opt io ns > Sen d . â Messaging settings Text message settings Select Menu > Me ssagin g > Op ti ons > Settings > Te xt message a n d from t h e following options: Message centres âÂÂlists a ll the defined messa ge centers Mes sage ce ntre in us e âÂÂdefines which message center is used for delivering text messages and special message t ype s such as business cards Character encoding > Full support âÂÂto select all characters in t h e message to be sent as vie wed. If you se lect Reduced support , charac ters wit h ac cents an d o the r marks m ay be converted to other characters. Receive report ( netwo rk service)âÂÂWhe n set to Ye s , the status of t he sent messa ge ( Pe nd i n g , Failed , Del iver ed ) is shown in Reports .
37 Message validity âÂÂIf the recipient of a message ca nnot be r e ached within the validity period, t he message is rem oved fr o m the message service center. Note that the n etwork must su pport this feature. Message sent as âÂÂto define how the m e ssage is sen t. Default is Te x t . Preferred connection âÂÂYo u ca n send t ext message s usin g the normal G SM net work or, if su pported by the network , packet data. Reply via same centre (net work service)âÂÂI f you select Ye s , and the re cipien t replies to your me ssage , the return m essage is se nt using the sa me message ser vice center number. Some ne t works do not pr ovide this option. Multimedia me ssaging settings Select Menu > Me ssagin g > Op ti ons > Settings > Multimedia m essage and from the f ol low i n g o p tio n s: Image size âÂÂDefine the size of the image in a multimedia message. If you select Original , the image is no t scaled. MMS cr e ation m ode âÂÂIf you sele ct Gu i ded , the phone informs you if you try to send a me ssage that may not be su pport ed by the recipient. To set the phon e to prevent you from sending messages tha t are not suppor te d, se l ect Restricte d . If you select Free , messa ge creation is not restricted, but th e recipient may n ot be able to view your message. A ccess point in use âÂÂS elect w hich acces s poin t is used a s the prefe rred c onnecti on for multime dia messaging. Multimedia retrie val âÂÂTo receive multimedia messages only when you are in your home network, select Au t o i n h om e ne t w. . To always receive multimedia messages, select Al ways au tomatic . To r etrieve messages manually, select Manual . T o n o t receive any multimedia messages or advertisements, select Off . Allow anon. msgs. âÂÂTo re ject messages comi n g from a n anonymous se n der, se lect No . Rece ive a dver ts âÂÂDefine wheth er you want to a llow reception of multimedia message adver tisements. Receive report âÂÂIf y ou want the s t atus of t he sent message ( Pe n d i n g , F aile d , or Del iver ed ) to be shown in Report s , selec t Ye s . Rece ivin g a deliv e ry report of a multimedia me ssage th a t has be e n sent t o an e-mail address may n ot be possible. Deny re port s ending > Ye s âÂÂto den y sending de livery reports
38 Message validity (network se rvice)âÂÂIf the recipient of a messa ge cannot be reached within the validity period, the message is removed fr om the multimedia message ce n ter. E-mail se ttings Sett ings for mailb oxes Select Menu > Me ssagin g > Op ti ons > Settings > E- mai l > Ma ilboxes an d a mailbox. If no mailbox set t ings have be en defined before, you are a ske d if you want t o def ine the sett ings. Con ne cti on se tt i ng s > Incomin g e-mail an d Outgoing e -mail âÂÂTo de fine the correct settings, contact you r e-mail service provider. User settin gs Select Use r se tt in gs a n d from the following settings: My n ame âÂÂEnter the name to be displayed in outgoing e-mail. Send message ( network serv ice)â To set when your e -mail mess ages a re sent , select Immediately or Dur ing nex t conn. . Send copy to se lf âÂÂSel ect Ye s to send a copy of the e-mail to the a ddress defined in My e-mail address . Include signature âÂÂSe lect Ye s to attach a si gn ature t o your e-mail m essages and to c rea te o r ed it a si gn at ur e te xt . New e- mai l al ert s â To not receive alerts about n e w e-mail, select Off . Retrie val se tting s Select Re trieval se ttings and fr om the following se ttings: E-mail to retr ieve âÂÂTo only retrieve h e aders, select Headers only . To limit how much data is retrieved, select Size limit , and enter the maximum amoun t of data per messa g e in kilobytes. To retr ieve messages and att a chments, sele ct Msgs. & attachs. . Th e Size limit an d Msgs. & attachs. opt ions are only a v ailable with POP3 mailboxes. Retrieval amount âÂÂTo limit the number of messages t o retrieve from th e inbox of the r e mo te m a ilb ox, s ele ct From Inbox > No. of e -mails and en ter th e max imum number of me ssages to retr ieve . You ca n a lso limit the number of messages to retrieve from other subscribed f o lders in From folders (only IMAP 4 mailb oxes).
39 IMAP4 folder path (only IMAP4 mail box es)â D efine t he folder pa th for IM AP4 mailboxes. Folder subs cript ions (only IMAP4 mailboxe s)âÂÂSelect the mailbox folders you want to subscribe to. To subs cribe to or unsubscribe from a folder, scr oll to it , and select Opt io ns > Subscr ibe or Cancel subscription . Autom atic retrie val Select Automa tic r etri eval a n d from the following settin gs: E- mail no tifi catio ns âÂÂTo automatically retrieve the headers t o your de vice when you receive a notification of new e-mail in your re m ote mailbox, select Auto-update or O nly in hom e netw . . E-mail retrieval âÂÂTo have e-mail headers automatically retrieved at set int ervals, select Enabled , or if you onl y wa nt head ers to be re triev ed in your ho me ne twork , select Only in home ne tw . . Headers ca n be aut omat ically re t rieved for tw o mailboxes at m ost. You ca n set on which da ys, at what times, an d h ow fre qu ently the head ers ar e retr ieved in Retrieval days , Retrieval hours , a nd Retrieval interval . E- mail no tifi catio ns and E-mail r e trieval c a n no t b e a c t i v e a t t h e s a m e t i m e . Service message settin g s Select Menu > Me ssagin g > Op ti ons > Settings > Service mess age and from the following settings: Service messages âÂÂAllow or den y t he recept ion of service m essages. Download messages âÂÂDownload messages autom a tically or manually. Cell broadcast se t tings Check with your se r vice provider whether cell broadcast ( n etwork service) is available and what the available topics and re la ted topic numbers are. Select Me nu > Messaging > Op ti on s > Se ttings > Cell broadcast and fr om the following settings: Reception âÂÂSel ect On or Off . Lang uage âÂÂSelect in which languages cell br oa dcast messages are received. T opic detection âÂÂTo automatically save pre viou sly unknown topic numbers in received cell br oa dcast messages, select On .
40 Othe r sett ings Select Menu > Me ssagin g > Op ti ons > Settings > Other and from the following setti n gs: Save sent messages â Selec t to save a c opy o f eve ry se nt t ext m essage, mu ltime dia message, or e-mail t o the Sen t folder. Number of saved msgs. âÂÂDefin e how many sen t messa ge s are saved to the sent items folder at a time. When the limit is reached, the oldest message is deleted. Memo ry in us e â S ele ct w h et he r to s av e me ssa g es to t he ph o ne me mo r y or memo ry c ard. â Mes sage re ader With Msg. reader , you ca n listen to received text, multimedia, and e-mail messages. To listen to a message in Inbox or Mailbox , scroll to the m essage or mark the messages, a nd sele ct Opt ions > Listen . To skip to the next message, scroll down. Tip : When 1 new message or New e- ma il is displayed in the standby mode, to listen to the r eceived messages, press and hold the left selection key until Msg. reader starts . 6. Cont acts You can sav e and ma nage con tact informat ion, s uch as n ames, p hone num bers, and addre sse s. â Manage contacts Select Menu > Cont act s . To add a n ew c on tact, se lect Op ti on s > Ne w c ont a ct . Fill in the fields you want, and s elec t Done . To edit a contact, scroll to it, and s e lect Opt ions > Edi t . To assign default numbers and addresse s t o a con tact, select it , and se le ct Opt io ns > De fau lts . Scroll to the de sire d default opt ion, and select Assign .
41 To copy n a mes and numbers fr om a SIM card to your ph on e, select Optio ns > SIM contacts > SIM directory . Scroll to the name you want to copy or mark t he desired names, a n d selec t Op ti o ns > Copy to Contact s . To copy a ph one , fax, or pager number fr om contacts to you r SIM card , scroll to the contact you w a nt to copy, and select Opti ons > C opy > To SIM directory . To view the l ist of fixed dia lin g numbers, select Op tions > SIM contacts > Fixed dial contacts . This s e tting is only s h own if supported by your SIM card. When fixed dialing is activat ed, calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed in to your devic e. â Manage contact groups Create a con t act group so th at you c a n send te x t or e - mail messages to s e veral re cipi ents at the s ame ti me. 1. Sele ct Menu > Cont acts . 2. Scroll to the right, and se le ct Op tion s > New group . 3. Enter a name for th e group, and select the group. 4. Sele ct Op ti ons > Add members . 5. Mark the cont acts you w ant to add to the grou p, a nd select OK . â Add a ringing t one You can se t a ringing tone ( also a vide o rin ging tone) for each contact and group. 1. Sele ct Menu > Cont acts . 2. To a dd a ri nging tone t o a co ntact , selec t the c onta ct, Op tion s > Ringi ng tone , and the desire d rin ging tone. To add a ringing t one to a group, scroll right to the groups lis t, and scroll t o a contact group. Se le ct Opt ions > R ing in g t o ne and the ringing ton e for the group. To remove t he personal or grou p ringing tone, select Def ault to ne as a rin gin g ton e . â Assign speed dialing keys Speed dialing is a quick way to ca ll frequently used numbers. Y ou can assign a phone number to the spe ed dialing keys, 2 to 9 . Th e 1 key is reserved for the ca ll mailbox. Speed dialing has t o be activa t ed before using speed dia lin g. To a ct ivate
42 the s peed diali ng, se lect Menu > Se ttin g s > Phone set t . > Ph one > Call > Speed dialling > On . 1. Sele ct Menu > Cont acts and a co ntac t. 2. Scroll to a number, and select Op ti o ns > Assign speed dial . Scroll to the desired speed dialing key, and se le ct Assi gn . When you return to th e cont a ct information view, next to the number indicates the assigned speed dial. To call t h e contact by speed dialing, in the standby mode, pre ss the spe e d dialing key and t h e call key, or press and hold the spe e d dialing key. 7. Galle ry Use G allery to save and organize your images, videos, mu sic t racks, sou nd clips, playlists, streaming links, .ram files, and presentations. Select Menu > Gallery . To op e n a fo ld e r (s uc h a s Images ), sele ct it. To open a file, select it. The file ope n s in its corresponding application. The videos you dow nload or tr a nsfer to your phone are saved in Videos . To a ccess Videos in the st andby m ode, select Vi deos , o r sele ct Menu > G allery > Videos , or select Menu > Me dia > V ideos . You can tra n sfer videos to y our ph one from a compat ible PC, and download video clips from com pa tible internet vide o se rvices to your ph one using packet da ta. â Gallery functions To set an ima ge as a w all pape r, se lect Images , and scroll to the image. Select Opt io ns > Use image > Set as wallpaper . To assi gn th e imag e to a c on tact, select Assign to con tact . To set a vide o as a video ringing tone, select V ideos , and scroll to the video. Select Opt io ns > Use vide o > Se t as rin gin g tone . To assign the vide o for a contac t, se lect Assign to con tact . To copy files to phone mem ory or to the memory card, scroll to the file or mark the files, and select Opti o ns > Organ ise > Copy to phone mem. or C opy to me mory card . To create image or video folders and m ove files to them, select I mages or Videos , and scroll t o a f ile. Se lect Op t io ns > Organise > New fol der and the memory, and
43 ente r a name for t he folder . M ark th e fil es you wan t to mov e to the f ol der, and select Op ti ons > O rganise > Mov e t o fo ld er and t he fo lder. View vide os and images When you are viewing videos or st ill images in the phone mode, you can act ivate the video vie w mode. Turn the l ower part of th e phon e 90 degrees to t h e left so that the camera le ns is pointing away from you. I n video view mode the display automatically changes to la ndscape, and you can put the phone on the t able, for example, w hile viewing. To view the next or previous still images, press the f a st forward or rewind med ia k ey. To fast f o rward or rewind t h e video, press the fa st forward or rew ind m edia key. To play or paus e the video, pre ss the pla y/pa use/stop media key. To s top the video, press and h old t he play/pause/stop me dia key. Edi t images To edit image s in Gall ery , sc roll to the image, and select Op tion s > Ed i t . To crop an image, select Opti o ns > Apply e ffect > Crop . To crop the image size manually, select Manual or a prede fin ed aspect ra t io from the list . If you select Man ual , a cr oss appears in the upper le ft corner of t he image. Scroll to sele ct the area to crop, and select Se t . Another cross a ppe ars in the lower right corner. Again select th e area to be croppe d. To a dju st the firs t selected are a , select Ba ck . Th e selected areas f orm a rectangle, w h ich forms the croppe d image. If you select ed a pred efined aspec t rati o, se lect the upper l eft co rner o f the a rea to be cropped. To resize the highlighted area, use the scroll key. To freeze the se lected area , press th e scr oll key. T o move the a rea w ithin the pi cture , u se the scroll ke y. To sele ct the a re a to be cr oppe d, press t he scroll key. To reduce rednes s of th e eyes in an ima ge, selec t Op ti o ns > Apply effect > Re d eye reduct ion . M ove the cross onto the eye, and press the scroll key. A loop appears on the display. T o re size t h e loop to fi t the size of t he eye, s croll u p, down, left, or right. To reduce the redness, press t he scroll key. Shortcuts in the image editor: ⢠To view a n i mage in the f ull scr een, press * . To r etu rn to th e nor mal v iew, pr ess * aga in . ⢠To rotate an ima ge clockwise or coun terclockwise, pres s 3 or 1 .
44 ⢠To zoom in or out , press 5 or 0 . ⢠To move on a zoomed image, scroll up, down, left, or r ight . Edi t videos To edit videos in Gallery and cre at e custom vide o clips, scroll t o a video clip, a nd select Op ti ons > V ideo editor > Opt ions > Edit video clip . In the video editor you can see two timelines: video clip t imeline and sound clip timeline. The images, t e xt, and transitions a dded to a vide o are shown on the video clip timeline. To switch between the timelines, scroll up or down. Modify video To modify the vide o, select from t he following Edit video clip options: Cut âÂÂTrims the video clip in the cu t video clip view. Add colour e ffe ct âÂÂInserts a color effect on the vide o clip. Use slow motion âÂÂSlows the speed of the vide o clip. Mu te s ound or Unmute sound â Mutes or unmutes the original vide o clip sound. Mo ve âÂÂMo ves th e vid eo cl ip t o the s elec ted lo catio n. Adjust volume âÂÂAdju sts t he volume level. Remove âÂÂRemoves the video clip from the video. Duplicate âÂÂMakes a copy of t h e selected video c li p. Ed it text (shown only if you added te x t)âÂÂTo move, rem ove , or duplicate t e xt; change the color and style of the text; de fine how long it st a ys on the scre en; a nd ad d eff ects t o th e tex t. Edit image (shown only if you added a n image)âÂÂTo move, remove, or du plica te an image; define h ow long it stays on th e scre e n; and se t a backgrou n d or a color effect to the image . Edit sound clip (shown only if you have a dde d a sound clip)âÂÂTo cut or m ove the sound clip, to adjust its length , or to remove or duplicate the clip. Edi t tra ns iti on âÂÂThere are t h ree types of t ransitions : at the start of a video, a t the end of a vide o, and transitions between video clips. You can select start t ransition when the firs t transition of the video is active. Insert âÂÂSel ect V ideo clip , I mage , Text , Soun d clip , o r New sound clip . Mo vie âÂÂP revie w the movie in the full screen or a s a t humbnail , sa ve or send th e movie, or cut the movie to a proper size f or sending it in a multimedia me ssage.
45 To take a sn apshot of a video clip, in the cut video vie w , select Opti on s > Ta k e snapshot . In the thumbnail preview view, press the scroll key, and select Take snapshot . To save your video, select Opti ons > Mo vie > Save . To d efine the Memory in use , select Op ti ons > Se ttings . To send t h e video, select Se nd > Via multimedia , Via e-m a il , Via Bluetooth , or Via infrared . Contact your service provider for de tails of the maximum multimedia message size that you can send. If your vide o is too large to send in a multimedia message, appears. Transf e r vide os from PC To transfe r videos from a compatible PC, us e a compatible USB ca ble or Bluetooth connectivity. The requ ire ments of the PC for video transfe r: ⢠Microsoft Windows XP operat ing system (or later) ⢠Nokia PC Suite 6.82 or la ter ⢠Nokia Video Manager application (a add-on application to PC Su ite) To transfer videos use N okia Video M anager, connect the com patible USB ca ble or activate Bluetooth con n ection, and select PC Su i te a s the connection m ode. To change t h e default USB con nection mode, select Menu > Settings > Connectivity > USB > USB mode . Nokia Video Man ager is optimized for transcoding and t ransferring video files. For information about tra n sferring video with Nokia V i deo Manager, se e the Nokia Video Manager help. Download files Select Menu > Gallery , the f older for t he file type you want to down load, and the download function (for example, Images > Downl. graphics ). T he browser open s. Choose a bookmark f or the site to dow n load from .
46 8. Musi c p lay er Warning: L i sten to m usic at a moderate lev el. Continuous ex posure to high vo lume m a y d a m a g e y o u r h e a r i n g . D o n o t ho l d t h e d e v i c e n e a r y o u r e ar w h e n t he loudspea ker is in use, beca use the volum e may be extreme ly loud. To activ ate music m ode a nd star t Music playe r , turn the lower par t of the phone to the right so that the playback control keys a re on t he same side as t h e display. You can li sten to mus ic al so when the Offline pr o file is activated. See âÂÂOffline profile,â p. 17. To add songs t o you r device, see âÂÂTransfer music,â p. 48. For more information about copyright protecti on , see â Activation keys,â p. 98. â Listen to music 1. A cti va te th e m u sic m o de . 2. In Music me nu , select th e category, such a s All son gs or Alb ums . 3. Se lect the music you w a nt to play. Use the media ke ys to control p layback. ⢠Press the play/pause/stop key to play or pause a song. Press and hold th e key to stop the playba ck. ⢠Press t he rewind key to rewind the song or to skip backwards. ⢠Press t he fast for ward key to fast for ward the song or to skip forward. You can also us e the scroll ke y t o control th e player. To adjust the volu m e, use the volume ke y. To switch random play ( ) on or off, select Opt io ns > Shu ffle . To re pe at the cu rrent song ( ), all songs ( ), or to switch re pe at off, select Opt io ns > Repeat . To modify the tone of the music playback, select Opti o ns > Equ aliser . To modify the bala n ce loudness or st e reo widening, sele ct Opt io ns > Audio settings . To view a visualization during playba ck, select Opti ons > Start visualisation . To retu rn to t h e standby mode and le a ve the player in t h e background, pre ss the end ke y. I f Active st andby is On , the cu r rently playing song is displayed in the
47 standby mode. To access the music player from the st a ndby mode, se le ct the currently playing s on g. To switch t o a nother open application, pres s and hold Menu . â Music menu To selec t more mus i c to pl ay in N ow playing view, select Opti ons > Go t o Mu si c menu . To return to the Now p la yi ng view, select Op tion s > Go t o Now playing . The music menu sh ow s the music available in t he phone and compatible memory card (i f inserted). All s ong s lists a ll music. To vie w sorted songs, se lect Alb ums , Artist s , Genres , or Com posers . To view playlists, select Playlists . To re fresh t he l ib rar y afte r you have upda ted the song se lect ion in your pho ne, select Op ti ons > Re fresh Music libr ary . â Playlists To view and manage playlists, in the music menu, select Playlists . The following playlists appear a u tomatically: Most played tracks , R ecently played songs , and Recent additions . To view details of t he playlist, select Opti o ns > Playlist de tails . Creat e a p lay list 1. Sele ct Op ti ons > Create playlis t . 2. Enter a na me for the pl aylist, an d select OK . 3. Sele ct art ists to fi nd the songs y ou want to include in t he pla ylis t. Press th e scroll key to add items. T o show t he song l ist unde r an artist title , scroll right. To hide the song list, scroll left. 4. Whe n you have made your selections, se lect Done . I f a compatible memo ry card is inserted, the playlist is saved t o the memory card. To add more songs later, when viewing the playlist, select Op tion s > Add s ongs . To add songs , album s, artis t s, genres, a nd composers t o a playlist from the dif feren t vi ews of the m usic m enu, se lect an it em and Optio ns > Add t o a playlist > Saved playlist or N e w playlist . To remove a song from a playlist, select Opti on s > Remo ve fr om play list . T hi s deletion does not delete the song from the phone ; it on l y removes it fr om the playlist.
48 To re orde r songs in a playlist, scroll to the song you want t o move, a nd select Opt io ns > Reorde r list > Grab , scroll to a new position, and select Drop . â Mu sic sh op In th e music sh op (network service ) you can search, browse, and pu rch ase m usic for downloading to your phone . The v a riety and appearance of mu sic sh op service s may vary. For m ore information and availability of m u sic shop, contact you r service provider. You must have music shop se ttings and valid internet connections in order t o u se this service. For more details, see â Music shop settin gs, â p. 48, and â Acce ss points,â p. 79. To go to mu sic sh op, in t he Music playe r , select Op ti o ns > Go to M usic shop . Music shop se t tings The availability and appearance of the music shop settings may vary. The settings ma y a ls o b e pr ed efin ed , an d y o u can n o t e di t th em. In the music sh op, you may be able to edit th e settings by se lecting Optio ns > Se ttin gs . If the se t tings are not pre def ined, you may be a sked to enter th e following setti n gs: Addre ss â You must de fin e the w e b address of t he music shop service . Default acc. pt. âÂÂSel e ct t he ac ce ss po in t to us e w h en co nn ec tin g to th e mu si c shop. User nam e âÂÂEnte r your user name for the musi c shop. Pa s s w o r d âÂÂEnter your pass w ord for t he music s h op. If Us er nam e an d P assword fie ld s are left em pty, y ou may have to en ter them at login. â Tr a n s f e r m us i c You can buy music protected with WMDRM from online music shops, and transfer the mu s ic to y our p ho ne . To transfe r m usic from a compatible PC or ot he r compatible devices, u se a compa tib le USB ca ble or Bluet ooth c onnectiv ity. You can also use IR conn ection.
49 For det a ils, see âÂÂB lu etooth connection,âÂÂ, p. 84, or âÂÂInfrare d,â p. 93. You ca nnot transfe r WMDRM protected music files usin g Blue tooth or I R connection. To re fresh t he l ib rar y afte r you have upda ted the song se lect ion in your pho ne, in the Musi c menu , s e lec t Optio ns > Refresh Music lib rary The requ ire ments of t h e PC for music purchase and tr a nsfer: ⢠Microsoft Windows XP operat ing system (or later) ⢠Compatible version of Windows Me dia Player application ⢠Nokia PC Suite 6.82 or la ter Transfer music f rom PC You can us e thre e diff eren t met hods to tran sfer mus ic: ⢠To view your ph one on a PC as an e xternal hard drive w here you can tra n sfer any data files, m a ke the connection with a compatible USB cable or Blu e tooth connectivity. If you are usin g the USB cable, sele ct Da t a tr an sf er as the connection mode. A comp atible memo ry car d needs to be ins erted in th e phon e. You c anno t transfer WMDRM protected m usic files u sing D ata tr an sfe r . ⢠To synchronize music with Win dows Media Player, connect the compatible USB cable and select Media player as t h e connection mode. A compatible memo ry ca rd need s to be ins ert ed in the pho ne. ⢠To u se Nokia Music Manager in Nokia PC Suite, conn e ct the compatible USB cable or a ctivate Blue tooth connection , and select PC Suit e a s the connecti on mode. Y ou cannot transfer WMDRM prot e cted music files usin g PC Su ite . To change t h e default USB con nection mode, select Menu > Settings > Connectivity > USB > USB mode . Both Windows Media Player and Nokia Music Manager in Nokia PC Suite have been opti m ized f or transferri ng music files. For informa t ion a bout tra n sferring music with Nokia Music Ma nager, see t he Nokia PC Suite user guide . Music tr ansfer with Windows Me dia Player The fun ct ionality of the mu sic synchr on ization may vary be tween different versions of t he Windows Media Pla yer application. For mor e information, see t h e corresponding Windows Media Player gu ide s and helps.
50 9. Media â Visual Radio You can us e the Visual Radio appl icatio n as a n F M radio with automa tic tu ning and preset st a tions or with pa rallel visual information r e lated to the ra dio program if you tune in to st a tions that offer Visual Radio se rvice. T he Visual Ra dio se rvice us es packe t data (n etwork serv ice). To use t h e Visual Radio se rvice , th e following require m ents must be m et: ⢠The radio st ation and your se rvice provider m ust support this service. ⢠Your intern e t access poin t must be de fin ed for acce ss to the network operatorâÂÂs V isual Radio se rver. ⢠The radio station m ust have the cor rect Visual Radio service ID de fined and have Visual Radio se rvice enabled. Visual Radio ca nnot be started wh e n the phone is in t he offline m ode. The FM radio depends on an antenna other than the wir eless device antenna. A compa tible headset or enhanc ement needs to be attache d to the device for th e FM radio to function properly. Warning: L i sten to m usic at a moderate lev el. Continuous ex posure to high vo lume m a y d a m a g e y o u r h e a r i n g . D o n o t ho l d t h e d e v i c e n e a r y o u r e ar w h e n t he loudspea ker is in use, beca use the volum e may be extreme ly loud. You can make a call or answer an incoming call while listening to the radio. The radio is muted when there is an active call. To open Vi su al Radio, select Men u > Me dia > R adio . To turn t he radio off , select Exit . Tune a nd save a r a dio st ation To start t h e station search w hen the radio is on, s e lect or . Searching stops when a station is found. T o save the station, select Op tio n s > Save station . S e lec t a locat io n for th e st ation . En ter t he nam e of the st ation , an d sel ect OK . Radi o functi ons To adjust th e volume, pres s t he volume ke ys. Select or to s croll to the next or pr e vious saved station. The buttons are inactive if th ere are no sa ved s tations.
51 Whe n usin g a co mpatib le he adset, pres s th e hea dset key to sc roll t o th e next saved radio station. To save th e cur re nt stati on, select Opti ons > Save station , a preset position, and ent er th e st at io n n am e . To s et the stat ion fr equency manuall y, sel ect Optio ns > Ma nual tuni ng . To listen t o the radio in t h e background and go t o the st a ndby mode, select Opt io ns > Play in backgrou n d . Station l ist When the radio is on, select Op ti ons > Station s . The station list is used for managing the saved r a dio stations. Stat ion s etup Scroll to a s t ation in the station list, pr e ss the scroll key, and select Edi t to ch an ge the s t at i on p ar a me te rs . View visu al co nten t To check availability a n d costs, and to s u bscribe to the service, cont a ct your service provider. To view visu a l content of t he curre nt stat io n, select . If the visual se rvice ID was not saved in the station list, you are asked f or t he visual service ID. Enter t he visua l service ID, a nd sele ct OK . If you do n ot have the visual servic e ID, select Retri eve to a ccess the station directory (n e twork service) . To e nd th e v isua l con te nt f ee d b ut n o t the FM rad io , sele c t Close . To set ligh t settings a nd the power save r ti me-out, se le ct Op tion s > Di spla y settings . Visual Radio setti n gs When the radio is on, select Op ti ons > Settings and t he following: Start-up tone âÂÂto e nable or disable the st art-up tone Auto- start service â t o enable or disable t he automatic display of visual content Acces s poin t âÂÂto sele ct the a ccess point
52 Stat ion direct or y With the station dire ctory (ne t work service) you can select Visual Radio enabled or traditional radio stations from a list, grou pe d in folders. To check availability a n d costs, and to s u bscribe to the service, cont a ct your service provider. Ac cess fro m the visua l c ontent vi ew To re t rieve t he visual se rvice ID a nd to st art visual conten t for t he currently tuned radio sta t ion, select and Retrieve . A fte r t he c on ne cti on to t he st at io n directory is established, sele ct the ne arest location to your current position from a list of f olders, and pre ss the scroll key. The device compares the frequen cie s of the listed radio stations with the curren t ly tune d in f requenc y. If a matchi ng frequ ency is found , the visual s ervice I D of the tuned radio st a tion is displayed. Se le ct OK to start viewing the visual content. If there is m ore than on e radio station with matching fr equ encies, t h e radio stations and their visual service ID are displa yed in a list. Select the des ire d radio s t ation. The tuned radio s t ation and the vis u al service ID are displayed. Select OK to start view i ng the visual content. Acce s s fr om option s To access the station di rectory (network service) from the station list, se lect Opt io ns > Station dire ct ory . Aft e r t he c o nne c tio n to th e st at io n di re c tor y , se lec t th e n ea res t loc a tio n to y ou r current position from a list of loca tions. Radio stations that provide visual content a re indicated with . Select the des ire d radio station a nd from the follow in g options: Listen âÂÂto tune to the high lig hted ra dio st ation. To co nfirm th e f requency sett ing, select Yes . Start visual service â to open the visual content of the sele cted radio stat ion (if avai lab le) Save âÂÂt o save the de tails of the selected radio station to the st a tion list Deta il s âÂÂt o view chann el infor mation
53 â Camera To activat e the camera mode w hile in the phone mode , turn th e lower part of t he phone 90 degrees t o the left so th at th e camera lens is point in g away from you when you look at t he display. T o take a s elf portrait, turn t he lower part of the phone 90 degrees to th e right so th at the camera le ns is pointing toward you when you look at t he display. on the upper lef t of the display indicat es the still image mode. To capture an imag e, press t he capture key. You can also capt ur e an image by pressing t he scroll ke y. Th e image i s saved to Images in Galle ry , and the image is displayed. To return to the viewfinder, s elect Back . T o del ete the im age , pres s the clear key. To zoom in or out, press th e fast forw a rd or re w ind media key. To capture images se quentially, s elect Op tio ns > Se qu ence mode > On . When you press t he scroll ke y, t he camera c aptures six images in sh ort in tervals and displays the ima ges in a grid. To t urn the fla sh on, s elect Opti o ns > Flash > On . If you s ele ct Au tomati c , flash is us ed aut omatic ally when n eces sary. Keep a s a fe dist a nc e when usi ng the flas h. D o not use th e flash on people o r a nima ls at close ra nge . Do no t c ov er t h e fl a sh wh il e tak i ng a p i ct ur e . In dim lighting, t o u se night mode, select Op tio ns > Night mode > On . To us e t he self- timer , sele ct Op tio ns > Self-timer and t he tim e you want the camera to wait bef ore capturing t he image. Press t he scroll key, and the timer starts. To adjust the white balance or color tone, select Op tio ns > Ad jus t > White balance or Colour tone . To record a vide o, se lect Opt ions > Vide o mode , or scroll right. on the upper left of th e display indicates t he video mode. T o start the r e cording, press t he capture ke y or the scroll key. To pause the re cording, pr e ss the ca pt ure key. To stop t h e recording, pre ss and hold the capture ke y. To use the pa norama mode, select Opti o ns > P anorama mode , or scroll right. on the u ppe r left of the display indicates the panorama mode . Press t h e capture key to start capturing a panorama image. The panorama preview is shown on the display. Tur n slowly to the right or le ft. You cannot ch a nge the direct ion . You turn t oo fast if the arrow on the displa y is re d. To stop t h e panorama, pres s the capt ure key again .
54 Came ra settings Your device supports an ima ge capture resolution of 1600 x 1200 pixels . You can change camera settings f or still images. In the camera mode, select Opt io ns > Settings > Image a nd from the following settings: Image quality and I mage resolution âÂÂThe better the image quality and t he higher the resol utio n, th e mo re memory th e image consum es. Show captured image âÂÂTo not displa y t he im age after capturing, select No . Default image name âÂÂC ha nge ho w th e ca p tu r ed i m ag es ar e n am ed . Memo ry in us e âÂÂSel ect whe ther y ou wa nt to save yo ur i mages in the phone memo ry or on the memo ry car d. You can change came ra settings for videos. In the ca mera mode, se le ct Op tion s > Se ttin gs > Vi de o and from the following se ttings: Lengt h âÂÂIf s et to Max i m um , the length of t he recorded video is only restricte d by the avai lable memory . If set to Short , the recording time is optimized for MMS sending. Video resolution âÂÂSelect the vide o resolution. Default video name âÂÂSe lect how th e vide o cl ips ar e named . Memo ry in us e âÂÂSelect whether you want t o save your video clips in t he phone memo ry or on the memo ry car d. â Movie director A muvee is a s hort, ed ited vide o clip that can contain vide o, images, music, and text. Qu ick muvee is cre a ted automatically by Movie director aft e r you se le ct the st yle f or the m uvee . Movie director us es th e defa ult mus ic a nd text assoc iate d with the chose n style. In a cu stom muvee you can s ele ct your own vide o and music clips, im ages and style, and add a n opening and closing message. You ca n se nd muvees wit h MMS . A muvee can be saved in Gallery in .3gp file fo rmat. To create mu vees, select Menu > Medi a > Movi e . Mark images and videos, a n d select Op ti ons > Cre ate muvee .
55 Create a quic k muve e 1. To create a quick muvee, se lect Menu > Media > Movi e . Select the videos for the muvee, and scroll right to select t he images, and select Op tion s > Cr eate muve e . 2. Sele ct a st yle for t he muve e fr om the style list. Create a cus tom m uvee 1. To create a a cus t om muvee, select Menu > Media > Mov ie . Select the videos for the muvee, and scroll right to s elect the images, and select Op ti ons > Create muvee . The style se l ection view opens. 2. Scroll to the desired style , and se lect Opt io ns > Customise . 3. In Videos & images , reorder and edit the selected items, or add or remove items from your muvee. You can define the order in w hich the files are played in t he muvee. Select the file you want to move . Scroll to the file below which you want to place t he marked file, and pr ess the scroll ke y. To a dd or re m ove images a nd videos from the mu vee, select Op ti ons > A dd/Re move . In Music , se lect t he music for th e mu ve e. To add albums and thei r con tent to t h e muvee, in the image or vide o clip list view, select Op tion s > Alb ums . In Me ssage you ca n add an open in g and closing text to a muvee. In Len gt h , you can define t he length of t h e muvee. Select from t he following: Multime dia message âÂÂto op timize the l ength of t he muve e for MMS s ending Auto -selec t âÂÂto include all the selected images and video clips in the muvee Same as music âÂÂto set the muvee du ration to be the s a me as the c hose n music clip User define d âÂÂto define t he length of the m uvee 4. Sele ct Op ti ons > Create m uve e . The pre vie w view opens. 5. To preview the custom muvee befor e saving it, select Opti o ns > Play . 6. To save the muvee, se lect Opti o ns > Save . To cre a te a new custom m uvee by u sing th e same st yle settings, sele ct Opti ons > Recreate .
56 Sele ct content To edit the selected video clips, in t he Videos & images folder, select Opti on s > Select contents . You ca n select which parts of the video clip you want to in clude or exclu de in the mu vee. In th e slide , gr een ind icate s inc luded , red i ndic ates excluded, and gre y in dicates n e utral parts. To include a part of the video clip in the muvee, scr oll to the part, and se le ct Opt io ns > In clude . T o exc lude a pa rt, se lect Opti ons > Ex cl ude . T o excl ude a shot, select Op ti ons > Exc lude sh ot . To let Movie dir ector randomly include or e x clude a certain pa rt of t he video clip, scroll t o the pa rt , and se lect Opt ions > Mark as ne utra l . To randomly include or exclude parts of t h e clip, select Opt io ns > Mark all as neu tral . Sett ings In the s tyle selection vie w, select Optio ns > Customise > Settings t o edit the following options: Memo ry in us e âÂÂSelect where to s a ve your muvees. Resolution â Select the resolution of your muvees. Select Automa t ic to u se the optimal resolution ba sed on the nu m ber and length of the vide o clips you have select e d. Defaul t muve e name âÂÂSe t a de fault name f or the m uvees. â Videos To access t he videos folder in Gallery , s elect Menu > Me di a > V i deos . â Recorde r The voice r e corder allows you to record phone conversations and voice me mos. If you record a phone conversation, all pa rties he ar a beeping sound du ring recording. Recorded files are stored in Gallery . S ee âÂÂGal lery ,â p. 4 2. Select Menu > Me dia > Re co rd er . To record a sound clip, select Opti o ns > Recor d sound clip , or select . To listen to th e recording, select . â RealPlayer With RealPlayer, you can play m e dia files such a s video clips sa ve d in the phone memory or memory ca rd, or stre a m media files over the air by open ing a st reaming
57 link. RealPlayer does not su pport all file formats or all t he variations of file formats. To open RealPlayer, select Menu > Media > RealPlayer . To pla y a media file , select Opt io ns > Open > Most recent clips or Saved clip . To s tr e am con t en t ov e r t he a ir : ⢠Select a streaming link saved in the gallery. ⢠Open a streaming link while browsing th e web. To st ream l iv e conten t, yo u must first co nfigure your de fault access point. See â Access points, â p. 79. Co ntact yo ur ser vice prov ider for more informa tion. In RealPlayer, you can only open a n rtsp:// URL address. You cannot open an http:// URL address; how ever, RealPlayer recognizes a n http link to a .ram file since a .ram file is a text file con taining an rtsp link. Warning: Do not hold the device nea r your ea r when the loud s peak er is in use, because t he v olume may b e extremely lo ud. With RealPlayer, you can play m e dia files such a s video clips sa ve d in the phone memory or memory ca rd, or stre a m media files over the air by open ing a st reaming link. To open RealPlayer, se lect Menu > Medi a > Re alPlayer . RealPlayer does n ot support all file for mat s or a ll t he variations of f i le form a ts. Play media file s To play a media file in RealPlayer, select Opt io ns > Open and from the following: Most recent clips â to play media files t h at you have recently pla yed Saved clip âÂÂto play m edia files saved in the phone or me mory card To s tr e am con t en t ov e r t he a ir : ⢠Select a streaming link saved in the gallery. A connection to the streaming ser ver is esta blis hed. ⢠Open a streaming link while browsing th e web. To st ream l iv e conten t, yo u must first co nfigure your de fault access point. See â Acce ss points,â p. 79. Many service provid ers re quire y ou to use an int ernet a ccess point ( IAP ) fo r your default acce ss poin t. Other se rvice providers a llow you to use a WAP access point. Contact your service provider f or m ore information.
58 In RealPlayer, you can only open a n rtsp:// URL address. You cannot open an http:// URL address; how ever, RealPlayer recognizes a n http link to a .ram file since a .ram file is a text file con taining an rtsp link. Warning: Do not hold the device nea r your ea r when the loud s peak er is in use, because t he v olume may b e extremely lo ud. Shortc uts during play Scroll up t o se ek forw a rd or down t o se ek back in t h e media file. Press t h e volume keys to increase or decrease the sound volume. â Flash Play er With Flash Pla yer , you can view, play, and interact with flash files made for mobile devices. Select Menu > Me dia > Flash Player . To open a folder or play a flash file , select it. 10 . P e r s o n a l i z a t i o n â Themes To change t h e look of your phone displa y, activate a theme. A theme can in clu de the standby mode wallpaper and powe r saver. You can edit a theme to personalize your phone furth e r. Select Menu > P ersonalis. > Themes . To see a lis t o f t he available t hemes, select General . The act ive theme is indicated by a che ck m ark. To previe w a theme , scro ll to t he theme , and sel ect Opt io ns > Preview . To ac tiv a te the previ ewed t heme, sele ct Set . In Them es , you can also set the menu view type, se t a custom w allpaper, and personalize the l ook of the pow er saver. Audi o theme To apply or e dit an audio theme, se le ct Menu > P ersonalis. > Th eme s > Audio them es . To apply an audio t h eme, select Act ive au dio theme and the desir ed the me.
59 You can per sonal ize t he sound s ass o c iated w ith an event or fu nction . To s av e th e p ers o na li z ed t hem e, i n t he A udio themes main view, select Opt io ns > Sa ve th em e and enter a nam e for the th eme. â Profiles In Profiles , you can adjust and personalize the phone tones for different events, environments, or caller groups. You can see t he currently se le cted profile at t he top of t h e display in the st andby mode. If the Ge neral prof ile is in u se, only the cur ren t date is s hown. Select Menu > P ersonalis. > Profiles . To activate t h e profile, sele ct the profile and Ac ti v a t e . Tip: To quickly change to Silent profile from any other profile , in the standby mode , press a nd hold # . To personalize a profile , select the profile, P ersonalise and from t he follow ing options: Ring ing tone âÂÂTo set the ringing tone for voice calls, choose a ringing tone from the list. Pre ss a n y key to stop t h e sound. You can also change ringing tones in contacts. See â Add a ringing tone,â p. 41. Video call tone âÂÂSelect th e ringi n g tone for video calls. Say caller's name âÂÂSe lect On to h av e th e p h on e s ay th e ca ll er âÂÂs na me wh e n t he phone is ringing. Ringing type âÂÂW he n As c e n d ing is selected, the ringing volume starts from level one and increases level by leve l t o the set volume level. Ringing volume âÂÂSet the volume level for the r in ging and message alert tones. Message alert tone âÂÂS et th e alert tone for t ext a nd mul timedi a me ssages. E-mail alert to ne âÂÂSet the ale rt tone for e-ma il mes sages. Vibrating alert âÂÂS et the p hone to vi brat e to a lert for i ncomin g call s an d mes sages. Ke ypad t ones âÂÂSet the volume level for keypad tones. War n in g t o n e s â Activate or deactivate warning tones. Ale rt for â Set the phone to r ing on ly upon calls f rom phone numbers t h at belong to a sele ct ed contact grou p. Phone calls comi n g from people outside the se lected group have a sile nt a lert.
60 Profile name âÂÂName the profile. This setting is not s h own for the Ge neral an d Offline profiles. When using t he O ffline profile , the phone is not con nected to the GSM network. If no SIM card is insta lled, to us e some functions of t he phone, start th e phone in Offline . Import ant: In the offline profile you can not make or receive any calls, or use other features tha t require cellula r network cov erage. Calls may still be poss ible to the official emergency num ber programmed into your device. To make calls, you must first activ ate the phone functio n by changing profiles. If the device has been locked, enter t he lock co de. â 3-D tones With 3-D to nes you c an appl y thr ee-di mensiona l sou nd effec ts to ringin g tones . Not all ringing tones support 3-D effects. To edit 3-D tone settings, sele ct Menu > P ersonalis. > 3-D t ones . To en able the 3 -D e ffects, sele ct 3- D t o ne s > On . T o ch ange the rin gi ng tone, select R inging t one and the des ired ringing tone. To change the 3-D effect that is a pplied to the ringing tone, select Sound tra je cto ry and the desir e d effect. To m odify the effect, sele ct Tr aj ect o r y s p ee d , Doppler effect , o r Reverberation . D oppler effect m a y not be available for all effect s. To l is te n to th e r in gi n g to ne w ith th e 3 -D ef fec t , sel ec t Opt ions > Pl ay t on e . If you ena ble the 3-D tones b ut do n ot se lect a ny 3-D effect , ster eo wi dening is applied to the ringing tone. 11 . W e b â Mobi le Sear c h Use Mobile Search to get access to search engines, and fin d and connect to loca l services, websites, images, and mobile content. You can use t h e application to find and ca ll local restaurants and sh ops, and use t he advanced mapping technology to assi s t you in finding their loca t ion. Select Menu > Web > Se arch .
61 When you open Mobile Searc h , a list of ca tegories is dis pla yed. Select a ca tegory (f or exa mple, images ), a nd ente r your text into the search field . Sel ect Search . The search re sults are dis pla yed on the screen. For additional h elp and instruct ion s on t h e application, select Opti ons > Help . For more informa tion on the application, vis it a lso ww w.mobilesearch.nokia.com/. â We b To browse web pages wr itten in XHTML, WM L, or HTML, select Men u > We b > Browse r , or pre ss and hold 0 in the standby mode . Check the availability of se rvices, pricing, and tariffs with you r se rvice provider. Service pr ovide rs also gi ve you instruct ions on how to u se thei r services. Set up the phon e for the bro w ser ser vice Your device may con figu re the WAP or in ternet acc e ss point automatically ba se d on your SI M card. You can us e Settings wizard to configure W AP or internet access point settings. See âÂÂSettin gs wizard,â p. 8 1 . You may receive servic e settings in a configuration message from the ser vice provider. To define a n access poin t manually, see A ccess points in â Connec tion,â p. 79. Make a connection To access w eb pages, do t he following: ⢠Select the home pa ge ( ) of your service provider. ⢠Select a bookm a rk from t he bookmarks view . ⢠In the bookmarks view , en t er the addre ss of the web page, a nd select Go t o . Bookmarks Your device may have prein stalled bookmarks and links for third- party internet sites. You may al so acc ess othe r third-p arty sites th ro ugh you r device. Th ird-pa rty si tes are not affiliated with Nokia, and Nok ia does not endorse or assume liability for them . If you choose to acces s such sites, yo u sh ould t ake preca utio ns for security or conten t. Bookmarks are indicat ed by the following icons: Th e starting pa ge defined f or t he defa ult access poin t.
62 The automatic bookma rks folder contains bookmarks ( ) that are colle ct ed automatically when y o u browse pages. Any bookmark showing t h e titl e or int e rnet address of the bookmark. and m ay be replaced w it h the websit e âÂÂs icon. Add boo k marks manu ally 1. In the bookmarks view, select Opti ons > B ookmark manager > Add bookmark . 2. Fill in the fields. 3. Sele ct Op ti ons > Save . Send bookmark s Scroll to a bookmark or mark several bookmarks, s ele ct Op tion s > Tools > Send and an option. Co nnection se curity If the security indicator is displayed during a connection, the data transmission between the device a nd the internet gateway or server is encrypted. The security icon does not indicate that the data transmiss ion between the gateway and the cont ent serv er (or pla ce where t he reques ted resou rce is s t ored) is secu re. The s ervice provider secures the data tra nsmission between the gateway and the conten t server. To view details a bou t the connecti on , encryption s t atus, and informat io n about ser ve r a ut h enti ca tion , se l ect Op ti o ns > Tools > P age info . Securit y features ma y be requir ed for some ser vices, such a s bank ing services. For such connect ions you need security cer tificat es. For more information, conta ct your service provider. See also â Certificate management,â p. 75. Browse web p a ges Keys a nd co mm ands f or browsing To open a link, make selections, or check box e s, press th e scroll key. To go to t h e previous page while browsing, se lect Back . I f Back is not available, select Op ti ons > N avigation options > Hist or y t o view a ch ronological list of the pages visite d du ring a browsin g se ssion. To ch oose the desired page, scroll le ft or right, an d se lect it. T he history list is cleare d each time a session is close d. To save a bookmark while brow sing, selec t Opt io ns > Save as bookmark .
63 To r et r iev e the l a te st co nt en t fro m the s e rve r , se l ect Op ti on s > Navigation options > Reload . To open t h e browser toolbar, scroll to an empty part of t he page, a nd press t he scroll key. Keypa d shor tcuts w hile br owsin g 1 âÂÂOpen your bookmarks. 2 âÂÂSearch for keyw ords in the cur re nt page. 3 âÂÂRe turn t o the p revi ous pag e. 5 âÂÂList all open windows. 8 âÂÂShow the page overview of the current page. Pre ss 8 again t o zoo m i n an d vi ew the desire d se ction of t he page. 9 âÂÂEnt er a new web addres s. 0 â Go to th e st ar t pa ge . * or # âÂÂZoom the pa ge in or out. Mi ni ma p Min i ma p helps you navigate web pages t hat contain large amount of information. Set Min i ma p on in browser settings. Se e âÂÂBrowser se t tings,â p. 6 5. Scroll through a large we b page, and Min i m ap opens and displays an ove rview of the web page you are browsing. To move in Mi ni map , scroll. When you stop scrolling, Mini map disappears and t he area outlined in Min i map is dis played. Page overview With P age o ver view , you can move m ore qu ickly to the des ired part of a web page. Page overview may not be a vailable on all pages. To show the page overview of t h e current page, press 8 . To find the desi re d spot on the page, scroll up or down . Press 8 aga in to z oom in and view the desir e d section of the page. Web feeds and blo g s Web feeds a re .xml files on w eb pages tha t are widely use d t o share t he latest entr y headlines or full text , for exa mple, recent news in th e form of news fe eds. Blogs or we b logs are web diaries. Most of the web feeds use RSS a nd ATOM technologies.
64 The browser a utomatically detects if a web page cont a ins web fee ds. To subscribe to a w eb fe ed , sel e ct Opti ons > Su bscribe and a fe ed, or click on the link. To view the web fe eds you have subs cribed to, in the bookmark s vie w, select Web feeds . To update a web fe ed, select it, and Opti ons > Re fresh . To define how the web fee ds are updated, select Optio ns > Settings > We b f ee d s . Sav e d page s You can save pa ges and vie w them later offline. To save a page while browsing, s e lect Opt io ns > Tools > Save page . To o pen t he Save d pages view, in t he bookmarks view, select Saved pages . T o open a page, sele ct it. To star t a connection t o the browser se rvice and ret rie ve the page a gain, sele ct Opt io ns > Navigation options > Reload . T he phone stays on line after you reload the page. Download You can downl oa d items su ch as ringing t on es, images, operat or logos, software, and video clips u sin g the mobile browser. Once downloaded, items are handle d by the respe ct ive applications on your phone, for e xample , a downloaded ph oto is saved in Galle ry . Import ant: O n ly install and use applica tions and other softwa re from trusted sources, such as applicat ions that are Symbian Signed or have passed the Java Ve rif ie d TM testing. End a connection To end the connect ion and vie w the browser pa ge offline, se le ct Opt ions > Tools > Di sconnec t . To quit browsing and to ret u rn to t he standby mode , select Op tion s > Exit . Empty the cache A cache is a memory location that is used to store dat a temporarily. I f you have tried to access or have accessed confide ntial informa tion requiring passwords, empty the cach e after each us e. The i nf orma tion or services you hav e a cces sed are s tored i n the cache. To empt y the c a ch e, select Men u > We b > Brows er > Options > Clear privacy data > Clear cache .
65 To clear a ll privacy data, including the ca che, cookies, form data passwords, and browsing history, sele ct Menu > We b > Browser > Op ti on s > Clear privacy dat a > All . Browser settings Select Optio ns > Settings > Genera l , P age , Privacy or We b f ee d s , a nd from t he following: Gene r al Acces s poin t âÂÂSel ect t he def ault access poi nt. Homepage âÂÂDefine the address of the desired homepage. Min i ma p âÂÂSet on or off. History list âÂÂSelect whether a list of the pages you have visited during the curr en t browsing session a re displayed when you select Back . Securit y warnin gs â Hide or show se cu rity notifica t ions. Java/Ecma Script âÂÂEnable or dis a ble the use of scripts. Page Load content â Select what type of con tent is loaded automatically while browsing. If you s e lect Text only , to load im ages during browsing, sele ct Optio ns > T ools > Load images . Screen size âÂÂChoose how to use the display area for viewing pages. Defaul t enco ding âÂÂWhe n you selec t Automa tic , th e b ro ws er au t o ma tic a ll y tr ie s t o choose the correct character encoding. Block pop-ups âÂÂAllow or block a u tomatic opening of diffe rent pop- u ps while browsing. Automatic reload âÂÂEnable or disable automatic ref re sh of brow se r pages. Font size âÂÂS ele c t th e fo nt siz e . Priv acy Auto. bookmarks âÂÂSe lect On if you want the bookmarks to be automatically sa ved in th e A uto. bookmarks folde r w hen you visit a page. When you select Hid e folde r , the bookmarks are st ill automatically added to t h e folder. Form data saving âÂÂIf you do not want t he data you e nt er t o different f orms on a web page to be sa ved and u se d next ti m e the page is en tered, se le ct Off .
66 Cookies â Enable or disable th e receiving and sen din g of cookies ( a mean s for co n te nt pro vi de r s to i den t i fy u s ers an d th eir pr ef e ren c e s fo r fre q ue nt ly u sed content). Web fe eds Automatic updates âÂÂDefine whethe r you want t he web feeds t o be upda t ed automatically or n ot , and how oft e n you want to update t hem. Setting the application to retrieve w eb feeds automatically may involve the t r ansmission of large amounts of da ta through your service pr ovider' s ne t work. Contact your service provide r for inf ormation about dat a transm ission charges. Acc. poin t for auto-update âÂÂSel e ct the desired a ccess point for updating (only avai lab le w h en Automatic updates is on). 12. Organi zer â Clock Select Menu > Organise r > Clock . Clock settin gs To change the time or dat e , select Op tion s > Se ttings . F o r m o re in fo r m a t io n a bo u t the setti ngs, s ee âÂÂD ate and time ,â p. 73. Set an alarm 1. To se t a new alarm , scroll r ight to Alar m , and sel ect Opti o ns > New alarm . 2. Ent er th e al arm time, sele ct whe the r and w h en the alar m is repe at ed, an d select Do ne . When an alar m i s activ e, is sho wn. To ca nce l an al arm , scr ol l to the a lar m, an d s elec t Opti ons > Remove alarm . To deac tiva te a repe ated ala rm, sel ec t Opt io ns > D e activate alarm . Turn off the alarm Select Stop to turn off the a la rm. Select Sn ooze to stop th e alar m for 5 minut es, af ter wh ich it res umes. If the alarm time is r eached while the de vice is switc hed off, the device switc hes itse lf on and starts sou nding the alarm tone . If you select Stop , the devic e asks whether you want to
67 activate th e devi ce for calls. S elect No to switch off the devic e or Ye s to make an d receive calls. Do not select Ye s when wi reless pho ne use m ay caus e interfe rence o r dang er. World clock To open t h e world clock vi e w, scroll right t o Wo r l d . To add cities to t he list, select Opt io ns > A dd city . To set you r cu rrent city, scroll to a city, and se lect Opti ons > Set as curre nt city . The city is displayed in the clock main vie w, and the tim e in your device is changed according t o the city se lected. Check that t he time is corr ect and matches your tim e z o ne . â Calendar Select Menu > Organise r > Calendar . In the calen da r, you ca n keep tr a ck of your app ointments, meetings, birthdays, ann ivers arie s , and oth er e vent s. Y ou can al so s et a c alenda r a larm t o rem ind y ou of upc oming even ts. Create c alendar e ntries 1. Sele ct Op ti ons > New en t ry an d an ent ry typ e. Anni versary ent rie s are r epeat ed ev ery yea r. 2. Fill in the fields. Repeat âÂÂPress the scroll key to change the e n try to be re peat ed. A re peating entry is indicated by in the day view. Repe a t unt il âÂÂSe t an ending date for t he repea ted e ntr y, fo r exam ple, the la st date of a weekly course you are t aking. This option is shown only if you have se l ect ed t o re pea t the ev e nt. Synchronisation > Private âÂÂAfte r syn chroniz ation the ca lenda r ent ry can be s e e n o n l y b y y o u , a n d i t i s no t s h o w n t o o t h e r s e ve n i f t h e y h a v e o n l i n e a c c e s s to vi ew the calend ar. Public âÂÂThe calend ar ent ry is shown to othe rs who have access to vie w your calendar online. No ne âÂÂThe calendar ent r y is not copied when you synchronize your calen da r. 3. To save the entry, select Done .
68 Ca len dar vi ew s Press # i n t he m o nt h , w eek , or d ay v iew s to au tom a ti ca lly h ig h li ght th e cu r re nt date. To create a meeting ent ry, press a ny number ke y ( 0 â 9 ) in any calendar view. To go to a ce rtain date, s e lect Opti o ns > Go to date . Write the d ate, and s elect OK . To-do Select Optio ns > To- do vie w . In th e To- do view , yo u can keep a l ist o f ta sks that yo u need to do. Creat e a to- do note 1. To sta rt to w r ite a to -d o n ote , pr e ss an y num b er key ( 0 â 9 ). 2. W ri t e th e task in th e Subject field. Set a due date and a prior ity for the task. 3. To save t he to- do n ote, s elec t Do ne . â Not es Select Menu > Organise r > No tes . To w rit e a n e w n ote , sta rt w rit i n g. To sa ve th e n ote , sel ec t Done . You can sa ve pl ain te xt fil es (. txt forma t) you rece ive to Notes . â Calculator Select Menu > Organise r > Calculator . 1. Ente r the fi rst num ber of yo ur calcu lation. 2. Scro ll to an arithmetic function, and select it. 3. Ente r the second number. 4. To ex ecute t he c alcula tion, selec t . To add a decim a l, press # . Not e: This calcu lator has limited acc uracy and is de signed for simple ca lculations. â Converter Select Menu > Organise r > Converter .
69 In th e converter, you can convert m e asurement para meters such as Le ng th from one un it to anot her, for ex ample , Ya r d s to Metr es . The conve rt er has lim it ed accuracy a n d rounding errors may occur. Set a base curr ency and exch a nge rate s Before you can convert curr en cy, you need t o choose a base currency (us u ally your domestic curre ncy) and add exchange rates . The rate of t he base cur rency is alwa ys 1. The base cur renc y det ermin es the conversion rates of t he othe r currenci e s. 1. Sele ct Curren cy as th e measu rem ent type , and s elec t Opti ons > C urrency rates . 2. To change the base cu rrency, scroll to the currency ( usu ally your dome st ic currency), and select Op ti o ns > Set as base currency . 3. Add exchange rates, s croll to the cur rency, and e n ter a n ew rate, th a t is, how many units of t he curre n cy equal one u nit of the base currency you se lected. 4. After you insert a ll t he require d exchange rates, you c a n convert curren cy. Not e: When y ou chan ge base c urrenc y, you m ust ent er new exc hange r ates becau s e all previo usly set e xchange r ates are cl eared. Conv ert un its To convert cu rre ncy, you must first set the exchange rat e . See âÂÂSet a base currency and exchange rates,â p. 69 . 1. Sele ct Ty p e and t he type of m easurement to convert, and select OK . 2. Select the first Unit fiel d, t he uni t from which y ou wa nt t o co nvert, and OK . 3. Sele ct the next Uni t field a n d the unit to w hich y ou want to co nvert. 4. In th e fir st Amo unt fie ld, e nter t he v a lu e to b e conv erted. The other Am ount field changes a utomatically to show the converted va lue. Press # to add a decimal and press * for the , - (for tem pera t u re), and E (exponent) symbols. The conversion or de r changes if you write a va lu e in the second A mount fiel d. Th e result is shown in the first Amoun t fie ld .
70 13. App lic ation s â Download! Download! ( network service) is a mobile content shop available on your device . You may be able to down load some conten t free of ch a rge. With Download! you can discov er, previe w , buy, download, and upgra de con tent, services, and applications. The items are categorized under catalogs and folders provided by diff erent service providers. The available cont e nt depends on your service provider. Select Menu > Applicat ion s > Download! . Download! uses yo ur ne twork servi ces to acc ess the most up-to -date conte nt. Fo r information on additional items available through Download! , contact you r service provide r, or t h e supplier or m a nufacturer of t he item . â My own To access t he applications you have dow nloaded in your phone, se le ct Menu > Applications > My own . GPS data This featu re is not design ed to support positioning requests for related calls. Contact your se rvice provider f or m ore inf orm ation about how your phon e complies with government regulations on location - based emergency calling services. GPS data is a GPS application t h at enables you to vie w your curren t location, fin d your way to a de sired location , and track dist a nce. The application re quires a Blue toot h GPS e nhancement to o perate. You mus t als o have Bl uetoot h GPS positioning method enabled in Menu > Settin gs > Phon e s ett. > General > Po s i t i o n i n g > Positioning methods . Select Menu > Applicat ion s > My own > GPS data . In GPS dat a and Lan dmar ks , coordinates a re expresse d in degrees a nd decima l degrees format u sing WGS-84 coordinat e system.
71 Landm arks Landmarks are coordinates to geographic loca tions that you can sa ve to your devi ce for lat er use in differen t location-based service s. You can create landmarks using a Bluetooth GPS enha n cement or network (ne t work service). Select Menu > Applicat ion s > My own > La nd mark s . 14 . Sett ings â V oice commands To select t he funct ion s to use by voice comm and, sele ct Me nu > Settings > Voi c e comm. . The voice commands for changing profiles are in t h e Profiles folder. To act ivate a new vo ice com ma nd for an ap plic ati on, sele ct Opti ons > New application and the application. To manage the voice commands, scroll to a fu n ction, select Op tion s and from the following options: Change command or Remove application âÂÂto change or deactiv a te the voice command of the se lected func t ion Playback âÂÂto play the a ctivated voice command To use voice com mands, see âÂÂV oice dialing,â p. 22. To change voice com mand settings, sele ct Opt ions > Settings and from the following options: Synt hesis er âÂÂt o ac tiv a te or de ac tiv a te th e t ex t- to- sp e ech s ynt h ezi se r tha t sa ys out loud the recognized voice command Remove voice adapts. âÂÂto r es e t the v oi ce ad a p ta tio ns . Th e pho n e a dap ts to t he us erâÂÂs v oice to bett er recogniz e th e voic e comma nds. â Call mailbox Call m ailbox is a n etwork se rvice. Contact your service provider fo r the ca ll mailbox num ber. To define the call mailbox number if no number is set, select Menu > Settings > Call mailbox , a n d w hen V oice mailbox numbe r: is displayed, ent e r the voice mailbox num ber.
72 To change t h e call mailbox number, select Me n u > Se ttings > C all mail box > Opt io ns > Change number , a nd enter the nu mber. â Speed dial To assign phon e numbers to t he speed dialin g ke ys, se l ect Me nu > Settings > Speed dial , scroll to a key icon, and select Op tio ns > A ssign . Se l e ct th e conta ct and the num ber f or th e speed dial . To view the nu mber assigned to a speed-dialing key, sc roll to the key icon, and select Option s > V ie w number . To change or remove the number, select Change or Remove . â Phone settings Gene ral Select Me nu > Se ttings > Phone se t t. > Gener al > Personalisation , D ate and time , Enhan ceme nt , Security , Factory settings , o r Po s i t io ni n g . Pers on alisa tion Select Displ ay , St andby mode , Tones , Language , Them es , or Vo i c e c o mm s . . Display Light sensor âÂÂt o a djust the light se nsor that observes the lightin g conditions and adjust s the brightness of the display Font size âÂÂto select the font s ize used in lists and editors P ower save r time-out âÂÂto s e t the time-out per iod a fter wh ich the power saver is act ivate d Welcome note / logo âÂÂto set the welcome note or logo w hich is displayed brie fly each time you switch on t he phone. Light ti me- out âÂÂto set the time-out for the display light Sta n db y mode Act ive standby âÂÂto enable or disable active s t andby. See â A ctive st andby ,â p. 16. Shortcuts âÂÂto assign shortcuts for t he right and left selection keys , scrolling in different dir e ctions or press i ng the s croll key in the standby m ode. The scroll key shortcuts are not available if Active st andby is On . Act ive standby apps. âÂÂto select the application short cu ts to appear in the a ct ive standby. This setting is available only if A ct ive s t andby is se t to On .
73 Operator logo âÂÂthis setting is visible on ly if you have received and sa ved an operator logo. You can sele ct whether t he operator logo is shown. Ton es Change the tones of the clock, ca l endar and currently active pr ofile . See âÂÂProfiles,â p. 59. Lang ua ge Phone language âÂÂto change the language for t he display t exts in your phon e . This change ma y also affect the format used fo r date and time and t h e separa t ors used, for example, in calculations. If you select Au tom ati c , the phone sele ct s th e language according t o the information on your SIM ca rd. After you h a ve changed the display t ext la nguage, the ph one restarts. Writing language âÂÂt o change t he writing language of your phone. Ch anging the la ngu age aff ect s t he c har act ers an d sp eci al c har act ers av ail ab le w hen writ in g tex t a nd th e pr e di cti ve te xt dic t io n ar y us e d. Pre dic tive text âÂÂto s e t predictive tex t input On or Of f for all editors in the ph one. Select a language for e ntering predictive text from the list. Them es Apply themes. See â The mes,â p. 58. Voic e comma n ds Edit voice command and voice dia ling settings. See âÂÂV oice commands,â p. 7 1. Date and tim e Time an d Dat e âÂÂto set the t ime and date Time zone â to s e t th e ti m e zon e of y ou r loc a tio n . If you set Network operator tim e > A uto-update , the local t im e is shown. Dat e form at â to select the form at to displa y dates Date s eparator âÂÂto select the date se parator Time format âÂÂt o sele ct between 24-hou r and 12-hour t ime form a t Time separator âÂÂto sele ct the time sepa ra tor Clock type âÂÂto select w hether the analog o r digital clock is sh own in th e standby mode. See âÂÂClock,â p. 66. Clock alarm tone âÂÂto sele ct the a larm clock tone W orkdays â to specify da ys for alarms re pe ated only on workdays
74 Network operator t ime (ne two rk se rvice) â to allo w the netw ork t o upda te ti me, date, and time zone information t o you r phone. If you select Auto-update , all active conn e ctions are discon nected. Check a n y alarms as th ese may be affecte d. En hanceme nt T o c h a n g e s e t t i n g s o f a n e n h a n c e m e n t , i n t h e Enha nceme nt sett. view , scroll to an enha ncement , suc h as Headset , sel ect Op ti o ns > Open and from th e following options: Default profile âÂÂto se lect the profile you want to activate each t ime you connect the enha ncemen t to you r phon e Automa tic answ er âÂÂto set the phone to answer an inc om ing call automatically aft er 5 seco nds when t his e nhancem ent is co nnecte d to your pho ne. If t he Ring ing typ e is set to Beep on ce or Silent , automatic answer cannot be used, and you must answer the phone manually. Lights âÂÂTo se t the phone light s cont inuous ly on while using the e nhancem ent, select On . Secur ity Select Ph one and SIM card , Certificate management , or Security module . Phon e and SI M card You can change the following code s: lock code, (U)PIN code, and PIN2 code. These code s can o nly i nclude the n umbers from 0 t o 9. Avoid using acce ss code s similar t o e mergency n u mbers to prevent a ccidental dialing of the emerge n cy number. Code in use âÂÂto select the acti ve code, PIN or UPI N , for the active USIM. This is shown only if t h e active U SIM supports UPIN, a nd the UPIN is n ot rejected. PIN code request or UPIN code request âÂÂto set the phone t o request the code each time the phone is s wit ched on. Some SIM ca rds may n o t allow the PIN code req ue s t to b e turn e d Off . If you selec t Code in us e > UPIN , UPIN code request is shown in st ead. PIN code or UPIN code , PIN2 code , an d Lock code âÂÂto change the code s Keypad autolock period > Use r defined â to automatically lock t he keypad after a defined period of inactivity Phone autolock period âÂÂto set a time-out after w hich the phone is automatically loc ked. T o use the p hone a gain, yo u need t o enter the c orrec t lock co de. To t urn off the autolock period, s ele ct No ne .
75 Lock if SIM card changed âÂÂto s e t the phone to prompt for the lock code when an unknown, new SIM card is inserted into your ph one. The phone keeps a list of SIM cards t h at ar e recognized as t he owner cards. Closed user group (network service)âÂÂto specify a grou p of people whom you can call and who can ca ll you . For more inform a tion, contact your service provider. To activate t h e default grou p agreed on w ith the service provider, select Defau lt . If you want to use ano ther group (you need to know the group index nu mber), select On . When calls are limited to closed user groups, calls ma y be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Confirm SIM service s (network se rvice)âÂÂto set the phone t o displa y confirm a tion messages w h en you u se a SIM card se rvice Cert ificate m anagemen t A list of a u thority certificates that have been stored in your phon e is displayed in Certificate management . To see a list of pe rsonal certificates if available, scroll right. Digital certificates should be u sed if you want to con nect to an online bank or another site or r e mote server for actions t hat involve transferrin g confidential information. They should a lso be u se d if you w a nt to re duce the risk of viruses or other malicious sof tw are a n d be sure of the authenticity of software when downloading and insta lli ng software. Import ant: E ve n if the use of certificates makes th e risks involved in rem ote conne ctions and software installation considerably sma ller, they mu st be used correc tly in order to benefit from increased security. The existence of a certificat e does not offer any protection by itself; the certificat e manager must c ontain corr ect, authentic, or trusted certificates f or increased secu rity to be availa ble. Cer tificates have a r estricted lifetime. If "Expir ed certificate" or "Certificate n ot valid yet" is shown even if the certificate shou ld be valid, chec k that the curren t date and time in yo ur device ar e corre ct. Bef ore ch anging a ny certif icate settin gs, you mus t make sure that yo u really trust the ow ner of the certificate and th at the certif icate really belong s to the listed owner. Vi ew certi ficat e deta ils and c heck a uthen ticity You can only be sure of the correct identity of a serve r when the signature and the period of validity of a server cert ificate have been checked.
76 Th e ph o ne n o tif ie s y ou if t h e id en tit y of t h e se rv er i s not a ut h en tic or i f y ou d o n o t have the corr ect security certifica t e in your phon e . To check ce rtificate details, sc roll to a cer tificate, and se lect Opt io ns > Ce rtificate details . While opening the certificate details, t h e phone checks the validity of t he certificat e and one of t he following notes may appear: Expired certificate â The validity pe riod has ended for t h e selected cert ificate. Certificate not valid yet âÂÂThe validi ty per iod ha s not y et be gun fo r the selected certificate. Certificate corrupted âÂÂThe certificate cannot be used. Contact t h e certificate issuer. Certificate not trust ed âÂÂYou have not s et any application to use the ce rtificate. Chang e the trust setting s Before chan gin g any cert i ficate set t ings, you m ust make sure t hat you re ally trust the owner of the certificate a n d that the certificate re a lly belongs to the listed owner. Scroll to an authority ce rt ificate, and select Op tio ns > Tru st s e tt ings . Depending on the certificate, a list of the applications that can us e the selected certificate is shown. Sec u rit y m odul e View or edit security modules. Fact or y setti ngs Reset some of t he settings t o their original va lues. You need the lock code . See âÂÂLock code,â p. 8. Posit ioning With the positioning service you can rec e ive information from service providers about local is sues such a s weathe r and traffic con dition s, ba sed on the location of your device ( ne twork se rvice). To enable a positioning method, select Posit ionin g methods , scroll to the positioning method, and se lect Opt io ns > Enable . To st op u sing it, select Opt io ns > Dis able . To define t he positioning se rve r a cce ss point, sele ct P ositioning server > Acce ss point and the de sired access point . Then se lect Se rver address , and e nter the domain name or UR L address of the server.
77 Pho ne Select Menu > Settings > Phone sett. > Phone an d Call , Call dive rt , Call barring , o r Net wo rk . Call Send my caller ID (network service)âÂÂto set your phon e number t o be displayed ( Yes ) or hidden ( No ) from the person whom you are calling. The value may be set by your se rvice provider wh en you su bscribe t o t he service ( Set by netw ork ). Call wait ing (n etwork se rvice) âÂÂto set th e netwo rk to notif y you of a new inc oming call while you have a ca ll in progres s. To request the network to a ctivate call waiting, select Act iv a t e . To reques t the n etwork to deactivate call waiting, select Cancel . To check w h ether the f u nction is acti ve , select Ch e ck status . Reject call with SM S âÂÂto enable rejecting phon e calls with a t ext message. See â A nswer or reject a call,â p. 23. Message text âÂÂt o ente r a t ext t o be s ent wh en y ou rej ect a call with a text message Image in video call âÂÂto select a still image to be shown instead of t he video when you deny video se n ding in a video call Automatic redial âÂÂto s et the phon e to make a maxi m um of 10 att e mpts to co nne c t t he c al l af te r an un s ucc e ss ful cal l at te m p t. P res s th e end k e y to s top auto m a tic red ia l ing. Show call duration âÂÂto set t he phone to display t he call dura t ion during a call Summary after call âÂÂto set th e phone t o brie fly displa y t he approximate du ration of th e last ca ll Speed dialling > On âÂÂto set the ph one to dial t he numbers a ssigned to the speed dialing keys, 2 to 9 , by pressing and holding the corresponding number key Anykey answer > On âÂÂto answer an incoming ca ll by briefly pressing any ke y, except the left a nd right se lection keys, volume ke ys, the power key and the end ke y Line in use ( network se rvice )âÂÂshown on ly if the SIM ca rd supports t wo subscriber numbers, that is, two phone lines. Select which phone line ( Line 1 or Line 2 ) you want to use for making cal ls and sending short m essages. Calls on both lines ca n be answered irrespective of the selected line. Y ou cannot make calls if you select Lin e 2 an d have n ot s ubscri bed to this netwo rk s ervic e. To
78 prevent line selection, select Line change > Disable i f supported by you r SIM card. To change t h is setting, you need the PIN2 code. Ca ll di vert Call divert is a network s e rvice. 1. Sele ct which calls you want to di vert: Voice calls , D ata and video calls , or Fa x calls . 2. Se lect the de sired option. F o r example, to divert voice calls when your nu mber is busy or when you reject an in com ing call, select If bu s y . 3. To set the divert option on or off, select Op ti o ns > Act iv at e or Can c el . To check whether t he option is a ctivated, select C heck s t atus . Several divert options can be ac tive at the sam e time . Call barring and call diverting cannot be active at th e same time. Call barrin g Call ba rring (network se rvice) all ow s you to restrict the ca lls that you make and receive wit h your phone. To ch a nge the se ttings, you n eed the barrin g password from your se rvice provide r. Scroll to t h e desired ba rrin g option, a n d to request th e network to se t call restriction on, select Op ti o ns > Act iv a te . To set the selected call r estriction off, select Cancel . To check whether the calls a re barr e d, select Che ck st atus . To change the barring pa ssword, se lect Edit barring password . To cancel all active call barrings , select Cancel all barrin gs . Call barring and call diverting cannot be active at th e same time. When calls are barred, calls may be possible to certain official emergency numbers. Netwo rk Network mode âÂÂTo select which network to use ( sh own only if su pported by the service provider). I f you select Dual mode , the de vice uses the GSM or UMTS network aut om atically, according to t h e network pa ra meters and t he roaming agreements bet ween t he network ope rators. Operator selection âÂÂTo set the phone to search for and select automatically one of the av ailable n etworks, sele ct Autom atic . T o select the desired network manu ally from a list of networks, sele ct Manua l . If the connection to t he manually selected network is los t, th e phone sounds an error tone and asks you to select a net w ork again. The se lected ne t work must have a roamin g agreement w ith your home network, that is, the operator wh ose SIM card is in your phone.
79 Cell info display ( network service)âÂÂTo set the phone to indicate when it is use d in a cellular network ba sed on microcellular networ k ( MCN) technology and to activate cell info r e ception, select On . Co nnection Select Menu > Settin gs > Phone sett. > Co nnection > Blu etooth , USB , A cce ss points , Packet data , Data cal l , SIP settings , C on fi g ur a t io ns , or APN control . Blu etoot h Switch B luetooth on or off, a nd edit Bluetooth settings. See âÂÂBluetooth conn ecti on,â p. 84. USB Edit USB settings. See â USB data cable,â p. 94. Acce ss points To establish a da ta connection, an access point is re quire d. You can de fine different k inds of access points: ⢠MMS access point to send and receive multimedia messages ⢠WAP access point to view web pages ⢠Int ernet access point (IAP ) (fo r examp le, t o send and re ceive e-mail ) Check which kind of access point you need w ith your service provider for the service you wis h to access. For availability a n d subscription to data connection services, contact you r s ervice provider. You may re ce ive access poin t settings in a message fr om you r ser vice provider, or you may have pr e set access point se ttings in your phone. To create a new access poin t or edit an existing a cce ss point, sele ct Opt io n s > New access point or Edit . To cre a te a new access point u sing t h e settings of a n exist ing access point , scroll to an access point, an d select Op ti o ns > D u plicate access point . Depending on the connection t ype selected in Data beare r , only certain se t tings are a vailable. Fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or w ith an aste ri sk. Contact your service p rovider for the followin g settings: Data bearer , A ccess point nam e (for packet data only), D ial-up number (for data call only), Us er nam e , Pa s s w o r d , Au then t i ca tio n , Homepage , Data call type (for data ca ll only) , and Maximum data speed (for data call only) . Conn ection name âÂÂEnte r a des criptive name for the connec t ion .
80 Prompt password âÂÂIf you must enter a new pa ssw ord every tim e you log onto a server, or if you do not w ant to save your pa ssword t o the phone, select Yes . If ne ce ssary, to defin e t h e internet pr ot ocol (IP) ver sion , phone IP addre ss, domain name syst e m (DNS) ser ver s, prox y server, and a dva nced data cal l settings, such a s callback, PPP compression , login script , and modem initialization string, sele ct Opt io ns > Adva n c ed se t tin g s . C ontact your serv ice pr o v ider f or th e corr ect setti n gs. Packe t data The packet da ta settings a ffe ct all access point s usin g a packet da ta connection. P acket data conn ection âÂÂIf you select When available a nd y ou are i n a net wor k that s u pports packet data , the phone registers to th e packet data network and sh ort mess ages are se nt usin g a p a cke t dat a conne ction. If y ou sel ect When need ed , the ph one use s a packet da ta connection on ly if you start an application or function t h at needs it . The packet data connection can be closed whe n it is n ot need ed by an y ap plic at ion . If there ar e no packet data s e rvices available and you have chose n When available , the phone periodically tries to establish a packet data conne ction. Acces s poin t âÂÂThe a cce ss point name is need ed whe n you want to use your ph one as a m odem wi th your compu t er. Data cal l The data call settings affect all access poin ts that use a GSM data call. Online tim e âÂÂto se t th e da ta cal l to dis co nn ec t au tom at i cal ly af ter a ti me -o u t if the re is no a ct i vi ty. To en ter a ti m e -ou t, se le ct Us er defined , an d en te r th e ti me i n m inu t es . If yo u s e lec t U nlimited , th e data c a l l is n ot d is c on ne cte d au tom at i ca lly . SI P s ett ings View and edit ses sion initiation protocol (SIP) prof iles. Conf igur ati ons Certain functions, such a s we b browsing a nd mu ltimedia messaging, m ay require configuration settings. You may receive t he settings from your se rv ice provider. See âÂÂConfiguration s et tings,â p. 13. To delete a configuration, scroll to the con figuration, and select Op ti on s > De le te .
81 Acce ss point n ame cont rol With the access poin t name control service , you can rest rict the use of packet data access point s. This settin g is only available if your USIM card supports the ser vice . To change t h e settings, you n eed the PIN2 code. Appl ic ations To view and edit settings of applications installed to you r phone, select Menu > Se ttin gs > Ph one sett. > Applications . â Speech In Speech , you c an sel ect the d efault lang uage and vo ice use d for reading messages and adjust the voice prope rt ies, such a s rat e and volume. Select Menu > Se ttin gs > Spe ech . To automatically det e ct the language of a message and read t h e message using that language, select Language detection > On . Whe n re adi n g a me ss age , if the re is no voice available for the language or if Language detection is se t to Off , the de fa ult l an g ua g e is u se d . To view details of a voice, sc roll r ight, scroll to the voice , and select Opti o ns > V oice details . To test a voice, sc roll to the voice, and select Opti o ns > Play voice . â Settings w izard Se tt. wi za rd configure s your device for operator ( MMS, GPRS, a nd interne t) and e-mail settings ba sed on your service provider. Configuring other settings may also be possible . To us e t hese se rvices , you may ha ve to conta ct you r ser vice provi der to a cti vate a data con n ection or other se rvices. Select Menu > Settin gs > Sett. w izard . â Instant messaging Instant m essagi n g (IM) a llows you to converse w ith oth e rs and join discussion forums (IM grou ps) w i th specific t opics (network se rvice). Check the availability of IM services, pricing, and ta riffs with your service provide r. Service pr ovide rs also provide instruction s on how to use the ir se rvices.
82 Co nnect to an I M serve r Select Menu > Settin gs > IM . 1. To log in , select Optio ns > Log in . 2. Enter your user ID and password. To log out, se lect Opti o ns > L og ou t . IM settings Select Menu > Settin gs > IM > Op ti ons > Se t tings . To edit the I M application settings, select IM s e tt i ng s . T o set who is allowed t o se e when you are online, select Sh ow my availability . To set who is allowed to send you messages or in vit ations, s ele ct Allow messages from or Allow invitations from . To ed it IM serv er conn ection s etti ngs, s elect Servers , scrol l to the server , and select Opt io ns > Edit . Con tact your se rvice provider for t he settings. T o define new server settin gs, select Op t i ons > Ne w ser ver . To c hoos e the default ser ver, sel ect Defaul t serv e r and the ser ve r. To be au t omatically connected t o the IM se rver duri n g the days a nd times you define, select IM login type > Automat ic . To only be a utomatically connected while in your home network, select Aut o in home netw . . To be automatically connected when you start t he IM application, select On app. start-up . T o con nect manually, select Manual . To set da ys and time s wh en to e stabl ish a c onnecti on au tomat icall y, sel ect Automatic login days and A utomati c logi n hrs. . Join and leav e an IM group Select Menu > Settin gs > IM > IM groups . IM groups a re only available if supported by the service pr ovide r. To join an IM group, select it, a n d enter you r screen name. To join an IM group not on the list , but whose grou p ID you know , select Op tion s > Join n ew group , and enter t he group I D . To leave the I M grou p, select Optio ns > Leave IM group . Search for IM groups and u sers To sear ch for groups, select Me nu > Settin gs > IM > IM groups > Opti ons > Search . You can search IM groups by Group name , Topic , or Members (us er I D) . To
83 join or save a gr ou p that is found in the s earch, scroll to it, and select Opti ons > Join or Save . To sear ch for new contacts, se lect IM co n ta c t s > Opti o ns > New IM co n t act > Search from server . T o sta rt a c onversat ion wi th a new user , scrol l to th e us er, and select Op ti ons > O pen co n ver s ati on . To save the n e w contact, select Add to IM contacts . Chat in an IM group Select Menu > Settin gs > IM > IM groups . After you join an I M group, you can view t he messages that a re exchanged in t h e group, and se nd your own messages. To se n d a messa ge , writ e the m essage, and pr ess the scroll key or t he call ke y. To send a priva te message to a m e mber (if a llow ed in the group) , select Opti ons > Send private message , s e lect the recipie n t, write the messa ge , and press t he scroll key. To re ply to a pr ivat e mess age sen t t o yo u, scro ll to t he mes sage , a nd s el ect Opt io ns > Reply . To invite IM conta cts who are on line to join the IM group (if allowed in t he group), select Op ti ons > Se nd invitation , select the contacts you w a nt to invite, write t he invitation message, a n d select Se nd . Star t and view indiv idual conversa tions Select Menu > Settin gs > IM > Conversations . This shows a list of t he IM users w ith whom you have an ongoing conve r sation. next t o a user indicates that you h ave rece ive d a new m essage from t hat user. To vie w an ongoing conve rsat ion, se lect the user. T o se nd a mess a ge, write you r message, a nd pres s the scroll key. To re t urn to t he conv e rsations li st without closing the conv e rsation, select Ba ck . To st a rt a n e w convers a tion, se lect Opti on s > Ne w co nve r sa tio n > Select fr om contacts a n d from a list of your saved IM conta ct s that are cu rrently online; or select En te r us er ID to ente r th e u ser I D. To close th e conversation, s ele ct Op tion s > End conve rsation . To s ave a u ser to your I M cont a c ts, scro ll to the us er, and selec t Op t i ons > A dd to IM contac ts .
84 To block m essages from a use r, scroll to the use r, and selec t Opt io ns > Blocking options > Add to blocked list . IM contacts Select Menu > Settin gs > IM > IM c on t ac t s . Y ou can see a list of your sa ved IM cont a cts. indicates contacts tha t are currently online, indicates contacts that are bu sy , and indicates contacts that are of flin e. To create a new contact, s ele ct Op tion s > New IM c onta ct > Enter ma nually . Fill in th e Nick name an d Us er ID fields, an d select Done . To s tart o r co ntinue a conv ersatio n wit h a cont act, s crol l to the cont act, a nd sel ect Opt io ns > O pen con versat ion . Creat e a new IM gr oup Select Menu > Settin gs > IM > IM groups > Opt io ns > Cre at e n e w gr oup . Enter the set t ings for the group. R e s t r i c t a c c e s s t o a n I M g r o u p To create a closed IM group, create a group members list. Only the users on the li st are allowed to join the grou p. Select the IM grou ps vie w, scroll to th e grou p, and select Op ti ons > Gro up > Se ttings > Group members > Sele cted only . 15. Con n ectiv it y â PC Suite You can us e your phone with a varie ty of PC connectivity and dat a communication appli cations. With PC Suit e you can syn chronize contacts, calendar and to-do notes a nd notes between your ph one and a compatible PC. You may find more in formation about PC Suite a nd the download link in t he support are a on the Nokia we bsit e, www.nokia.com/pcsuite. â Bluetooth connection Bluetooth technology enables wire le ss conne ct ions between electronic devices wit hin a maximum range of 10 meter s (33 feet) . A Bluet ooth connec t ion can b e
85 us ed to sen d ima ges, vi deos, text, b usines s card s, cale ndar no tes, or to c onnect wirelessly to compatible devices using Bluetooth technology, such as com puters. This device is compliant wit h Bluetooth Specification 2.0 supporting the following pro files: Dial Up Networking, Serial Port, File T r ansfer, Handsfree, Headset, Basic Imaging, SIM Access, Generic Access, an d Advanced Au dio Distribution. To ensure in teroperability between othe r devices supporting Bluetooth techn ology, use Nokia approve d enhancements for this model. Check with the manuf acturers of other devices to determine their compatibilit y with this device. There may be restrictions on using Bluetooth technology in some locations. Check w ith your local a uthorities or se rvice pr ovider. Features using Bluetooth technology, or allowing such fea tures to run in the background while using other features, increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life. Bl uetooth c onnectio n setti ngs Select Menu > Settin gs > Connectivity > Bluetooth . When you activate Bluetooth technology for the first time, you are a sked to give a name to y our pho ne. Bluetooth âÂÂto switch Bluetooth on or off. My phone's visibility > Sho wn to all â to allow you r phone to be fou nd by other Bluetooth devices at a ll times. T o allow your phone t o be found for a defined time period, select D efine period . For se curity reason s it is advisa ble to use th e H idden setting whenever possible. My phone's name âÂÂto define a name for you r phone. Remote SI M mode > On âÂÂt o enable the usage of the SIM card of t he phone by another device ( for example, a car kit ) by Bluetooth tech n ology (SIM access profile) When the wireless device is in the rem ote SIM mode, you can only use a com patible connected en hanceme nt, such as a car kit, to make or receive calls . Your wireless device will not m ake any calls , except to t he em ergen cy number s prog r amm ed into your devi ce, whil e in this m ode. To make calls fro m your devic e, you m ust first leave th e remot e SIM mode . If the devic e has been locked, enter the lock code t o unloc k it fir s t. Send d a ta There can be only one active Bluetooth conn ection at a t ime. 1. Ope n an application where the item you wish to send is save d.
86 2. Scroll to the item you want to send, and select Opt ion s > Send > Via Bluetooth . 3. The phone starts t o se arch for de vices within range. Paire d devices are shown wit h . When searching for device s, som e devices may sh ow only the unique device addresses. T o find out the unique address of your phone, enter the code *#2820 # in the s t andby mode. If you have searched for device s e arlier, a list of the devices t hat were found previously is shown first. To start a n ew search, select More de vices . I f y ou switch off t he phone, t h e list of devices is cle a red, and th e device s e arch needs to be sta rt ed again before sending data. 4. Se lect the device w ith which you want t o conn ect. 5. Pair the devices ⢠If the other de vice requires pa irin g before data can be transmitted, a ton e sounds and you are asked to enter a pa sscode. ⢠Create your ow n passcode (1âÂÂ1 6 digits) and a gree with th e owner of t he other device to use the same code. You do not have to memorize the passcode. ⢠After pairing, t h e device is saved t o the P aire d devices view. 6. When the connec tion has b een suc cessfu lly est ablish ed, t he note Se n ding data is displayed. Data received u sin g Bluetooth connection can be found in Inbox in Messaging . Paire d dev ices v ie w Paired devices ar e indicated by in the se a rch result list . In the Bluetooth main view, scroll right t o open a list of paired d evices. Do no t accep t Bluet ooth co nnection s from s ources yo u do not trust . To pair w it h a device, sele ct Optio ns > New paired device . Select the dev ice with which to pair. E xcha nge passcode s. To cancel pa iring, scroll t o the device whose pairing you wa nt t o cancel, a nd press the clear key. If you want to cancel all pairings, select Opti o ns > De le te a ll . To set a de vice to be a uthorized, scroll to t he device, and se lect Opti o ns > Se t as authorised . Connections betw e en your phone a n d the authorized device ca n be made without your know ledge. No separate accepta nce or a u thorization is
87 need ed. Us e this stat us only for your o wn dev ices t o whic h other s do not have access, for exam ple, your PC or devices that belong to someone you t rust. is added next to a u thorized devices in th e P aired devices view. If you select Set as unauthorised , each connection request from t he device must be accepted separately. Re ce ive d ata Whe n you rec eive d ata u sing Bl uetoot h tech nolog y, a t one sound s, a nd you are asked if you want to accept the me ssage. If you accept, the it em is placed in Inbox in Messaging . Disc onnect Bl uetooth conne ctio n A Bluetooth connection is disconnected aut om atically after sending or receiving data. â Connection manager In the connection manager, you can ident ify the sta t us of multiple data connections, vie w details on the amount of da t a sent and rec eive d, a n d end unus ed connec tions . Select Menu > Settin gs > Connectivity > Co nn. mgr . . Not e: The actual invoice for calls and servi ces from your service provider may va ry, depending on n etwork features, round ing off for billing, taxes, and so forth. To view connection details, scroll to a con nection, and select Opt ions > D etails . To end a connection, scroll to the connection, and select Optio ns > Dis conne ct . T o end all connections, s e lect Opt ions > Disc onnect al l . â Push to talk Push to talk (PTT) (network service) is a real-time voice over IP service (network service) a va ilable over a GSM/GPRS network. PT T provides direct voice communication connected wit h a single keypress. Before you ca n u se the PT T service , you must def ine the PTT a ccess poin t and PTT setti n gs. In PTT com munication, one person t alks while th e others listen. Spe akers take turns res po nding to each oth er. O nly one group m e mber can talk at a time. The len gth of ti me of ea ch turn i s lim ite d.
88 Phone calls always t ake priority over PTT ca lls. Besides the packet data counters, the ph one registers only one -to-one calls in the recent calls lists in Lo g . The pa rticipants should confirm the reception of any communications where appropriate as there is no oth er conf irm ation of w h ether the recip ients hav e hear d the ca ll. To check availability a n d costs, and to s u bscribe to the service, cont a ct your service provider. Note that r oaming services may be more limited than home netw ork se rvices. Many of the services available for tra di tional voice calls (for example, call mailbox) are not available for PTT communications. Define a PTT access point Many service providers re qu ire you to use an internet acces s poin t for your default access point . Other service providers allow you to use a WAP access poin t . Settings fo r PTT For PTT s ervice settings, contact you r service provider . To view and ch a nge PTT settings, s e lect Menu > Settings > Connectivity > PTT > Opt io ns > Settings > User settings or Co nnectio n sett ings . User se tti ngs Accepted list calls âÂÂTo see a not ifica tion of incomin g calls, select Not ify . To a ns w er PTT calls autom atically, sele ct Auto-accept . I f you do not want to receive PTT ca lls, select Not allow e d . PTT call alert tone âÂÂSelect the tone for in coming PTT calls. If you want the incoming call alert setting for PTT to follow your profile se ttings, select Set by profile . For example, if your profile is sile nt, PT T is set to do not disturb (DND) and, except for ca llback requests, you ar e not a va ilable to others us i ng PTT. Callback request tone âÂÂSe lect a tone for call back requ ests. Application start-up âÂÂTo start PTT automatically, select Alwa ys au tom a ti c . To s tart PTT automatica lly only w h ile in your home network, select Auto . in home ne tw . . Defaul t nicknam e âÂÂEnt er your n ickna me shown to othe r users. You r servi ce provider may h a ve disabled the editing of t h is option. Show my PTT addres s âÂÂSele ct Neve r if you w a nt to hide you r PTT addre ss from others.
89 Show my login status â Select whet her your s tatu s is sh own to ot hers. Connect ion sett ings Contact your PTT se rvice provide r for th e connection settings. Log in to PTT Select Menu > Settin gs > Connectivity > PTT . PTT aut o m atic a lly lo gs in to the service when started. When log in is su ccessful, PTT automatically conn e cts to channe l s that were active when the application was last close d. If the c o nnec tion is los t, the device automatically tries to log back in until you e xit PTT. indicates a PTT connection. indicates th a t PTT is se t to do not dis t urb (DND). Exit PTT Select Menu > Settin gs > Connectivity > PTT > Opti o ns > Exit . Log out from PTT after exiting application? is display e d. Select Ye s to log out and close the service. If you w a nt to keep t h e application active in the background, select No . Make a one-to-o ne call Warning: Do not hold the device nea r your ea r when the loud s peak er is in use, because t he v olume may b e extremely lo ud. 1. Sele ct Menu > Settin gs > C onn e cti vi ty > PT T > Op ti ons > Contacts , scroll to the contact you w a nt to talk to, a nd press th e call key. 2. When the c onnect ion h as b een est abl ished, to ta lk t o the o ther parti cipa nt, press and hold the call key while you talk. 3. To end t he PTT call, s elect Dis co nne ct , or if there are s everal PTT calls, select Op t i ons > Disco nne ct . An swer a PT T cal l If Accepted list calls i s se t to Not ify in User s ettin gs , a sho rt tone noti fies y ou of an incoming call. To accept the call, select Accept . To sil enc e the ton e , sele c t Sil ence . To rejec t th e call , pres s the end key.
90 Make a P T T group call 1. To ca ll a group, select Opti o ns > Contacts , s e lec t Op ti o ns > Talk to man y , m ar k the contacts you want to ca ll, and select OK . Ca llba ck re que st s Se n d a ca llb a ck re qu e st If you make a one - to -one cal l and d o not get a res p ons e, you ca n send a reque st for th e person to ca ll you back. To sen d a c all back req ue st fr om Cont act s , scroll to a conta ct, and select Op ti on s > Send callback request . Respon d to a cal lback requ e st When someone sen ds you a callba ck request, 1 new callback request is displayed in the stan dby m ode. Select Sho w to open Callback inbox . Scr oll to a con tact , and press t h e call ke y. Cha nnels Whe n you are c onnecte d to a chan nel, all members j oine d to th e channe l hear yo u t a l k i n g . U p to f i v e c h a n n el s c a n b e a c t i v e a t t h e s a m e t i m e . W h e n m o r e t h a n o n e channel is active, select Swap to change the c han nel yo u want t o tal k to . Cha nnels a re r egister ed wi th a U RL ad dress . One us er re giste rs the channe l URL i n the network by joining t he channel the first time. Cr eate y our o w n cha nnel 1. Sele ct Op ti ons > PTT chan nels . 2. Sele ct Op ti ons > N ew channel > Cr ea te new . 3. Ent er a Channel name . 4. Sele ct a Channel privacy level. 5. Ente r your own nick name i n Nickname . 6. If you w a nt to add a th u mbnail image to the group, select T humbnail and an image. 7. Sele ct Done . When you ha ve created a channel, you are a ske d if you want to send channel i n vitations. Channel invitations a re text me ssages.
91 Join a prec onfigured ch annel A preconfi gu red channel is a t a lk group t h at is set up by your service provider. Only preconfigured users a re allowed to join and u s e the channel. 1. Sele ct Op ti ons > PTT chan nels . 2. Sele ct Op ti ons > N ew channel > Add existing . 3. Ente r the C ha nnel name , Channel address , and Nickname . You can also add a Thumbnail . 4. Sele ct Done . Respon d to a c h annel i nvitatio n To save a received channel invitation, select Opti ons > Save ch annel . The chan nel is a dde d to y our PT T cont acts, channe ls vi ew. PTT se ssio ns PTT sessions are displayed as call bubbles in the PTT display, giving inform ation about the st atu s of t he PTT se ssion s: Wai t âÂÂshown when you pres s and h old the ca ll key and somebody else is st ill speaking i n the PTT s ession Ta l k âÂÂsh own when you pre ss and hold the call key and get the perm ission to spe a k To switch t he loudspeaker on or off, select Op tio ns > A ct ivate loudspeaker or Deactivate loudspeaker . To discon ne ct the s e lected PTT se ssion, select Opt ions > Disco n nec t . â Remote synchronization Sync enables you t o synchronize your calendar, contacts, or n otes with various calendar an d address book applicatio ns on a compa tible compu ter or on the internet. The synchronizat ion application uses SyncML technology for synchronizat ion. Select Menu > Settin gs > Connectivity > Sync . Create a new synchronization pr ofile 1. If no profiles h a ve been defined, t he phone asks you if you want to cre a te a new profile. Select Ye s .
92 To create a new pr ofile in addition to e xisting on es, s e lect Op tio ns > Ne w sync profile . Choose whet h er you wan t to use t h e default set t ing values or copy the values from an e xisting profile to be used as the basis f or the new profile. 2. Defi ne the Applicat ion s to be synch ron ized. Select an application, and edit the synchronization settings: In cl ude in s y nc âÂÂto enable or disable the synch ron ization Remote database âÂÂthe name of the used remo te databa se Synchronisation type âÂÂSel ect Bot h wa y s for synchronization of t he data on your phone and the r em ote database, To phone on ly for the synchr onizat ion of the data on your phon e only, or To se r v e r on ly fo r t he s ync h r oni zat i on o f th e data on the rem ot e database only. 3. Defi ne the Conne cti on s e tti ngs : Server version , Server ID , Data bearer , H ost address , Po r t , User nam e , and Pas s w o r d âÂÂContact your service provid e r or system administ rator for the correct settings. Access point âÂÂOnly visible if In ternet is selected as D ata be are r . Se lect an acc ess po i nt you want to use for the data conn ectio n. Allow sync requests > Ye s âÂÂt o allow that the server starts the synchronization Accept all sync requests > No âÂÂto require a confir m ation before th e serve r sta r ts th e sy n chr on i za ti on Ne twork authent ica tion âÂÂOnly visible if Interne t is selected as Data bearer . To use HTTPS authentication, select Ye s , and enter user name and password in Netw ork user name an d Network password . Sync hronize data In the main view, scroll to a pr of ile, and select Op ti ons > Synchronise . The stat us of th e syn chronization is sh own. After synchronization is complete, select Opt ions > View log t o open a log file showing the synch r onization status ( Com pl et e or Incompl ete ) and how man y calendar or cont a ct entries have bee n added, updated, de le ted, or discarded (not synchronized) in t he phone or on t h e server.
93 â Inf rared Use infrare d t o conne ct two devices a nd transfer data be tween them. With infrared, you can transfe r dat a su ch as busines s cards, calendar notes, a n d media files with a compatible device. Do not point the infrar ed (IR) bea m at anyon e's eye or all ow it t o i n terfer e with oth er IR devices. This device is a Class 1 laser product. Send and receive da ta 1. Ensure that the infra re d ports of t he devices face each other. The positioning of the devices is more im portant t han angle or distance. 2. To turn on infrared on your device, select Menu > Se ttings > Con nec t iv ity > Inf rared . T u rn on in frared on the other device. Wait a few seconds until a n infrared connection is established. 3. To send, loca te t he desired f ile in an a pplication or the file ma nager, and select Op t i ons > Se nd > Via infrar e d . If da t a transfer is n ot st arted soon after th e activati on of the infr a red port , the connection is ca ncelled and must be st arted agai n . All items received through infrared are placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging . â Modem Before you ca n use your phone a s a modem: ⢠Acqui re the appropr iate dat a commun icatio ns softw a re fo r your c omputer. ⢠Subscribe t o t he appropriate n etwork se rvices from your service provider or internet se rvice provider. ⢠Install the appropriat e drivers on you r computer. Select Menu > Settin gs > Connectivity > Modem . To connect the phone to a compatible computer using infr a red, press the scroll ke y. Make su re the infr a red port s of the phone and computer a re directly faci ng each other wi th no obstac les bet w een them . To connect your phon e to a comput e r using Bluetooth wireless t ech nology, initiate the connection fr o m the computer. To activa t e Bluetooth in your phone, select Menu > Connectivity > Bluetooth > Bluetooth > On .
94 If you u se a cable t o connect your phone t o a computer, initiate t he connection fr om the co mput er. No te that you m ay no t be a ble to use s ome of th e other commu nicati on f eatur es when th e phone is use d as a mode m. â USB data cable You can us e the USB data cable to tr ansfer dat a between the phone a nd a compatible PC. You can also us e the USB data cable with Nokia PC Suite. Select Me nu > Settings > Conn ectivity > USB . To s elec t th e def a u lt USB connection mode, select USB m ode and the desired m ode . To have t h e device ask the purpose of the connection each time t he cable is con nected, select Ask o n connection > Ye s . To use t he pho ne wit h Nok ia PC S u ite, se lect PC Suit e . To synchronize media files, such as music, w it h a compatible ve rsion of Windows Me dia Player, select Me dia player . To access files on t h e inserted memory card as a r e movable drive, select Dat a tr an s fer . Aft e r tra ns fe r rin g d at a, en sur e th at it i s saf e to u npl u g th e US B da ta ca bl e fr o m the P C . â Dat a trans fer With data tran sfer you can copy or sy nchron ize cont acts, ca l enda r entr ies, and possibly other data, such a s video clips a nd images , from a compatible phone using a Bluetooth or in frared connection. When both Bluetooth and inf r ared are available on both devices, it is pref e rable to use Bluetooth. Depending on the ot h er phone, synchronization may not be possible and da ta can be copied only once . To transfe r or synchronize data, do the follow ing: 1. Whe n using infrare d, place the devices so that the infrared ports face each other, and a ct ivate infrared on bot h devices. Select Menu > Settings > C onn e cti vi ty > Tr ansfe r . If you have not use d Transfer be fore, information about the application is displayed. Select Cont inue to sta rt tra nsf errin g dat a. If y ou have used Transfe r , se lect Tr ansfer data . 2. Select whet her to use Bluetooth or in frared fo r transferring t he data. Whe n using Bluetooth, the phones ne e d to be paired in or der to transfer data.
95 Depending on the type of t he other phone, an application may be sent and installed on the other phon e to enable the data t ransfer. Follow the instructions. 3. Select what content you want t o be transf e rred t o you r phone. 4. Content is transferred to your phone. The transfer time depends on the amount of data. Y ou can stop t he transfer and continue later. 16. Data manag er â Application manager You can install two t ypes of applications and software t o you r phone: J2M E TM applications based on Java TM tec hnology with the e xtens ion .jad or .jar. Per sonalJ ava TM applications cannot be installed on your phon e. Other a pplications a nd soft w are sui t able for the Symbia n operating system . The installation files have the .sis extension. Only install softw are specifically designed for y o ur phone. Installation file s may be tra n sferre d t o your phone f rom a compatible computer, downloaded during brows in g, or sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment or by using Bluetooth. You can use N okia Application Installer in Nokia PC Suite to install a n application to your phone or a memor y card. To open App. manager , sel e c t Menu > Settings > Da ta m gr . > App. mgr . . Install an application Import ant: O n ly install and use applica tions and other softwa re from trusted sources, such as applicat ions that are Symbian Signed or have passed the Java Ve rif ie d TM testing. Before installation , in App. manager , sc roll to the installation file, and select Opt io ns > V ie w de tails to view inf or mation such as the application type, version number, and the su pplier or manufa ct urer of the applica t ion. The .jar file is required for installing Java applications. If it is missing, the phone may ask you t o download it. To install an application or software package:
96 1. Scroll to an in stallation file. A pplications on the memory card are indicated wit h . 2. Sele ct Op ti ons > Ins t a l l . Alternatively, search the phone memory or t he memory ca rd, select t he application, a nd pre ss the scroll key to start t he in stallation. During the installation, th e phone shows information about the pr og ress of the installation. If you are installing an application without a digital signature or certification, the phone displays a warning. Continue installation only if you are sure of the origins and con t ents of t h e application. To view extra information about the application, scroll to it, and select Op tion s > Go to web address . This option may not be available with all applications. To see w h at software pa cka ges have be en installed or rem oved and w h en, select Opt io ns > View log . Rem ove an application In th e App. manager main view, scroll to the sof tware package, and select Opt io ns > Remove . Appl ication mana ge r sett ings In App. manage r , se le c t Opt ions > Set tings and from the following setti n gs: Software installation âÂÂto select if y o u want to allow installation of all Symbia n applications ( All ) or on ly signed applications ( Signed only ) Online certificate check âÂÂt o select if you want App. manager to check the on line certificates for an application before installing it Default web address âÂÂdefault address used when checking online ce rtificates Java applications may attem pt to, for ex a mple, establish a da t a connection or send a messa g e. To edit the perm issions of an installed Java application and define which access point the application will use, in the main view, scroll to t he application, and select Op tio ns > Open . â File manager In the f ile manager, you can browse, ope n, and manage files and f olde rs in the phone memory or on the me mory card.
97 To see a list of the folder s in the phone memory, select Menu > Settin gs > Data mgr . > File mgr . . Scr oll right to se e the folde r s on the m e mory card. Vie w memory c onsumpt ion Scroll eith e r right or le ft to view the phone memory or the memory card contents . To check memory consum ption of th e curren t memory, select Opti ons > Memory details . The phone c a lculates the appr ox imate amount of fre e memory f or storing data and installing new applications. In th e memory views, you ca n view th e memory consumption of the different applications or file types. If t h e phone memory is getting low, remove some files, or mov e th em to t he me mo r y ca rd. â Device manager You may receive serv e r profiles and configuration settings f r om your service provider or company information m anagement d epartment. To open t h e dev ice manager, select Men u > Se t tings > Dat a m gr. > D evice mgr . . If you have n o se rver pr ofile s defined, t h e phone asks wh e ther you w a nt to defi n e one. To connect to a s erver and receive configuration settings for your phon e , scroll to the serve r profile, and selec t Opt io ns > St art configuration . To edit a server profile, select Op tio ns > E dit profile and from t he following setti n gs: Allow configuration âÂÂTo receive configuration settings from t he server, select Yes . Auto-accept all requests âÂÂIf you want t he phone to as k for confirmation before accepting a configuration from t he server, select No . Contact your se rvice provider, or company inform a tion management departme n t for th e other ser ve r profile settings. â Me m ory c ard Keep all memory cards out of t he reach of small children. Select Menu > Settin gs > Dat a mg r . > Me mory . For details on in serting a m emory card into the phone, see â Get started , â p. 10 . You can use it t o s tore your multimedia files such as vide o clips, music tracks, and sound file s, photos, and me ssaging data, and to back up infor ma tion from phone memo ry.
98 Form at the m em ory c ard When a me m ory card is formatted, a ll data on the ca rd is permanently lost. Some memory cards a re supplied pre form atted an d ot hers re quire formatt ing. 1. Sele ct Op ti ons > Form at memory card . 2. Sele ct Ye s to co nf irm . 3. When form a tting is complete , en ter a na m e for the memory card. Back up a nd restore information To back up information from phone memory to the memory card, select Opti ons > Back up phone memory . To re st ore inf ormation from the memory card to the phone me mory, select Opt io ns > Restore f rom card . You can only ba ck up the phon e memory and re st ore it t o t he same ph one. Loc k t he me mo r y car d To set a pa ssword to help preve n t unauthorized use, select Optio ns > Set password . Y ou are asked to e n ter and confirm your pa ssword. The password c a n be up to eight c har act ers lo ng . Unl ock a me mor y car d If you i nsert anot he r pas sword-protected memory card into your ph one, you are prompted to e n ter the pa ssword of the card. To unlock t he card, select Op ti o ns > Unlock memory card . Ch eck me mory con sumpti on To check t h e memory consumption and the amount of me m ory available on you r memo ry c ard, se lect Optio ns > Mem ory details . â Activa tion keys Digita l righ ts man agem ent Content owners may use different type s of digital rights managemen t (DRM) technologies to protect their intellectual prope rty, including copyrights. This device uses various types of DRM so ftware to acc ess DRM- pro tected c ontent. With this de vice you can acce ss cont ent pr otecte d wit h WMDRM 10, O MA DR M 2.0 and OM A DRM 1 .0. If ce rtain D RM s oftware fai ls to protect the con tent, conten t owners ma y ask that such DRM softw are's ability to a ccess
99 new DRM-protected content be revoked. Revocation may also prevent renew al of such DRM-pro tected c ontent alr eady in you r device. Revocation of suc h DRM softwa re doe s not affect the use of content prote cted with other types of DRM or th e use of non-DRM- protected content. Digital rights man agement (DRM) pr otected cont ent comes with an associated activatio n key that define s your rights to u se the conten t. If your device has OMA DRM protected con tent , to back u p both the activ ation ke ys and th e content, use the backup feature of Nokia PC Suite. Other transf er methods may not transfer the activation k eys which ne ed to be restored with the content for you to be able to continue th e use of OMA DRM protected content af ter the device memor y is formatted. You may also need to res tore the activa tion keys in case the files on your device ge t corrupted. If your device h as WMDRM protected con tent, both the activa tion keys an d the content will be lost if the device mem ory is form atted. You may a lso lose the activation k eys and the content in cas e the files on your devic e get corrupted. Losing the activ ation keys or the content may limit your ability to u se the same content on your de vice aga in. For more information, conta ct your service prov ider. Some activation k eys may be connected to a specific SIM card, and the protected conten t can be accesse d only if the SIM car d is inserted in the device . Select Menu > Settin gs > Dat a mgr . > Actv . keys to vi ew the dig i tal ri gh ts activation key s saved in your phone. To view valid keys ( ) that are con n ected to one or m ore media file s, select Valid keys . Grou p ke ys, which con t ain several ke ys, are indicate d w ith . T o vie w the keys contain e d in the grou p ke y, se l ect the grou p key. To view i nvalid keys ( ) with which the t ime period for usin g the file is exce eded, select In valid keys . To buy more usage time or ex tend the usage period for a media file, select an invalid ke y and Op ti o ns > Get n ew key . It ma y not be possible t o update activat ion keys if web service m essage reception is disa ble d. See â Se rvice message sett in gs,â p. 39. To view activat ion ke ys that are not in use, sele ct Not in u se . U nused a cti vation keys have no m edia files c onn ected to the m . To view de tailed inform ation such a s the valid ity status a nd the abil ity to se nd the file, scroll to a n activation key, and select it .
100 17. Batte ry inf ormatio n â Charging and dis c harging Your device is powered by a rechargeable battery. The battery can be charged and discharged hund reds of times, but it will eve ntually wear out. When the talk and standby times are noticea bly shorter than norma l, replace the battery. Use on ly Nokia approved batteries, and recharge your batter y only with Nokia approved chargers designated for th is device. If a replacement ba ttery is being used for the first time or if the battery has not be en used for a prolonged period, it may be necessary to conne ct the charger, then disconnect and reconnect it to begin chargin g the battery. Unplug the c harger from the electr ical plug and the device when not in use. Do not leave a fully charged battery con nected to a charger, since over charging may shorten its lifetim e. If left unused, a ful ly charged battery will lose its charge over time. If the battery is completely dis charged, it may ta ke severa l minutes be fore the char ging indicator appears on the display or before a ny calls can be made. Use the battery only for its inte nded purpose. Never use any cha rger or battery that is damaged. Do not short-circ uit the batter y. Accidental short- circuiting ca n occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct conn ection of the positive ( ) and negative (â ) terminals of the batte ry. (These look l ike metal strips o n the ba ttery.) This might happen, for example, whe n you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short- circuit ing the te rminals m ay dama ge the bat tery or the connect ing object. Leaving the battery in hot or cold places , such as in a closed car in summer or winter condition s, will reduce the capa city a nd lifetime of the battery. Alwa ys try to ke ep the battery betw een 15ðC and 25ðC (59 ðF and 77ðF). A dev ice with a hot or cold battery may not work temporarily, even wh en the battery is full y charged. Battery performance is par ticularly limited in tem peratures well below fre ezing. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire as they may explode. Batteries may als o explode if damaged. Dispose of batteries according to loca l regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as household waste. Do not dismantle or shred cells or batteries. In th e event of a battery leak, do not a llow the liquid to come in con tact with the skin or eyes. In the event of such a leak , flush your skin or eyes i mmediate ly with water, o r seek med ic al he lp.
101 â Nokia batter y authenticati on guidelines Always u se original No kia batte ries for your safe ty. To che ck that you are ge tting an original Nokia battery, purchase it from an authorized Nokia dealer, look for the Nokia Original Enhancements logo on the pa ckaging, and inspect the hologram label usin g the following step s: Successfu l completion of the four s teps is not a total ass urance of the auth enticity of the battery. If you have any reas on to believe that you r battery is not an a uthentic, original Nokia battery, you should refrain from using it, and ta ke it to the nearest authorized Nokia service point or dealer for a ssistance. Your author ized Nokia service point or dea ler will inspect th e battery for authen ticity. I f authenticity can not be verified, retu rn the battery to the place of purchase. Auth enti cate ho logra m 1. When looking at the hologram on the label, you should see the Nokia connecting hands symbol f rom one angle and the Nokia Original Enhanceme nts logo when looking from another angle. 2. When you angle the hologram left, right, down, and up, you should see 1, 2, 3, and 4 dots on each side respectively. 3. Scratch the side of the label to reveal a 20- digit code, for examp le, 12345 678919 876543 210. Tur n the batter y so that th e numb ers are faci ng upwar ds. The 20- digit c ode reads starti ng from the number at th e top row followed by the bott om row. 4. Confirm that the 20- digit code is valid by followin g the instruc tions at www.nokia .com/ba tterycheck. To cr eate a t ext message , enter the 20-digi t code, for example , 1234 567891 987654 3210, and se nd to 44 7 786 200 276. National and interna tional operator charges will apply. You shou ld rece ive a me ssag e indica ting whe ther th e cod e can be authentica ted.
102 What if your b a tter y is not a uthentic ? If you c annot confir m that you r No kia battery with the ho logram on the label is an a uthentic Nokia battery , please do not use th e battery. Take it to the nearest authorize d Nokia service point or dealer for assistance. The use of a battery that is not approved by the manufacturer may be dangerous and may result in poor performance and damage to your devic e and its enhance ments . It may a lso invalida te an y approval or warran ty ap plying to the device. To find out more abo ut original Nokia ba tteries, vis it www.nokia.com /battery. 18 . Enhan ceme nts Pra ctical rule s about a cces sories and enh ancemen ts ⢠K e ep all accessories a nd enhancements out of the reach of small chi ldren. ⢠When you disconnect the power cord of any accessory or enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, n ot the cord. ⢠Che c k regularly that enhance ments installed in a vehicle are mounted and are operating properly. ⢠In s tallation of a ny complex car enhancements must be m a de by qualified personnel on ly. Car e and ma in te nan ce Your device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The following suggestions will help you protect your warr anty cover age. ⢠K e ep the devic e dry. Precipitation , humidity, and all types of liquids or moisture can conta in minerals th at will c orrode electron ic circuits. I f your de vice does get w et, remove the battery , and allow the device to dry comp letely before replacing it. ⢠Do not use or st or e the device in dus ty, dirty areas. Its moving parts and electronic components can be dam aged. ⢠Do not store th e device i n hot areas . High temper atures ca n s horten the life of electron ic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastic s. ⢠Do not store the de v ice in cold a r eas. When t he device returns to its n ormal temperature, moisture can form in side the device and damage electr onic circuit boards. ⢠Do not attem pt to open the de vice other than as instructed in this guide . ⢠Do n ot dr op, kn ock, or shake th e d evice. Rough h andlin g can br eak inte rna l circuit boar ds an d fin e me chan ics. ⢠Do no t use h a rs h chemi c als , clea ning sol vents, o r stro ng deter gents t o clea n the dev ice.
103 ⢠Do not paint th e device. Paint can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operation. ⢠Use a soft, cle an, d ry cloth to clea n any len ses, su ch as c amera, pr oximity s enso r, and lig ht sens or lens es. ⢠Use on ly the supplied or an approved replacem ent antenna. Unauthorize d antennas, modifications, or attac hments could damage th e device and may violate regulations governing radio devices. ⢠Use chargers indoors. ⢠A lways c reate a backu p of da ta you w ant to ke ep, such as cont acts and calendar notes. ⢠To reset the device from time to time for optimum performan ce, power off the device and remove th e battery . These su ggestio ns apply eq ually to you r device, battery, charger, or a ny enhanc ement . If any device is not w orking properly, take it to th e nearest auth orized serv ice facility for service. D isposa l The crossed-out wheeled-bin symbol on your produc t, literature, or packaging reminds you that in the Eu ropean Union all electrical and electr onic products, batteries, and accum ulators must be tak en to separate collec tion at the end of their working life. Do not dispose of these products as unsor ted municipal waste. Return the products to c ollection to prevent possible harm to th e environme nt or human health from uncontr olled waste disposal and to promote the sustainable reuse of material res ources. Collection information is available from the product retailer, local waste au thorities, national producer responsibility organizations, or your loca l Nokia repre sentative. For more inf ormation , see produ ct Ec o-Declara tion or country-spe cific in formation at www.no kia.com. Add itio nal sa fety infor mation â Sm a ll ch ildren You r device a nd its en hancemen ts may c ontain s mall p a rt s . K eep them o ut of the r each o f small children. â O perat ing en viro nment This device m eets RF exposu re guideli nes when u sed either in the normal us e position against th e ear or wh en positioned at least 2. 2 centimeter s (7/8 inches) a way from th e body. When a carry ca s e, belt clip, or holder is used f or body-worn operation, it sh o uld not contain metal and should position the device the above-stated dist ance from your body.To transmit data files or messages, this device requir es a quality connection to the net work. In some cases, transmission of dat a files or messages may be delayed until such a connection is available. Ensur e the above separa tion distance instruction s are followed until the tran sm ission is com ple te d.
104 Parts of the device ar e magnetic. M etallic materials may be attracted to th e device. Do not place credit cards or other magnetic storage media near the device, because information sto r ed on them may b e erased. â Medic al de vice s Operation of any radio transmitti ng equipment, including w ireless phones, may interfere with the functionality of inadequ ately protected medica l devices. Consult a physician or the manufact urer of the medical de vice to determ ine if they are adequ ately shielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off your device in health care facilities when any r egulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilit ies may be using equ ipment that could be sensitive to exter nal RF energy. Impl anted med ical de vices Manufacturers of medica l devices recommend that a minimum separation of 15.3 centime ters (6 inches) should be m aintained between a wireless device and a n implanted medica l device, suc h as a pacemake r or implanted cardiover ter defibrillato r, to avoid potential interference with the medical device. Persons who have such devices should: ⢠Alway s keep the wirel ess device mor e than 15 .3 centi m eter s (6 i nches ) from the medica l device w hen th e wireles s device is tu rned on. ⢠Not ca rry th e wireles s device in a b reast pocke t. ⢠Hol d the wirele ss device to th e ear opposite th e me dical device to m inimize th e potential fo r in t erf er e nc e. ⢠Turn the wireles s device off immed iately if there is an y rea s on to suspec t that interfere nce is taking plac e. ⢠Read and follow the directions from the manufac turer of their implanted medical device. If you have any questions about us ing your wireless device with an impla nted medical de vi ce , co ns ult y our he a lt h c are p r ov id er . Hear i ng ai ds Some digital wireless devices may in terfere with some hearing aids. If interference occurs, cons ult y our se rvice pr ovide r. â Vehicles RF signals may af fect improperly in stalled or inadequate ly shielded electr onic systems in motor vehicl es such a s el ectronic f uel inj ection s ystems, electron ic antis kid (anti lock) brak ing syst ems, ele ctron ic s peed con tro l syst ems, and air bag s yste m s. For m or e informa tion, check w ith the m anufac turer, or its representa tive, of yo ur vehi cle or any equipment that has bee n added. Only qualified personn el should service th e device or install the dev ice in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty that may apply to
105 the devic e. Check reg ularly tha t all wireles s device e quipment in your veh icle is mo unted and operating pr operly. Do not store or carry flamm able liquids, gases, or e xplosive ma terials in the sa me comp artment a s the device , its pa rts, or enhance ments . For vehi cles eq uipped with an air bag, remembe r that air bags inflate with great force. Do not plac e objects, inclu ding ins talled or portable w ireless equipm ent in t he area over the air ba g or in t he air bag deployment are a. If in-vehicle wire less equipment is improperly installed a nd the air bag inflates, serious injury cou ld result. Using your device w hile flying in air craft is prohibited. Switch off you r dev ice before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be dang erous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the wireless telephone network, and ma y be illegal. â Pot entially e xplosive e nvir onm ent s Switch off your de vice w hen in any area w ith a pote ntially explosi ve atm osphere , and obey all signs and instruction s. Potentially ex plosive atmos pheres include are as where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Switch off the device at refueling points such as near gas pumps at service stations. Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots , storage, and dis tribution a reas; chemica l plants; or w here bla sting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosph ere are often, but not always , clearly marked. Th ey includ e below dec k on boat s , ch em ica l transfer or storage facilities, veh icles using liquefied petrole um gas (such as propane o r butane), and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust, or metal powders. â Em e rgenc y call s Import ant: W ir eless phones, including this device, operate using radio signals, wireless networks, landline network s, and u ser-programmed function s. Because of this, conn ections in all con ditions cann ot be guaranteed. Y ou should never rely sole ly on any wireless device for essen tial communica tions like medica l emergenc ies. To ma ke an emergen cy call : 1. If the device is not on, switch it on. Check for adequate signal strength. Some network s may require that a valid SIM card is properly inserted in the device. 2. Pre s s the end key a s many tim es as ne eded to c lear the display a nd r eady the dev ice for calls. 3. Ent er th e offic ial emer gency nu mber for your p resent l ocation. Emerge ncy num bers va ry by location. 4. P ress th e call key. If c ert a in fe atu re s are in us e, y ou m ay f i rst ne e d to tur n tho s e f eat ure s o f f be fo re yo u can make an e mergency c all. If th e device is in the offline prof ile mode, you may n eed to change
106 the profile to activate the phone fun ction before you can make an emergency call. Con s ult this guide or your service provider for more inform ation. When ma king an emergency ca ll, giv e all the nece ssa ry inform ation as accu rately as possible. Your wireless device may be the only means of communication at the scene of an accident. Do not end the call until give n permission to do so. â Cert ification inf orm ati on (SAR) THIS M OBILE DEVI CE MEETS GUIDELI NE S FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES. Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio wave s recommended by in ternationa l guidelines. These guideline s were developed by the independe nt scientific organization ICNIRP and include safety margins designed to assure the protection of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure guidelines for mob ile devices employ a unit of meas urement known as the Specific Absorption Rate or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the ICNIRP guidelines is 2.0 watts/ kilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of tissue. T es ts for SAR are conducted using standard operating pos itions w ith the devi ce transmitt ing at its highest certified pow er level in all tested frequen cy bands . The actu al SAR level of a n operating device can be bel ow the maxim um value b ecause t he devi c e i s desig ned to us e onl y the p ower req uired to reach the network. That amount changes depending on a number of factors such as how close you are to a network b a se st ation. Th e highes t S A R val ue under t he ICNIRP gu idelines f or use of the device at th e ear is 1.2 4 W/kg. Use of device a ccessories and enha ncement s may r esult in di fferen t SAR values . SAR valu es may vary depending on national reportin g and testing requirements and the networ k band. Additional SAR information may be provided under product information at www.nokia.com.
107 Inde x A access codes barring password 9 chang e 74 lock code 8 , 13 module PIN 9 PIN 8 , 13 PIN2 8 PUK 9 PUK2 9 signing P IN 9 UPIN 8 UPUK 9 access points 79 activation keys 98 act ive s tan db y 16 alarm clock. See clock. application ma nager 95 applications 95 B battery charg ing 12 Bluetooth conne ction set tings 85 disconnecting 87 paired devices 86 receiving data 87 sending da ta 85 bookmarks 61 browser. See web. C cache 64 calcula tor 68 calendar 67 call re gi ster. See log. callb ack requests 88 , 90 calls an swer in g 23 barring 78 confer ence call 23 diverting 78 endin g 22 interna tional 21 makin g 21 options during a ca ll 24 reje cting 23 reje cting with SM S 24 speed dial 22 , 42 swapping 24 voi ce dia l 22 voice mailbox 22 wa iting 24 camer a 53 ca me r a mo d e 15 certifica tes 75 cloc k 66 conne ction mana ger 87 connec tivity 84 conta cts 40 conver ter 68 copyright protection. See activation keys. D data cable 94 data connection indicator s 17 data transfer 94 device ma nager 97 digital r ights management. See activ ation keys . downloading 64 E editing v ideos 44 e-mail ma ilbox 34 se ttings 33 e-mail m essages deleting 35 retr ievi ng 34 en ha nc em e nt s 74 F file m anager 96 Fl ash P layer 58 functional modes 15
108 G gallery 42 transferring videos 45 GPS data 70 H he lp 20 I IM. See i nst ant me ss agin g . indicators 17 infrared 93 in stant mes sagi ng conne ctin g 82 conta cts 84 convers ation 83 groups 82 , 83 , 84 settings 82 K keygu ard. See key pad lock. keypad lock 20 L landmarks 71 listening to m usic 46 log 28 M media player. See RealPlayer. me mory car d 97 me mory con sumpt ion phone memory 97 me nu 19 message settin gs cell broadcast 39 e-mail 38 multimedia s ettings 37 other sett ings 40 ser vice mess ag es 39 text m essages 36 me s sa ges au dio 32 cell broadcast 36 lis tening to 40 multimedia objects 33 organizing 34 outbox 31 , 35 rece iving 33 sen di ng 31 ser vi ce c omm ands 36 ser vi ce me ss age s 34 SIM m essages 36 spe cial message types 33 writin g 31 mobile browser. See web. mobile s earch 60 modem 93 movies , muvees cu stom mu ve es 54 qu ic k muve es 54 music mode 16 musi c pla yer downloading music 48 mu sic sh op 48 playlist s 47 transf erring mus ic 48 musi c.See musi c pla yer. N networ k 78 notes 68 O one-t ouch dial. See speed d ial. P phone mode 15 phonebook. See contacts. profiles 59 PTT. See push to talk. push t o ta lk 87 â 91 R RealPlayer 57 re c or der 56 r ing in g to ne s add to contacts 41 se lecting 59 thre e-dime nsio nal 60 video ringing tones 42 S services. See web. settings con ne ct ion 79 data call 80
109 date 73 enhan cements 74 packet da ta 80 phone 72 phone language 73 predictive t ext inp ut 73 secu rit y 74 Setting w izard 81 speec h 81 time 73 writing language 73 SIM card using phon e with out a SIM card 17 son gs transf erring 48 speed d i al assigning a nu mber 41 , 72 calling 22 cha nging a num ber 72 dele ting a num ber 72 standby mode 16 sy nchro nizati on 91 T text input 73 copying text 30 deleting text 30 predictive 29 themes 58 to-do 68 tran sfer rin g m u sic 48 transferring v ideos 45 tutorial 19 U USB. See data cable. V video call 24 , 25 video call mode 16 video view mode 16 videos transf erring 45 Vis ual Rad io 50 voic e command s 71 voice dialing 22 voice mailbox 71 voic e recorder. Se e recorder. volum e 20 W web blogs 63 bookmarks 61 browser settings 65 browsing 62 con ne ct ing 61 con ne cti on se cu rit y 62 disconnecting 64 fee ds 63 saving a page 64 se ttings 61 viewing a saved page 64 writin g text. See t ext input.